#codal

Thanks to the Association of Law Students in the Philippines South Luzon Chapter for this free Rex RPC codal! #NewsMediaNest #rpc #alsp #codal #rexbookstore #associationoflaestudents #law #jurisdoctor (at Manila, Philippines)
https://www.instagram.com/p/ChMFBq2vHk3/?igshid=NGJjMDIxMWI=

Thanks to the Association of Law Students of the Philippines South Luzon Chapter for this free Rex codal! More power! #NewsMediaNest #codal #laborcode #rexbookstore #alsp #prize #lcp
https://www.instagram.com/p/ChFWNYGvO62/?igshid=NGJjMDIxMWI=

earn codal

raízes - #valedecambra #codal #portugal #landscape #nature #natureza #naturephotography #vilachã #pomar #igersportugal #p3top #portugaldenorteasul #portugalcomefeitos
#nothingisordinary #amar_norte #amar_portugal #detalhesdoclick #bomregisto #igerseurope #decasaemcasa #wu_portugal #shootermag_portugal #shooters_pt #topportugalphoto #portugal_places #portugal_a_gramas #valedecambra_ig #igersvlc #homesweethome #ferreiradecastro (em Vale de Cambra)
https://www.instagram.com/p/CHkrKeEMQ4o/?igshid=16o0c7n31ztzy

raízes - #valedecambra #codal #portugal #landscape #nature #natureza #naturephotography #vilachã #pomar #igersportugal #p3top #portugaldenorteasul #portugalcomefeitos
#nothingisordinary #amar_norte #amar_portugal #detalhesdoclick #bomregisto #igerseurope #decasaemcasa #wu_portugal #shootermag_portugal #shooters_pt #topportugalphoto #portugal_places #portugal_a_gramas #valedecambra_ig #igersvlc #homesweethome #ferreiradecastro (em Vale de Cambra)
https://www.instagram.com/p/CHkrGy6MVl3/?igshid=14sgk844uxoj0

raízes - #valedecambra #codal #portugal #landscape #nature #natureza #naturephotography #vilachã #pomar #igersportugal #p3top #portugaldenorteasul #portugalcomefeitos
#nothingisordinary #amar_norte #amar_portugal #detalhesdoclick #bomregisto #igerseurope #decasaemcasa #wu_portugal #shootermag_portugal #shooters_pt #topportugalphoto #portugal_places #portugal_a_gramas #valedecambra_ig #igersvlc #homesweethome #ferreiradecastro (em Vale de Cambra)
https://www.instagram.com/p/CHkrCjYsaPB/?igshid=1j78kb5ylm8c8

La Cerveza del Viernes con @elgustavoreyes @pablo2284 y @macaa_nilo #codal’inverno #elhonestomike (en El Honesto Mike)
https://www.instagram.com/p/BmmKmHzFL2hKI6Cb-t5RaM6fEO-v7DqtYaBuMA0/?utm_source=ig_tumblr_share&igshid=xc2twhpa7h9k

Codal, cases, and coffee.

Opravdu, už je to jeden rok (a pár dní k tomu), co jsem založil tenhle “blog”. Co si budeme povídat, nebyl jsem za tu dobu moc produktivní, co se psaní týče.

Proč ne vlastně? Myslím, že jsem neměl co psát. Nebo jsem na to neměl čas. Ale spíš jsem neměl co. Když jsem ho zakládal, pořádně jsem taky nevěděl, co a jak. Ale říkal jsem si, že je třeba začít a ono se to nějak rozjede. Že vlastně ani nevadí, že nemám jasno.

Někdo by mohl říct, že jsem měl pravdu. Někdo, že jsem se mýlil. Nicméně jsem začal a opravdu to byl jeden z těch těžších kroků. Možná byste měli pravdu všichni. Kdybych nezačal před rokem a nezaložil svůj tumblr, možná bych sem dnes nepsal tenhle příspěvek (chvíli jsem chtěl napsat “článek”, ale pak jsem si to rozmyslel). Dnes mám trochu jasněji v tom, jaký typ obsahu bych tady chtěl zveřejňovat. Prozrazovat vám to nebudu - co kdyby mi to náhodou nevyšlo? :o)

Nedávno jsem narazil na otázku, proč si vlastně lidé něco píšou, resp. nepíšou. Ať už se jedná o blog, osobní deníček, motivační diář nebo cokoliv dalšího. Napadá mě několik důvodů:

1. něco sdělit světu,
   
2. utřídit si vlastní myšlenky,
3. prostě jen tak něco psát, protože je to zrovna IN.

Určitě by vás napadlo i něco dalšího, záleží jen na vlastní představivosti. Možné jsou i různé kombinace či mnohem rozsáhlejší důvody, proč vlastně dělám to, co dělám. Často se totiž také setkávám s tím, že lidé neví, proč dělají, to co dělají. Já jsem snad konečně ten důvod našel (aspoň v to doufám).

Mým původním záměrem bylo právě utřídění myšlenek. Najednou se to ale přelilo do “sdělení něčeho světu” a pak to byla snaha zase o něco jiného. Momentálně se na to dívám tak, že bych mohl to samé psát někam bokem na papír a bylo by to v podstatě to samé. Pomohlo by mi to stejně a asi bych došel i ke stejnému výsledku. Nedávno jsem si ale uvědomil jednu věc - když něco budu psát, mělo by to k něčemu být. Ano, zní to možná jako samozřejmost (vlastně jsem o pár řádků zmiňoval, že by to tak mělo být), ale není.

Proč tedy psát něco veřejně, když to doma v šuplíku dosáhne stejného cíle? Důvod je poměrně primitivní. Když budu něco psát veřejně, někdo si to může přečíst. :o) Je to vlastně poměrně silná motivace - neztrapnit se (nevím, jestli už se mi to nepovedlo), napsat něco, co bude dávat smysl a hlavně, a to je nejdůležitější, aby to k něčemu bylo. A to nejen mě samotnému, ale i někomu dalšímu. I kdybych sepisováním svých myšlenek měl pomoci jednomu jedinému člověku, udělá mi to radost. Budu se snažit, aby se mi to povedlo.

A buďte prosím shovívaví, jsem teprve na začátku své cesty a sám ještě nevím, kam mě dovede. :o)

What is article 1 of my Constitution?

The national territory consists of the fleshy folds and the flora atop it, and all other fauna it exercises control over.

Laravel is a PHP web framework that is both free and open-source under MIT License. This framework was built by Taylor Otwell and was intentionally built for the development of web applications that follow the MVC (model-view-controller) pattern. In March 2015, this popular web framework was regarded as one of the most popular PHP frameworks out there. This framework is extremely powerful and is designed to give the developer a way to keep their code looking clean and easy to read and comprehend.

Laravel Features: The following list are some of the top features that are most used and loved within the Laravel community. These features are what makes the framework stand out compared to others:

Bundles: Small packages of features that you can easily add to your web applications, ultimately saving code time.
Reverse Routing: Reverse routing makes it possible to change routes at a later time. URI’s are automatically created by Laravel.
View Composer: View composers are blocks of code that are run when a view is loaded.
Restful Controllers: An elective way for isolating the HTTP GET and POST request logic.
Unit Testing: Laravel makes it easy for developers to create unit test in order to prevent regressions in the framework. Tests can be ran through “artisan command-line utility.”
Inversion of Control (IoC) Containers: IoC Containers gives you a method for generating new objects in which you can access from anywhere in your code. With IoC Containers, you will rarely need to bootstrap external libraries.

Learning Laravel: The best way to start learning Laravel is to visit their website and read their official documentation of the framework, which can be found on their website here. Another way of learning more about Laravel is to read the book ‘From Apprentice to Artisan,’ by Taylor Otwell, the creator of Laravel. It is a great guide to advanced app development using the Laravel framework. If you’re more of a visual learner, you can also watch videos on Laracast– a great video tutorial site for developers.

About The Author:

This Article was written by Codal’s Writer. Codal is a UX design and development agency based out of Chicago.

The world of the Internet of Things is here. Our cars automatically unlock, our thermostats automatically adjust to our preferences, and very soon with the implementation of beacon technology- any communication will become automated. The “IoT” revolution is making itself apparent in every aspect of life.

A beacon, or an iBeacon is a small sensor device that uses Bluetooth to interact with a mobile application on a user’s smartphone. They allow mobile applications to interpret the user’s position on a micro-regional scale, and deliver content to users based on location. Soon, beacons will be everywhere and will change the way that we interact with the world. They have so many potential uses- they can be used in airports, sports arenas, trade shows, or retail stores.

Beacons are used for four major functionalities: user analytics, proximity marketing, indoor navigation and contactless payments. First off, beacons are good for marketers because they collect and analyze consumer data and behaviors for improvements. Beacons can collect a large range of data, such as: shopping habits, age, and location. Secondly, retailers can send personalized push notifications with content, promotions and offers to their customers based on the previously analyzed data. Beacons also allow for accurate, real-time indoor navigation within a certain location or venue. This technology also allows for customers to make hands-free payments, and pay through their smartphone when in a retail or grocery store.

In the past, stores have hit many barriers reaching their customers in and out of store. With beacons, retailers can overcome this problem. They can detect when their customer is near the store, are in the store, are near the checkout, are near a specific aisle, or when you leave the store.

Many large stores and companies are already using this awesome technology, such as: Lord & Taylor, American Eagle, Walgreens, Walmart, Macy’s, and
Apple.

Codal is an agile application development company based out of Chicago, with the most beacon-based projects in the area. Some of Codal’s services include: user experience design, cross platform mobile application development, custom web development, mobile ux design, IT strategy and consulting, innovation management, database audits and agile planning. Codal is vastly developing mobile applications and developing software for this Internet of Things revolution that can soon change the way we interact with the world around us. To learn more about the development of beacon-based software, contact Codal.

The line-up for this August’s Breakingtunes Breakingstage in HMV Grafton street & Belfast has been announced today.

Included in next month’s line-up of in-store performances include the ever-brilliant I Have A Tribe, indie-pop act Groom, synth-pop trio Toy Soldier, songwriter Dani and electronic artist Codaí.

Supporting new Irish talent, the partnership between FMC and HMV will showcase acts from the former’s self-building music portal BreakingTunes.com with the artist’s releases stacked and stocked in store each week at HMV’s Grafton Street and Donegall Arcade, Belfast branches.

See below for the full timetable of Breakingstage performances. Each show will take place at 1pm.

HMV GRAFTON STREET, DUBLIN- FRIDAYS AT 1PM
Friday August 1 - Cormac O Caoimh
Friday August 8 - CodaÍ
Friday August 15 - Groom
Friday August 22 - I Have a Tribe
Friday August 29 - Toy Soldier

HMV BELFAST, SATURDAYS AT 1PM
Saturday August 2 - In An Instant
Saturday August 9 - Dani
Saturday August 16 - Team RKT
Saturday August 23 - Silences
Saturday August 30 - The Rising

.@BreakingTunes Breakingstage @HMVGraftonSt & @hmvBelfast August line-ups announced

The line-up for this August’s Breakingtunes Breakingstage in HMV Grafton street & Belfast has been announced today.

[[MORE]]

TITLE XI
LOAN

General Provisions

Article 1933. By the contract of loan, one of the parties delivers to another, either something not consumable so that the latter may use the same for a certain time and return it, in which case the contract is called a commodatum; or money or other consumable thing, upon the condition that the same amount of the same kind and quality shall be paid, in which case the contract is simply called a loan or mutuum.

Commodatum is essentially gratuitous.

Simple loan may be gratuitous or with a stipulation to pay interest.

In commodatum the bailor retains the ownership of the thing loaned, while in simple loan, ownership passes to the borrower. (1740a)

Article 1934. An accepted promise to deliver something by way of commodatum or simple loan is binding upon parties, but the commodatum or simple loan itself shall not be perfected until the delivery of the object of the contract. (n)

CHAPTER 1
Commodatum

SECTION 1
Nature of Commodatum

Article 1935. The bailee in commodatum acquires the use of the thing loaned but not its fruits; if any compensation is to be paid by him who acquires the use, the contract ceases to be a commodatum. (1941a)

Article 1936. Consumable goods may be the subject of commodatum if the purpose of the contract is not the consumption of the object, as when it is merely for exhibition. (n)

Article 1937. Movable or immovable property may be the object of commodatum. (n)

Article 1938. The bailor in commodatum need not be the owner of the thing loaned. (n)

Article 1939. Commodatum is purely personal in character. Consequently:

Article 1940. A stipulation that the bailee may make use of the fruits of the thing loaned is valid. (n)

SECTION 2
Obligations of the Bailee

Article 1941. The bailee is obliged to pay for the ordinary expenses for the use and preservation of the thing loaned. (1743a)

Article 1942. The bailee is liable for the loss of the thing, even if it should be through a fortuitous event:

Article 1943. The bailee does not answer for the deterioration of the thing loaned due only to the use thereof and without his fault. (1746)

Article 1944. The bailee cannot retain the thing loaned on the ground that the bailor owes him something, even though it may be by reason of expenses. However, the bailee has a right of retention for damages mentioned in article 1951. (1747a)

Article 1945. When there are two or more bailees to whom a thing is loaned in the same contract, they are liable solidarily. (1748a)

SECTION 3
Obligations of the Bailor

ARTICLE 1946. The bailor cannot demand the return of the thing loaned till after the expiration of the period stipulated, or after the accomplishment of the use for which the commodatum has been constituted. However, if in the meantime, he should have urgent need of the thing, he may demand its return or temporary use.

In case of temporary use by the bailor, the contract of commodatum is suspended while the thing is in the possession of the bailor. (1749a)

Article 1947. The bailor may demand the thing at will, and the contractual relation is called a precarium, in the following cases:

Article 1948. The bailor may demand the immediate return of the thing if the bailee commits any act of ingratitude specified in article 765. (n)

Article 1949. The bailor shall refund the extraordinary expenses during the contract for the preservation of the thing loaned, provided the bailee brings the same to the knowledge of the bailor before incurring them, except when they are so urgent that the reply to the notification cannot be awaited without danger.

If the extraordinary expenses arise on the occasion of the actual use of the thing by the bailee, even though he acted without fault, they shall be borne equally by both the bailor and the bailee, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. (1751a)

Article 1950. If, for the purpose of making use of the thing, the bailee incurs expenses other than those referred to in articles 1941 and 1949, he is not entitled to reimbursement. (n)

Article 1951. The bailor who, knowing the flaws of the thing loaned, does not advise the bailee of the same, shall be liable to the latter for the damages which he may suffer by reason thereof. (1752)

Article 1952. The bailor cannot exempt himself from the payment of expenses or damages by abandoning the thing to the bailee. (n)

CHAPTER 2
Simple Loan or Mutuum

Article 1953. A person who receives a loan of money or any other fungible thing acquires the ownership thereof, and is bound to pay to the creditor an equal amount of the same kind and quality. (1753a)

Article 1954. A contract whereby one person transfers the ownership of non-fungible things to another with the obligation on the part of the latter to give things of the same kind, quantity, and quality shall be considered a barter. (n)

Article 1955. The obligation of a person who borrows money shall be governed by the provisions of articles 1249 and 1250 of this Code.

If what was loaned is a fungible thing other than money, the debtor owes another thing of the same kind, quantity and quality, even if it should change in value. In case it is impossible to deliver the same kind, its value at the time of the perfection of the loan shall be paid. (1754a)

Article 1956. No interest shall be due unless it has been expressly stipulated in writing. (1755a)

Article 1957. Contracts and stipulations, under any cloak or device whatever, intended to circumvent the laws against usury shall be void. The borrower may recover in accordance with the laws on usury. (n)

Article 1958. In the determination of the interest, if it is payable in kind, its value shall be appraised at the current price of the products or goods at the time and place of payment. (n)

Article 1959. Without prejudice to the provisions of article 2212, interest due and unpaid shall not earn interest. However, the contracting parties may by stipulation capitalize the interest due and unpaid, which as added principal, shall earn new interest. (n)

Article 1960. If the borrower pays interest when there has been no stipulation therefor, the provisions of this Code concerning solutio indebiti, or natural obligations, shall be applied, as the case may be. (n)

Article 1961. Usurious contracts shall be governed by the Usury Law and other special laws, so far as they are not inconsistent with this Code. (n)

TITLE XII
DEPOSIT

CHAPTER 1
Deposit in General and its Different Kinds

Article 1962. A deposit is constituted from the moment a person receives a thing belonging to another, with the obligation of safely keeping it and of returning the same. If the safekeeping of the thing delivered is not the principal purpose of the contract, there is no deposit but some other contract. (1758a)

Article 1963. An agreement to constitute a deposit is binding, but the deposit itself is not perfected until the delivery of the thing. (n)

Article 1964. A deposit may be constituted judicially or extrajudicially. (1759)

Article 1965. A deposit is a gratuitous contract, except when there is an agreement to the contrary, or unless the depositary is engaged in the business of storing goods. (1760a)

Article 1966. Only movable things may be the object of a deposit. (1761)

Article 1967. An extrajudicial deposit is either voluntary or necessary. (1762)

CHAPTER 2
Voluntary Deposit

SECTION 1
General Provisions

Article 1968. A voluntary deposit is that wherein the delivery is made by the will of the depositor. A deposit may also be made by two or more persons each of whom believes himself entitled to the thing deposited with a third person, who shall deliver it in a proper case to the one to whom it belongs. (1763)

Article 1969. A contract of deposit may be entered into orally or in writing. (n)

Article 1970. If a person having capacity to contract accepts a deposit made by one who is incapacitated, the former shall be subject to all the obligations of a depositary, and may be compelled to return the thing by the guardian, or administrator, of the person who made the deposit, or by the latter himself if he should acquire capacity. (1764)

Article 1971. If the deposit has been made by a capacitated person with another who is not, the depositor shall only have an action to recover the thing deposited while it is still in the possession of the depositary, or to compel the latter to pay him the amount by which he may have enriched or benefited himself with the thing or its price. However, if a third person who acquired the thing acted in bad faith, the depositor may bring an action against him for its recovery. (1765a)

SECTION 2
Obligations of the Depositary

Article 1972. The depositary is obliged to keep the thing safely and to return it, when required, to the depositor, or to his heirs and successors, or to the person who may have been designated in the contract. His responsibility, with regard to the safekeeping and the loss of the thing, shall be governed by the provisions of Title I of this Book.

If the deposit is gratuitous, this fact shall be taken into account in determining the degree of care that the depositary must observe. (1766a)

Article 1973. Unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, the depositary cannot deposit the thing with a third person. If deposit with a third person is allowed, the depositary is liable for the loss if he deposited the thing with a person who is manifestly careless or unfit. The depositary is responsible for the negligence of his employees. (n)

Article 1974. The depositary may change the way of the deposit if under the circumstances he may reasonably presume that the depositor would consent to the change if he knew of the facts of the situation. However, before the depositary may make such change, he shall notify the depositor thereof and wait for his decision, unless delay would cause danger. (n)

Article 1975. The depositary holding certificates, bonds, securities or instruments which earn interest shall be bound to collect the latter when it becomes due, and to take such steps as may be necessary in order that the securities may preserve their value and the rights corresponding to them according to law.

The above provision shall not apply to contracts for the rent of safety deposit boxes. (n)

Article 1976. Unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, the depositary may commingle grain or other articles of the same kind and quality, in which case the various depositors shall own or have a proportionate interest in the mass. (n)

Article 1977. The depositary cannot make use of the thing deposited without the express permission of the depositor.

Otherwise, he shall be liable for damages.

However, when the preservation of the thing deposited requires its use, it must be used but only for that purpose. (1767a)

Article 1978. When the depositary has permission to use the thing deposited, the contract loses the concept of a deposit and becomes a loan or commodatum, except where safekeeping is still the principal purpose of the contract.

The permission shall not be presumed, and its existence must be proved. (1768a)

Article 1979. The depositary is liable for the loss of the thing through a fortuitous event:

Article 1980. Fixed, savings, and current deposits of money in banks and similar institutions shall be governed by the provisions concerning simple loan. (n)

Article 1981. When the thing deposited is delivered closed and sealed, the depositary must return it in the same condition, and he shall be liable for damages should the seal or lock be broken through his fault.

Fault on the part of the depositary is presumed, unless there is proof to the contrary.

As regards the value of the thing deposited, the statement of the depositor shall be accepted, when the forcible opening is imputable to the depositary, should there be no proof to the contrary. However, the courts may pass upon the credibility of the depositor with respect to the value claimed by him.

When the seal or lock is broken, with or without the depositary’s fault, he shall keep the secret of the deposit. (1769a)

Article 1982. When it becomes necessary to open a locked box or receptacle, the depositary is presumed authorized to do so, if the key has been delivered to him; or when the instructions of the depositor as regards the deposit cannot be executed without opening the box or receptacle. (n)

Article 1983. The thing deposited shall be returned with all its products, accessories and accessions.

Should the deposit consist of money, the provisions relative to agents in article 1896 shall be applied to the depositary. (1770)

Article 1984. The depositary cannot demand that the depositor prove his ownership of the thing deposited.

Nevertheless, should he discover that the thing has been stolen and who its true owner is, he must advise the latter of the deposit.

If the owner, in spite of such information, does not claim it within the period of one month, the depositary shall be relieved of all responsibility by returning the thing deposited to the depositor.

If the depositary has reasonable grounds to believe that the thing has not been lawfully acquired by the depositor, the former may return the same. (1771a)

Article 1985. When there are two or more depositors, if they are not solidary, and the thing admits of division, each one cannot demand more than his share.

When there is solidarity or the thing does not admit of division, the provisions of articles 1212 and 1214 shall govern. However, if there is a stipulation that the thing should be returned to one of the depositors, the depositary shall return it only to the person designated. (1772a)

Article 1986. If the depositor should lose his capacity to contract after having made the deposit, the thing cannot be returned except to the persons who may have the administration of his property and rights. (1773)

Article 1987. If at the time the deposit was made a place was designated for the return of the thing, the depositary must take the thing deposited to such place; but the expenses for transportation shall be borne by the depositor.

If no place has been designated for the return, it shall be made where the thing deposited may be, even if it should not be the same place where the deposit was made, provided that there was no malice on the part of the depositary. (1774)

Article 1988. The thing deposited must be returned to the depositor upon demand, even though a specified period or time for such return may have been fixed.

This provision shall not apply when the thing is judicially attached while in the depositary’s possession, or should he have been notified of the opposition of a third person to the return or the removal of the thing deposited. In these cases, the depositary must immediately inform the depositor of the attachment or opposition. (1775)

Article 1989. Unless the deposit is for a valuable consideration, the depositary who may have justifiable reasons for not keeping the thing deposited may, even before the time designated, return it to the depositor; and if the latter should refuse to receive it, the depositary may secure its consignation from the court. (1776a)

Article 1990. If the depositary by force majeure or government order loses the thing and receives money or another thing in its place, he shall deliver the sum or other thing to the depositor. (1777a)

Article 1991. The depositor’s heir who in good faith may have sold the thing which he did not know was deposited, shall only be bound to return the price he may have received or to assign his right of action against the buyer in case the price has not been paid him. (1778)

SECTION 3
Obligations of the Depositor

Article 1992. If the deposit is gratuitous, the depositor is obliged to reimburse the depositary for the expenses he may have incurred for the preservation of the thing deposited. (1779a)

Article 1993. The depositor shall reimburse the depositary for any loss arising from the character of the thing deposited, unless at the time of the constitution of the deposit the former was not aware of, or was not expected to know the dangerous character of the thing, or unless he notified the depositary of the same, or the latter was aware of it without advice from the depositor. (n)

Article 1994. The depositary may retain the thing in pledge until the full payment of what may be due him by reason of the deposit. (1780)

Article 1995. A deposit its extinguished:

CHAPTER 3
Necessary Deposit

Article 1996. A deposit is necessary:

Article 1997. The deposit referred to in No. 1 of the preceding article shall be governed by the provisions of the law establishing it, and in case of its deficiency, by the rules on voluntary deposit.

The deposit mentioned in No. 2 of the preceding article shall be regulated by the provisions concerning voluntary deposit and by article 2168. (1782)

Article 1998. The deposit of effects made by travellers in hotels or inns shall also be regarded as necessary. The keepers of hotels or inns shall be responsible for them as depositaries, provided that notice was given to them, or to their employees, of the effects brought by the guests and that, on the part of the latter, they take the precautions which said hotel-keepers or their substitutes advised relative to the care and vigilance of their effects. (1783)

Article 1999. The hotel-keeper is liable for the vehicles, animals and articles which have been introduced or placed in the annexes of the hotel. (n)

Article 2000. The responsibility referred to in the two preceding articles shall include the loss of, or injury to the personal property of the guests caused by the servants or employees of the keepers of hotels or inns as well as strangers; but not that which may proceed from any force majeure. The fact that travellers are constrained to rely on the vigilance of the keeper of the hotels or inns shall be considered in determining the degree of care required of him. (1784a)

Article 2001. The act of a thief or robber, who has entered the hotel is not deemed force majeure, unless it is done with the use of arms or through an irresistible force. (n)

Article 2002. The hotel-keeper is not liable for compensation if the loss is due to the acts of the guest, his family, servants or visitors, or if the loss arises from the character of the things brought into the hotel. (n)

Article 2003. The hotel-keeper cannot free himself from responsibility by posting notices to the effect that he is not liable for the articles brought by the guest. Any stipulation between the hotel-keeper and the guest whereby the responsibility of the former as set forth in articles 1998 to 2001 is suppressed or diminished shall be void. (n)

Article 2004. The hotel-keeper has a right to retain the things brought into the hotel by the guest, as a security for credits on account of lodging, and supplies usually furnished to hotel guests. (n)

CHAPTER 4

Sequestration or Judicial Deposit

Article 2005. A judicial deposit or sequestration takes place when an attachment or seizure of property in litigation is ordered. (1785)

Article 2006. Movable as well as immovable property may be the object of sequestration. (1786)

Article 2007. The depositary of property or objects sequestrated cannot be relieved of his responsibility until the controversy which gave rise thereto has come to an end, unless the court so orders. (1787a)

Article 2008. The depositary of property sequestrated is bound to comply, with respect to the same, with all the obligations of a good father of a family. (1788)

Article 2009. As to matters not provided for in this Code, judicial sequestration shall be governed by the Rules of Court. (1789a)

TITLE XIII
ALEATORY CONTRACTS

General Provision

Article 2010. By an aleatory contract, one of the parties or both reciprocally bind themselves to give or to do something in consideration of what the other shall give or do upon the happening of an event which is uncertain, or which is to occur at an indeterminate time. (1790)

CHAPTER 1
Insurance

Article 2011. The contract of insurance is governed by special laws. Matters not expressly provided for in such special laws shall be regulated by this Code. (n)

Article 2012. Any person who is forbidden from receiving any donation under article 739 cannot be named beneficiary of a life insurance policy by the person who cannot make any donation to him, according to said article. (n)

CHAPTER 2
Gambling

Article 2013. A game of chance is that which depends more on chance or hazard than or skill or ability. For the purposes of the following articles, in case of doubt a game is deemed to be one of chance. (n)

Article 2014. No action can be maintained by the winner for the collection of what he has won in a game of chance. But any loser in a game of chance may recover his loss from the winner, with legal interest from the time he paid the amount lost, and subsidiarily from the operator or manager of the gambling house. (1799a)

Article 2015. If cheating or deceit is committed by the winner, he, and subsidiarily the operator or manager of the gambling house, shall pay by way of exemplary damages, not less than the equivalent of the sum lost, in addition to the latter amount. If both the winner and the loser have perpetrated fraud, no action for recovery can be brought by either. (n)

Article 2016. If the loser refuses or neglects to bring an action to recover what has been lost, his or her creditors, spouse, descendants or other persons entitled to be supported by the loser may institute the action. The sum thereby obtained shall be applied to the creditors’ claims, or to the support of the spouse or relatives, as the case may be. (n)

Article 2017. The provisions of article 2014 and 2016 apply when two or more persons bet in a game of chance, although they take no active part in the game itself. (1799a)

Article 2018. If a contract which purports to be for the delivery of goods, securities or shares of stock is entered into with the intention that the difference between the price stipulated and the exchange or market price at the time of the pretended delivery shall be paid by the loser to the winner, the transaction is null and void. The loser may recover what he has paid. (n)

Article 2019. Betting on the result of sports, athletic competitions, or games of skill may be prohibited by local ordinances. (n)

Article 2020. The loser in any game which is not one of chance, when there is no local ordinance which prohibits betting therein, is under obligation to pay his loss, unless the amount thereof is excessive under the circumstances. In the latter case, the court shall reduce the loss to the proper sum. (1801a)

CHAPTER 3
Life Annuity

Article 2021. The aleatory contract of life annuity binds the debtor to pay an annual pension or income during the life of one or more determinate persons in consideration of a capital consisting of money or other property, whose ownership is transferred to him at once with the burden of the income. (1802a)

Article 2022. The annuity may be constituted upon the life of the person who gives the capital, upon that of a third person, or upon the lives of various persons, all of whom must be living at the time the annuity is established.

It may also be constituted in favor of the person or persons upon whose life or lives the contract is entered into, or in favor of another or other persons. (1803a)

Article 2023. Life annuity shall be void if constituted upon the life of a person who was already dead at the time the contract was entered into, or who was at that time suffering from an illness which caused his death within twenty days following said date. (1804)

Article 2024. The lack of payment of the income due does not authorize the recipient of the life annuity to demand the reimbursement of the capital or to retake possession of the property alienated, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary; he shall have only a right judicially to claim the payment of the income in arrears and to require a security for the future income, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. (1805a)

Article 2025. The income corresponding to the year in which the person enjoying it dies shall be paid in proportion to the days during which he lived; if the income should be paid by installments in advance, the whole amount of the installment which began to run during his life shall be paid. (1806)

Article 2026. He who constitutes an annuity by gratuitous title upon his property, may provide at the time the annuity is established that the same shall not be subject to execution or attachment on account of the obligations of the recipient of the annuity. If the annuity was constituted in fraud of creditors, the latter may ask for the execution or attachment of the property. (1807a)

Article 2027. No annuity shall be claimed without first proving the existence of the person upon whose life the annuity is constituted. (1808)

TITLE XIV
COMPROMISES AND ARBITRATIONS

CHAPTER 1
Compromises

Article 2028. A compromise is a contract whereby the parties, by making reciprocal concessions, avoid a litigation or put an end to one already commenced. (1809a)

Article 2029. The court shall endeavor to persuade the litigants in a civil case to agree upon some fair compromise. (n)

Article 2030. Every civil action or proceeding shall be suspended:

The duration and terms of the suspension of the civil action or proceeding and similar matters shall be governed by such provisions of the rules of court as the Supreme Court shall promulgate. Said rules of court shall likewise provide for the appointment and duties of amicable compounders. (n)

Article 2031. The courts may mitigate the damages to be paid by the losing party who has shown a sincere desire for a compromise. (n)

Article 2032. The court’s approval is necessary in compromises entered into by guardians, parents, absentee’s representatives, and administrators or executors of decedent’s estates. (1810a)

Article 2033. Juridical persons may compromise only in the form and with the requisites which may be necessary to alienate their property. (1812a)

Article 2034. There may be a compromise upon the civil liability arising from an offense; but such compromise shall not extinguish the public action for the imposition of the legal penalty. (1813)

Article 2035. No compromise upon the following questions shall be valid:

Article 2036. A compromise comprises only those objects which are definitely stated therein, or which by necessary implication from its terms should be deemed to have been included in the same.

A general renunciation of rights is understood to refer only to those that are connected with the dispute which was the subject of the compromise. (1815)

Article 2037. A compromise has upon the parties the effect and authority of res judicata; but there shall be no execution except in compliance with a judicial compromise. (1816)

Article 2038. A compromise in which there is mistake, fraud, violence, intimidation, undue influence, or falsity of documents, is subject to the provisions of article 1330 of this Code.

However, one of parties cannot set up a mistake of fact as against the other if the latter, by virtue of the compromise, has withdrawn from a litigation already commenced. (1817a)

Article 2039. When the parties compromise generally on all differences which they might have with each other, the discovery of documents referring to one or more but not to all of the questions settled shall not itself be a cause for annulment or rescission of the compromise, unless said documents have been concealed by one of the parties.

But the compromise may be annulled or rescinded if it refers only to one thing to which one of the parties has no right, as shown by the newly-discovered documents. (n)

Article 2040. If after a litigation has been decided by a final judgment, a compromise should be agreed upon, either or both parties being unaware of the existence of the final judgment, the compromise may be rescinded.

Ignorance of a judgment which may be revoked or set aside is not a valid ground for attacking a compromise. (1819a)

Article 2041. If one of the parties fails or refuses to abide by the compromise, the other party may either enforce the compromise or regard it as rescinded and insist upon his original demand. (n)

CHAPTER 2
Arbitrations

Article 2042. The same persons who may enter into a compromise may submit their controversies to one or more arbitrators for decision. (1820a)

Article 2043. The provisions of the preceding Chapter upon compromises shall also be applicable to arbitrations. (1821a)

Article 2044. Any stipulation that the arbitrators’ award or decision shall be final, is valid, without prejudice to articles 2038, 2039, and 2040. (n)

Article 2045. Any clause giving one of the parties power to choose more arbitrators than the other is void and of no effect. (n)

Article 2046. The appointment of arbitrators and the procedure for arbitration shall be governed by the provisions of such rules of court as the Supreme Court shall promulgate. (n)

TITLE XV
GUARANTY

CHAPTER 1
Nature and Extent of Guaranty

Article 2047. By guaranty a person, called the guarantor, binds himself to the creditor to fulfill the obligation of the principal debtor in case the latter should fail to do so.

If a person binds himself solidarily with the principal debtor, the provisions of Section 4, Chapter 3, Title I of this Book shall be observed. In such case the contract is called a suretyship. (1822a)

Article 2048. A guaranty is gratuitous, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. (n)

Article 2049. A married woman may guarantee an obligation without the husband’s consent, but shall not thereby bind the conjugal partnership, except in cases provided by law. (n)

Article 2050. If a guaranty is entered into without the knowledge or consent, or against the will of the principal debtor, the provisions of articles 1236 and 1237 shall apply. (n)

Article 2051. A guaranty may be conventional, legal or judicial, gratuitous, or by onerous title.

It may also be constituted, not only in favor of the principal debtor, but also in favor of the other guarantor, with the latter’s consent, or without his knowledge, or even over his objection. (1823)

Article 2052. A guaranty cannot exist without a valid obligation.

Nevertheless, a guaranty may be constituted to guarantee the performance of a voidable or an unenforceable contract. It may also guarantee a natural obligation. (1824a)

Article 2053. A guaranty may also be given as security for future debts, the amount of which is not yet known; there can be no claim against the guarantor until the debt is liquidated. A conditional obligation may also be secured. (1825a)

Article 2054. A guarantor may bind himself for less, but not for more than the principal debtor, both as regards the amount and the onerous nature of the conditions.

Should he have bound himself for more, his obligations shall be reduced to the limits of that of the debtor. (1826)

Article 2055. A guaranty is not presumed; it must be express and cannot extend to more than what is stipulated therein.

If it be simple or indefinite, it shall compromise not only the principal obligation, but also all its accessories, including the judicial costs, provided with respect to the latter, that the guarantor shall only be liable for those costs incurred after he has been judicially required to pay. (1827a)

Article 2056. One who is obliged to furnish a guarantor shall present a person who possesses integrity, capacity to bind himself, and sufficient property to answer for the obligation which he guarantees. The guarantor shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the court of the place where this obligation is to be complied with. (1828a)

Article 2057. If the guarantor should be convicted in first instance of a crime involving dishonesty or should become insolvent, the creditor may demand another who has all the qualifications required in the preceding article. The case is excepted where the creditor has required and stipulated that a specified person should be the guarantor. (1829a)

CHAPTER 2
Effects of Guaranty

SECTION 1
Effects of Guaranty Between the Guarantor and the Creditor

Article 2058. The guarantor cannot be compelled to pay the creditor unless the latter has exhausted all the property of the debtor, and has resorted to all the legal remedies against the debtor. (1830a)

Article 2059. The excussion shall not take place:

Article 2060. In order that the guarantor may make use of the benefit of exclusion, he must set it up against the creditor upon the latter’s demand for payment from him, and point out to the creditor available property of the debtor within Philippine territory, sufficient to cover the amount of the debt. (1832)

Article 2061. The guarantor having fulfilled all the conditions required in the preceding article, the creditor who is negligent in exhausting the property pointed out shall suffer the loss, to the extent of said property, for the insolvency of the debtor resulting from such negligence. (1833a)

Article 2062. In every action by the creditor, which must be against the principal debtor alone, except in the cases mentioned in article 2059, the former shall ask the court to notify the guarantor of the action. The guarantor may appear so that he may, if he so desire, set up such defenses as are granted him by law. The benefit of excussion mentioned in article 2058 shall always be unimpaired, even if judgment should be rendered against the principal debtor and the guarantor in case of appearance by the latter. (1834a)

Article 2063. A compromise between the creditor and the principal debtor benefits the guarantor but does not prejudice him. That which is entered into between the guarantor and the creditor benefits but does not prejudice the principal debtor. (1835a)

Article 2064. The guarantor of a guarantor shall enjoy the benefit of excussion, both with respect to the guarantor and to the principal debtor. (1836)

Article 2065. Should there be several guarantors of only one debtor and for the same debt, the obligation to answer for the same is divided among all. The creditor cannot claim from the guarantors except the shares which they are respectively bound to pay, unless solidarity has been expressly stipulated.

The benefit of division against the co-guarantors ceases in the same cases and for the same reasons as the benefit of excussion against the principal debtor. (1837)

SECTION 2
Effects of Guaranty Between the Debtor and the Guarantor

Article 2066. The guarantor who pays for a debtor must be indemnified by the latter.

The indemnity comprises:

Article 2067. The guarantor who pays is subrogated by virtue thereof to all the rights which the creditor had against the debtor.

If the guarantor has compromised with the creditor, he cannot demand of the debtor more than what he has really paid. (1839)

Article 2068. If the guarantor should pay without notifying the debtor, the latter may enforce against him all the defenses which he could have set up against the creditor at the time the payment was made. (1840)

Article 2069. If the debt was for a period and the guarantor paid it before it became due, he cannot demand reimbursement of the debtor until the expiration of the period unless the payment has been ratified by the debtor. (1841a)

Article 2070. If the guarantor has paid without notifying the debtor, and the latter not being aware of the payment, repeats the payment, the former has no remedy whatever against the debtor, but only against the creditor. Nevertheless, in case of a gratuitous guaranty, if the guarantor was prevented by a fortuitous event from advising the debtor of the payment, and the creditor becomes insolvent, the debtor shall reimburse the guarantor for the amount paid. (1842a)

Article 2071. The guarantor, even before having paid, may proceed against the principal debtor:

In all these cases, the action of the guarantor is to obtain release from the guaranty, or to demand a security that shall protect him from any proceedings by the creditor and from the danger of insolvency of the debtor. (1834a)

Article 2072. If one, at the request of another, becomes a guarantor for the debt of a third person who is not present, the guarantor who satisfies the debt may sue either the person so requesting or the debtor for reimbursement. (n)

SECTION 3.
Effects of Guaranty as Between Co-Guarantors

Article 2073. When there are two or more guarantors of the same debtor and for the same debt, the one among them who has paid may demand of each of the others the share which is proportionally owing from him.

If any of the guarantors should be insolvent, his share shall be borne by the others, including the payer, in the same proportion.

The provisions of this article shall not be applicable, unless the payment has been made by virtue of a judicial demand or unless the principal debtor is insolvent. (1844a)

Article 2074. In the case of the preceding article, the co-guarantors may set up against the one who paid, the same defenses which would have pertained to the principal debtor against the creditor, and which are not purely personal to the debtor. (1845) ARTICLE 2075. A sub-guarantor, in case of the insolvency of the guarantor for whom he bound himself, is responsible to the co-guarantors in the same terms as the guarantor. (1846)

CHAPTER 3
Extinguishment of Guaranty

Article 2076. The obligation of the guarantor is extinguished at the same time as that of the debtor, and for the same causes as all other obligations. (1847)

Article 2077. If the creditor voluntarily accepts immovable or other property in payment of the debt, even if he should afterwards lose the same through eviction, the guarantor is released. (1849)

Article 2078. A release made by the creditor in favor of one of the guarantors, without the consent of the others, benefits all to the extent of the share of the guarantor to whom it has been granted. (1850)

Article 2079. An extension granted to the debtor by the creditor without the consent of the guarantor extinguishes the guaranty. The mere failure on the part of the creditor to demand payment after the debt has become due does not of itself constitute any extension of time referred to herein. (1851a)

Article 2080. The guarantors, even though they be solidary, are released from their obligation whenever by some act of the creditor they cannot be subrogated to the rights, mortgages, and preference of the latter. (1852)

Article 2081. The guarantor may set up against the creditor all the defenses which pertain to the principal debtor and are inherent in the debt; but not those that are personal to the debtor. (1853)

CHAPTER 4
Legal and Judicial Bonds

Article 2082. The bondsman who is to be offered in virtue of a provision of law or of a judicial order shall have the qualifications prescribed in article 2056 and in special laws. (1854a)

Article 2083. If the person bound to give a bond in the cases of the preceding article, should not be able to do so, a pledge or mortgage considered sufficient to cover his obligation shall be admitted in lieu thereof. (1855)

Article 2084. A judicial bondsman cannot demand the exhaustion of the property of the principal debtor.

A sub-surety in the same case, cannot demand the exhaustion of the property of the debtor or of the surety.

TITLE XVI
PLEDGE, MORTGAGE AND ANTICHRESIS

CHAPTER 1
Provisions Common to Pledge and Mortgage

Article 2085. The following requisites are essential to the contracts of pledge and mortgage:

Third persons who are not parties to the principal obligation may secure the latter by pledging or mortgaging their own property. (1857)

Article 2086. The provisions of article 2052 are applicable to a pledge or mortgage. (n)

Article 2087. It is also of the essence of these contracts that when the principal obligation becomes due, the things in which the pledge or mortgage consists may be alienated for the payment to the creditor. (1858)

Article 2088. The creditor cannot appropriate the things given by way of pledge or mortgage, or dispose of them. Any stipulation to the contrary is null and void. (1859a)

Article 2089. A pledge or mortgage is indivisible, even though the debt may be divided among the successors in interest of the debtor or of the creditor.

Therefore, the debtor’s heir who has paid a part of the debt cannot ask for the proportionate extinguishment of the pledge or mortgage as long as the debt is not completely satisfied.

Neither can the creditor’s heir who received his share of the debt return the pledge or cancel the mortgage, to the prejudice of the other heirs who have not been paid.

From these provisions is excepted the case in which, there being several things given in mortgage or pledge, each one of them guarantees only a determinate portion of the credit.

The debtor, in this case, shall have a right to the extinguishment of the pledge or mortgage as the portion of the debt for which each thing is specially answerable is satisfied. (1860)

Article 2090. The indivisibility of a pledge or mortgage is not affected by the fact that the debtors are not solidarily liable. (n)

Article 2091. The contract of pledge or mortgage may secure all kinds of obligations, be they pure or subject to a suspensive or resolutory condition. (1861)

Article 2092. A promise to constitute a pledge or mortgage gives rise only to a personal action between the contracting parties, without prejudice to the criminal responsibility incurred by him who defrauds another, by offering in pledge or mortgage as unencumbered, things which he knew were subject to some burden, or by misrepresenting himself to be the owner of the same. (1862)

CHAPTER 2
Pledge

Article 2093. In addition to the requisites prescribed in article 2085, it is necessary, in order to constitute the contract of pledge, that the thing pledged be placed in the possession of the creditor, or of a third person by common agreement. (1863)

Article 2094. All movables which are within commerce may be pledged, provided they are susceptible of possession. (1864)

Article 2095. Incorporeal rights, evidenced by negotiable instruments, bills of lading, shares of stock, bonds, warehouse receipts and similar documents may also be pledged. The instrument proving the right pledged shall be delivered to the creditor, and if negotiable, must be indorsed. (n)

Article 2096. A pledge shall not take effect against third persons if a description of the thing pledged and the date of the pledge do not appear in a public instrument. (1865a)

Article 2097. With the consent of the pledgee, the thing pledged may be alienated by the pledgor or owner, subject to the pledge. The ownership of the thing pledged is transmitted to the vendee or transferee as soon as the pledgee consents to the alienation, but the latter shall continue in possession. (n)

Article 2098. The contract of pledge gives a right to the creditor to retain the thing in his possession or in that of a third person to whom it has been delivered, until the debt is paid. (1866a)

Article 2099. The creditor shall take care of the thing pledged with the diligence of a good father of a family; he has a right to the reimbursement of the expenses made for its preservation, and is liable for its loss or deterioration, in conformity with the provisions of this Code. (1867)

Article 2100. The pledgee cannot deposit the thing pledged with a third person, unless there is a stipulation authorizing him to do so.

The pledgee is responsible for the acts of his agents or employees with respect to the thing pledged. (n)

Article 2101. The pledgor has the same responsibility as a bailor in commodatum in the case under article 1951. (n)

Article 2102. If the pledge earns or produces fruits, income, dividends, or interests, the creditor shall compensate what he receives with those which are owing him; but if none are owing him, or insofar as the amount may exceed that which is due, he shall apply it to the principal. Unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, the pledge shall extend to the interest and earnings of the right pledged.

In case of a pledge of animals, their offspring shall pertain to the pledgor or owner of animals pledged, but shall be subject to the pledge, if there is no stipulation to the contrary. (1868a)

Article 2103. Unless the thing pledged is expropriated, the debtor continues to be the owner thereof.

Nevertheless, the creditor may bring the actions which pertain to the owner of the thing pledged in order to recover it from, or defend it against a third person. (1869)

Article 2104. The creditor cannot use the thing pledged, without the authority of the owner, and if he should do so, or should misuse the thing in any other way, the owner may ask that it be judicially or extrajudicially deposited. When the preservation of the thing pledged requires its use, it must be used by the creditor but only for that purpose. (1870a)

Article 2105. The debtor cannot ask for the return of the thing pledged against the will of the creditor, unless and until he has paid the debt and its interest, with expenses in a proper case. (1871)

Article 2106. If through the negligence or wilful act of the pledgee, the thing pledged is in danger of being lost or impaired, the pledgor may require that it be deposited with a third person. (n)

Article 2107. If there are reasonable grounds to fear the destruction or impairment of the thing pledged, without the fault of the pledgee, the pledgor may demand the return of the thing, upon offering another thing in pledge, provided the latter is of the same kind as the former and not of inferior quality, and without prejudice to the right of the pledgee under the provisions of the following article.

The pledgee is bound to advise the pledgor, without delay, of any danger to the thing pledged. (n)

Article 2108. If, without the fault of the pledgee, there is danger of destruction, impairment, or diminution in value of the thing pledged, he may cause the same to be sold at a public sale. The proceeds of the auction shall be a security for the principal obligation in the same manner as the thing originally pledged. (n)

Article 2109. If the creditor is deceived on the substance or quality of the thing pledged, he may either claim another thing in its stead, or demand immediate payment of the principal obligation. (n)

Article 2110. If the thing pledged is returned by the pledgee to the pledgor or owner, the pledge is extinguished. Any stipulation to the contrary shall be void.

If subsequent to the perfection of the pledge, the thing is in the possession of the pledgor or owner, there is a prima facie presumption that the same has been returned by the pledgee. This same presumption exists if the thing pledged is in the possession of a third person who has received it from the pledgor or owner after the constitution of the pledge. (n)

Article 2111. A statement in writing by the pledgee that he renounces or abandons the pledge is sufficient to extinguish the pledge. For this purpose, neither the acceptance by the pledgor or owner, nor the return of the thing pledged is necessary, the pledgee becoming a depositary. (n)

Article 2112. The creditor to whom the credit has not been satisfied in due time, may proceed before a Notary Public to the sale of the thing pledged. This sale shall be made at a public auction, and with notification to the debtor and the owner of the thing pledged in a proper case, stating the amount for which the public sale is to be held. If at the first auction the thing is not sold, a second one with the same formalities shall be held; and if at the second auction there is no sale either, the creditor may appropriate the thing pledged. In this case he shall be obliged to give an acquittance for his entire claim. (1872a)

Article 2113. At the public auction, the pledgor or owner may bid. He shall, moreover, have a better right if he should offer the same terms as the highest bidder.

The pledgee may also bid, but his offer shall not be valid if he is the only bidder. (n)

Article 2114. All bids at the public auction shall offer to pay the purchase price at once. If any other bid is accepted, the pledgee is deemed to have been received the purchase price, as far as the pledgor or owner is concerned. (n)

Article 2115. The sale of the thing pledged shall extinguish the principal obligation, whether or not the proceeds of the sale are equal to the amount of the principal obligation, interest and expenses in a proper case. If the price of the sale is more than said amount, the debtor shall not be entitled to the excess, unless it is otherwise agreed. If the price of the sale is less, neither shall the creditor be entitled to recover the deficiency, notwithstanding any stipulation to the contrary. (n)

Article 2116. After the public auction, the pledgee shall promptly advise the pledgor or owner of the result thereof. (n)

Article 2117. Any third person who has any right in or to the thing pledged may satisfy the principal obligation as soon as the latter becomes due and demandable. (n)

Article 2118. If a credit which has been pledged becomes due before it is redeemed, the pledgee may collect and receive the amount due. He shall apply the same to the payment of his claim, and deliver the surplus, should there be any, to the pledgor. (n)

Article 2119. If two or more things are pledged, the pledgee may choose which he will cause to be sold, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary. He may demand the sale of only as many of the things as are necessary for the payment of the debt. (n) ARTICLE 2120. If a third party secures an obligation by pledging his own movable property under the provisions of article 2085 he shall have the same rights as a guarantor under articles 2066 to 2070, and articles 2077 to 2081. He is not prejudiced by any waiver of defense by the principal obligor. (n)

Article 2121. Pledges created by operation of law, such as those referred to in articles 546, 1731, and 1994, are governed by the foregoing articles on the possession, care and sale of the thing as well as on the termination of the pledge. However, after payment of the debt and expenses, the remainder of the price of the sale shall be delivered to the obligor. (n)

Article 2122. A thing under a pledge by operation of law may be sold only after demand of the amount for which the thing is retained. The public auction shall take place within one month after such demand. If, without just grounds, the creditor does not cause the public sale to be held within such period, the debtor may require the return of the thing. (n)

Article 2123. With regard to pawnshops and other establishments, which are engaged in making loans secured by pledges, the special laws and regulations concerning them shall be observed, and subsidiarily, the provisions of this Title. (1873a)

CHAPTER 3
Mortgage

Article 2124. Only the following property may be the object of a contract of mortgage:

Nevertheless, movables may be the object of a chattel mortgage. (1874a)

Article 2125. In addition to the requisites stated in article 2085, it is indispensable, in order that a mortgage may be validly constituted, that the document in which it appears be recorded in the Registry of Property. If the instrument is not recorded, the mortgage is nevertheless binding between the parties.

The persons in whose favor the law establishes a mortgage have no other right than to demand the execution and the recording of the document in which the mortgage is formalized. (1875a)

Article 2126. The mortgage directly and immediately subjects the property upon which it is imposed, whoever the possessor may be, to the fulfillment of the obligation for whose security it was constituted. (1876)

Article 2127. The mortgage extends to the natural accessions, to the improvements, growing fruits, and the rents or income not yet received when the obligation becomes due, and to the amount of the indemnity granted or owing to the proprietor from the insurers of the property mortgaged, or in virtue of expropriation for public use, with the declarations, amplifications and limitations established by law, whether the estate remains in the possession of the mortgagor, or it passes into the hands of a third person. (1877)

Article 2128. The mortgage credit may be alienated or assigned to a third person, in whole or in part, with the formalities required by law. (1878)

Article 2129. The creditor may claim from a third person in possession of the mortgaged property, the payment of the part of the credit secured by the property which said third person possesses, in the terms and with the formalities which the law establishes. (1879)

Article 2130. A stipulation forbidding the owner from alienating the immovable mortgaged shall be void. (n)

Article 2131. The form, extent and consequences of a mortgage, both as to its constitution, modification and extinguishment, and as to other matters not included in this Chapter, shall be governed by the provisions of the Mortgage Law and of the Land Registration Law. (1880a)

CHAPTER 4
Antichresis

Article 2132. By the contract of antichresis the creditor acquires the right to receive the fruits of an immovable of his debtor, with the obligation to apply them to the payment of the interest, if owing, and thereafter to the principal of his credit. (1881)

Article 2133. The actual market value of the fruits at the time of the application thereof to the interest and principal shall be the measure of such application. (n)

Article 2134. The amount of the principal and of the interest shall be specified in writing; otherwise, the contract of antichresis shall be void. (n)

Article 2135. The creditor, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary, is obliged to pay the taxes and charges upon the estate.

He is also bound to bear the expenses necessary for its preservation and repair.

The sums spent for the purposes stated in this article shall be deducted from the fruits. (1882)

Article 2136. The debtor cannot reacquire the enjoyment of the immovable without first having totally paid what he owes the creditor.

But the latter, in order to exempt himself from the obligations imposed upon him by the preceding article, may always compel the debtor to enter again upon the enjoyment of the property, except when there is a stipulation to the contrary. (1883)

Article 2137. The creditor does not acquire the ownership of the real estate for non-payment of the debt within the period agreed upon.

Every stipulation to the contrary shall be void. But the creditor may petition the court for the payment of the debt or the sale of the real property. In this case, the Rules of Court on the foreclosure of mortgages shall apply. (1884a)

Article 2138. The contracting parties may stipulate that the interest upon the debt be compensated with the fruits of the property which is the object of the antichresis, provided that if the value of the fruits should exceed the amount of interest allowed by the laws against usury, the excess shall be applied to the principal. (1885a)

Article 2139. The last paragraph of article 2085, and articles 2089 to 2091 are applicable to this contract. (1886a)

CHAPTER 5
Chattel Mortgage

Article 2140. By a chattel mortgage, personal property is recorded in the Chattel Mortgage Register as a security for the performance of an obligation. If the movable, instead of being recorded, is delivered to the creditor or a third person, the contract is a pledge and not a chattel mortgage. (n)

Article 2141. The provisions of this Code on pledge, insofar as they are not in conflict with the Chattel Mortgage Law shall be applicable to chattel mortgages. (n)

[[MORE]]

[REPUBLIC ACT NO. 10607]

AN ACT STRENGTHENING THE INSURANCE INDUSTRY, FURTHER AMENDING PRESIDENTIAL DECREE NO. 612, OTHERWISE KNOWN AS “THE INSURANCE CODE”, AS AMENDED BY PRESIDENTIAL DECREE NOS. 1141, 1280, 1455, 1460, 1814 AND 1981, AND BATAS PAMBANSA BLG. 874, AND FOR OTHER PURPOSES

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the Philippines in Congress assembled:

SECTION 1. Presidential Decree No. 612, as amended, is hereby further amended to read as follows:

“GENERAL PROVISIONS

“SECTION 1. This Decree shall be known as ‘The Insurance Code’.

“SEC. 2. Whenever used in this Code, the following terms shall have the respective meanings hereinafter set forth or indicated, unless the context otherwise requires:

“(a) A contract of insurance is an agreement whereby one undertakes for a consideration to indemnify another against loss, damage or liability arising from an unknown or contingent event.

“A contract of suretyship shall be deemed to be an insurance contract, within the meaning of this Code, only if made by a surety who or which, as such, is doing an insurance business as hereinafter provided.

“(b) The term doing an insurance business or transacting an insurance business, within the meaning of this Code, shall include:

“(1) Making or proposing to make, as insurer, any insurance contract;

“(2) Making or proposing to make, as surety, any contract of suretyship as a vocation and not as merely incidental to any other legitimate business or activity of the surety;

“(3) Doing any kind of business, including a reinsurance business, specifically recognized as constituting the doing of an insurance business within the meaning of this Code;

“(4) Doing or proposing to do any business in substance equivalent to any of the foregoing in a manner designed to evade the provisions of this Code.

“In the application of the provisions of this Code, the fact that no profit is derived from the making of insurance contracts, agreements or transactions or that no separate or direct consideration is received therefor, shall not be deemed conclusive to show that the making thereof does not constitute the doing or transacting of an insurance business.

“© As used in this Code, the term Commissioner means the Insurance Commissioner.

“CHAPTER I

“THE CONTRACT OF INSURANCE

“TITLE 1

“WHAT MAY BE INSURED

“SEC. 3. Any contingent or unknown event, whether past or future, which may damnify a person having an insurable interest, or create a liability against him, may be insured against, subject to the provisions of this chapter.

“The consent of the spouse is not necessary for the validity of an insurance policy taken out by a married person on his or her life or that of his or her children.

“All rights, title and interest in the policy of insurance taken out by an original owner on the life or health of the person insured shall automatically vest in the latter upon the death of the original owner, unless otherwise provided for in the policy.

“SEC. 4. The preceding section does not authorize an insurance for or against the drawing of any lottery, or for or against any chance or ticket in a lottery drawing a prize.

“SEC. 5. All kinds of insurance are subject to the provisions of this chapter so far as the provisions can apply.

“TITLE 2

“PARTIES TO THE CONTRACT

“SEC. 6. Every corporation, partnership, or association, duly authorized to transact insurance business as elsewhere provided in this Code, may be an insurer.

“SEC. 7. Anyone except a public enemy may be insured.

“SEC. 8. Unless the policy otherwise provides, where a mortgagor of property effects insurance in his own name providing that the loss shall be payable to the mortgagee, or assigns a policy of insurance to a mortgagee, the insurance is deemed to be upon the interest of the mortgagor, who does not cease to be a party to the original contract, and any act of his, prior to the loss, which would otherwise avoid the insurance, will have the same effect, although the property is in the hands of the mortgagee, but any act which, under the contract of insurance, is to be performed by the mortgagor, may be performed by the mortgagee therein named, with the same effect as if it had been performed by the mortgagor.

“SEC. 9. If an insurer assents to the transfer of an insurance from a mortgagor to a mortgagee, and, at the time of his assent, imposes further obligations on the assignee, making a new contract with him, the acts of the mortgagor cannot affect the rights of said assignee.

“TITLE 3

“INSURABLE INTEREST

“SEC. 10. Every person has an insurable interest in the life and health:

“(a) Of himself, of his spouse and of his children;

“(b) Of any person on whom he depends wholly or in part for education or support, or in whom he has a pecuniary interest;

“© Of any person under a legal obligation to him for the payment of money, or respecting property or services, of which death or illness might delay or prevent the performance; and

“(d) Of any person upon whose life any estate or interest vested in him depends.

“SEC. 11. The insured shall have the right to change the beneficiary he designated in the policy, unless he has expressly waived this right in said policy. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event the insured does not change the beneficiary during his lifetime, the designation shall be deemed irrevocable.

“SEC. 12. The interest of a beneficiary in a life insurance policy shall be forfeited when the beneficiary is the principal, accomplice, or accessory in willfully bringing about the death of the insured. In such a case, the share forfeited shall pass on to the other beneficiaries, unless otherwise disqualified. In the absence of other beneficiaries, the proceeds shall be paid in accordance with the policy contract. If the policy contract is silent, the proceeds shall be paid to the estate of the insured.

“SEC. 13. Every interest in property, whether real or personal, or any relation thereto, or liability in respect thereof, of such nature that a contemplated peril might directly damnify the insured, is an insurable interest.

“SEC. 14. An insurable interest in property may consist in:

“(a) An existing interest;

“(b) An inchoate interest founded on an existing interest; or

“© An expectancy, coupled with an existing interest in that out of which the expectancy arises.

“SEC. 15. A carrier or depository of any kind has an insurable interest in a thing held by him as such, to the extent of his liability but not to exceed the value thereof.

“SEC. 16. A mere contingent or expectant interest in any thing, not founded on an actual right to the thing, nor upon any valid contract for it, is not insurable.

“SEC. 17. The measure of an insurable interest in property is the extent to which the insured might be damnified by loss or injury thereof.

“SEC. 18. No contract or policy of insurance on property shall be enforceable except for the benefit of some person having an insurable interest in the property insured.

“SEC. 19. An interest in property insured must exist when the insurance takes effect, and when the loss occurs, but need not exist in the meantime; and interest in the life or health of a person insured must exist when the insurance takes effect, but need not exist thereafter or when the loss occurs.

“SEC. 20. Except in the cases specified in the next four sections, and in the cases of life, accident, and health insurance, a change of interest in any part of a thing insured unaccompanied by a corresponding change of interest in the insurance, suspends the insurance to an equivalent extent, until the interest in the thing and the interest in the insurance are vested in the same person.

“SEC. 21. A change of interest in a thing insured, after the occurrence of an injury which results in a loss, does not affect the right of the insured to indemnity for the loss.

“SEC. 22. A change of interest in one or more of several distinct things, separately insured by one policy, does not avoid the insurance as to the others.

“SEC. 23. A change of interest, by will or succession, on the death of the insured, does not avoid an insurance; and his interest in the insurance passes to the person taking his interest in the thing insured.

“SEC. 24. A transfer of interest by one of several partners, joint owners, or owners in common, who are jointly insured, to the others, does not avoid an insurance even though it has been agreed that the insurance shall cease upon an alienation of the thing insured.

“SEC. 25. Every stipulation in a policy of insurance for the payment of loss whether the person insured has or has not any interest in the property insured, or that the policy shall be received as proof of such interest, and every policy executed by way of gaming or wagering, is void.

“TITLE 4

“CONCEALMENT

“SEC. 26. A neglect to communicate that which a party knows and ought to communicate, is called a concealment.

“SEC. 27. A concealment whether intentional or unintentional entitles the injured party to rescind a contract of insurance.

“SEC. 28. Each party to a contract of insurance must communicate to the other, in good faith, all facts within his knowledge which are material to the contract and as to which he makes no warranty, and which the other has not the means of ascertaining.

“SEC. 29. An intentional and fraudulent omission, on the part of one insured, to communicate information of matters proving or tending to prove the falsity of a warranty, entitles the insurer to rescind.

“SEC. 30. Neither party to a contract of insurance is bound to communicate information of the matters following, except in answer to the inquiries of the other:

“(a) Those which the other knows;

“(b) Those which, in the exercise of ordinary care, the other ought to know, and of which the former has no reason to suppose him ignorant;

“© Those of which the other waives communication;

“(d) Those which prove or tend to prove the existence of a risk excluded by a warranty, and which are not otherwise material; and

“(e) Those which relate to a risk excepted from the policy and which are not otherwise material.

“SEC. 31. Materiality is to be determined not by the event, but solely by the probable and reasonable influence of the facts upon the party to whom the communication is due, in forming his estimate of the disadvantages of the proposed contract, or in making his inquiries.

“SEC. 32. Each party to a contract of insurance is bound to know all the general causes which are open to his inquiry, equally with that of the other, and which may affect the political or material perils contemplated; and all general usages of trade.

“SEC. 33. The right to information of material facts may be waived, either by the terms of insurance or by neglect to make inquiry as to such facts, where they are distinctly implied in other facts of which information is communicated.

“SEC. 34. Information of the nature or amount of the interest of one insured need not be communicated unless in answer to an inquiry, except as prescribed by Section 51.

“SEC. 35. Neither party to a contract of insurance is bound to communicate, even upon inquiry, information of his own judgment upon the matters in question.

“TITLE 5

“REPRESENTATION

“SEC. 36. A representation may be oral or written.

“SEC. 37. A representation may be made at the time of, or before, issuance of the policy.

“SEC. 38. The language of a representation is to be interpreted by the same rules as the language of contracts in general.

“SEC. 39. A representation as to the future is to be deemed a promise, unless it appears that it was merely a statement of belief or expectation.

“SEC. 40. A representation cannot qualify an express provision in a contract of insurance, but it may qualify an implied warranty.

“SEC. 41. A representation may be altered or withdrawn before the insurance is effected, but not afterwards.

“SEC. 42. A representation must be presumed to refer to the date on which the contract goes into effect.

“SEC. 43. When a person insured has no personal knowledge of a fact, he may nevertheless repeat information which he has upon the subject, and which he believes to be true, with the explanation that he does so on the information of others; or he may submit the information, in its whole extent, to the insurer; and in neither case is he responsible for its truth, unless it proceeds from an agent of the insured, whose duty it is to give the information.

“SEC. 44. A representation is to be deemed false when the facts fail to correspond with its assertions or stipulations.

“SEC. 45. If a representation is false in a material point, whether affirmative or promissory, the injured party is entitled to rescind the contract from the time when the representation becomes false.

“SEC. 46. The materiality of a representation is determined by the same rules as the materiality of a concealment.

“SEC. 47. The provisions of this chapter apply as well to a modification of a contract of insurance as to its original formation.

“SEC. 48. Whenever a right to rescind a contract of insurance is given to the insurer by any provision of this chapter, such right must be exercised previous to the commencement of an action on the contract.

“After a policy of life insurance made payable on the death of the insured shall have been in force during the lifetime of the insured for a period of two (2) years from the date of its issue or of its last reinstatement, the insurer cannot prove that the policy is void ab initio or is rescindable by reason of the fraudulent concealment or misrepresentation of the insured or his agent.

“TITLE 6

“THE POLICY

“SEC. 49. The written instrument in which a contract of insurance is set forth, is called a policy of insurance.

“SEC. 50. The policy shall be in printed form which may contain blank spaces; and any word, phrase, clause, mark, sign, symbol, signature, number, or word necessary to complete the contract of insurance shall be written on the blank spaces provided therein.

“Any rider, clause, warranty or endorsement purporting to be part of the contract of insurance and which is pasted or attached to said policy is not binding on the insured, unless the descriptive title or name of the rider, clause, warranty or endorsement is also mentioned and written on the blank spaces provided in the policy.

“Unless applied for by the insured or owner, any rider, clause, warranty or endorsement issued after the original policy shall be countersigned by the insured or owner, which countersignature shall be taken as his agreement to the contents of such rider, clause, warranty or endorsement.

“Notwithstanding the foregoing, the policy may be in electronic form subject to the pertinent provisions of Republic Act No. 8792, otherwise known as the ‘Electronic Commerce Act’ and to such rules and regulations as may be prescribed by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 51. A policy of insurance must specify:

“(a) The parties between whom the contract is made;

“(b) The amount to be insured except in the cases of open or running policies;

“© The premium, or if the insurance is of a character where the exact premium is only determinable upon the termination of the contract, a statement of the basis and rates upon which the final premium is to be determined;

“(d) The property or life insured;

“(e) The interest of the insured in property insured, if he is not the absolute owner thereof;

“(f) The risks insured against; and

“(g) The period during which the insurance is to continue.

“SEC. 52. Cover notes may be issued to bind insurance temporarily pending the issuance of the policy. Within sixty (60) days after issue of a cover note, a policy shall be issued in lieu thereof, including within its terms the identical insurance bound under the cover note and the premium therefor.

“Cover notes may be extended or renewed beyond such sixty (60) days with the written approval of the Commissioner if he determines that such extension is not contrary to and is not for the purpose of violating any provisions of this Code. The Commissioner may promulgate rules and regulations governing such extensions for the purpose of preventing such violations and may by such rules and regulations dispense with the requirement of written approval by him in the case of extension in compliance with such rules and regulations.

“SEC. 53. The insurance proceeds shall be applied exclusively to the proper interest of the person in whose name or for whose benefit it is made unless otherwise specified in the policy.

“SEC. 54. When an insurance contract is executed with an agent or trustee as the insured, the fact that his principal or beneficiary is the real party in interest may be indicated by describing the insured as agent or trustee, or by other general words in the policy.

“SEC. 55. To render an insurance effected by one partner or part-owner, applicable to the interest of his co-partners or other part-owners, it is necessary that the terms of the policy should be such as are applicable to the joint or common interest.

“SEC. 56. When the description of the insured in a policy is so general that it may comprehend any person or any class of persons, only he who can show that it was intended to include him, can claim the benefit of the policy.

“SEC. 57. A policy may be so framed that it will inure to the benefit of whomsoever, during the continuance of the risk, may become the owner of the interest insured.

“SEC. 58. The mere transfer of a thing insured does not transfer the policy, but suspends it until the same person becomes the owner of both the policy and the thing insured.

“SEC. 59. A policy is either open, valued or running.

“SEC. 60. An open policy is one in which the value of the thing insured is not agreed upon, and the amount of the insurance merely represents the insurer’s maximum liability. The value of such thing insured shall be ascertained at the time of the loss.

“SEC. 61. A valued policy is one which expresses on its face an agreement that the thing insured shall be valued at a specific sum.

“SEC. 62. A running policy is one which contemplates successive insurances, and which provides that the object of the policy may be from time to time defined, especially as to the subjects of insurance, by additional statements or indorsements.

“SEC. 63. A condition, stipulation, or agreement in any policy of insurance, limiting the time for commencing an action thereunder to a period of less than one (1) year from the time when the cause of action accrues, is void.

“SEC. 64. No policy of insurance other than life shall be cancelled by the insurer except upon prior notice thereof to the insured, and no notice of cancellation shall be effective unless it is based on the occurrence, after the effective date of the policy, of one or more of the following:

“(a) Nonpayment of premium;

“(b) Conviction of a crime arising out of acts increasing the hazard insured against;

“© Discovery of fraud or material misrepresentation;

“(d) Discovery of willful or reckless acts or omissions increasing the hazard insured against;

“(e) Physical changes in the property insured which result in the property becoming uninsurable;

“(f) Discovery of other insurance coverage that makes the total insurance in excess of the value of the property insured; or

“(g) A determination by the Commissioner that the continuation of the policy would violate or would place the insurer in violation of this Code.

“SEC. 65. All notices of cancellation mentioned in the preceding section shall be in writing, mailed or delivered to the named insured at the address shown in the policy, or to his broker provided the broker is authorized in writing by the policy owner to receive the notice of cancellation on his behalf, and shall state:

“(a) Which of the grounds set forth in Section 64 is relied upon; and

“(b) That, upon written request of the named insured, the insurer will furnish the facts on which the cancellation is based.

“SEC. 66. In case of insurance other than life, unless the insurer at least forty-five (45) days in advance of the end of the policy period mails or delivers to the named insured at the address shown in the policy notice of its intention not to renew the policy or to condition its renewal upon reduction of limits or elimination of coverages, the named insured shall be entitled to renew the policy upon payment of the premium due on the effective date of the renewal. Any policy written for a term of less than one (1) year shall be considered as if written for a term of one (1) year. Any policy written for a term longer than one (1) year or any policy with no fixed expiration date shall be considered as if written for successive policy periods or terms of one (1) year.

“TITLE 7

“WARRANTIES

“SEC. 67. A warranty is either expressed or implied.

“SEC. 68. A warranty may relate to the past, the present, the future, or to any or all of these.

“SEC. 69. No particular form of words is necessary to create a warranty.

“SEC. 70. Without prejudice to Section 51, every express warranty, made at or before the execution of a policy, must be contained in the policy itself, or in another instrument signed by the insured and referred to in the policy as making a part of it.

“SEC. 71. A statement in a policy, of a matter relating to the person or thing insured, or to the risk, as fact, is an express warranty thereof.

“SEC. 72. A statement in a policy, which imparts that it is intended to do or not to do a thing which materially affects the risk, is a warranty that such act or omission shall take place.

“SEC. 73. When, before the time arrives for the performance of a warranty relating to the future, a loss insured against happens, or performance becomes unlawful at the place of the contract, or impossible, the omission to fulfill the warranty does not avoid the policy.

“SEC. 74. The violation of a material warranty, or other material provision of a policy, on the part of either party thereto, entitles the other to rescind.

“SEC. 75. A policy may declare that a violation of specified provisions thereof shall avoid it, otherwise the breach of an immaterial provision does not avoid the policy.

“SEC. 76. A breach of warranty without fraud merely exonerates an insurer from the time that it occurs, or where it is broken in its inception, prevents the policy from attaching to the risk.

“TITLE 8

“PREMIUM

“SEC. 77. An insurer is entitled to payment of the premium as soon as the thing insured is exposed to the peril insured against. Notwithstanding any agreement to the contrary, no policy or contract of insurance issued by an insurance company is valid and binding unless and until the premium thereof has been paid, except in the case of a life or an industrial life policy whenever the grace period provision applies, or whenever under the broker and agency agreements with duly licensed intermediaries, a ninety (90)-day credit extension is given. No credit extension to a duly licensed intermediary should exceed ninety (90) days from date of issuance of the policy.

“SEC. 78. Employees of the Republic of the Philippines, including its political subdivisions and instrumentalities, and government-owned or -controlled corporations, may pay their insurance premiums and loan obligations through salary deduction: Provided, That the treasurer, cashier, paymaster or official of the entity employing the government employee is authorized, notwithstanding the provisions of any existing law, rules and regulations to the contrary, to make deductions from the salary, wage or income of the latter pursuant to the agreement between the insurer and the government employee and to remit such deductions to the insurer concerned, and collect such reasonable fee for its services.

“SEC. 79. An acknowledgment in a policy or contract of insurance or the receipt of premium is conclusive evidence of its payment, so far as to make the policy binding, notwithstanding any stipulation therein that it shall not be binding until the premium is actually paid.

“SEC. 80. A person insured is entitled to a return of premium, as follows:

“(a) To the whole premium if no part of his interest in the thing insured be exposed to any of the perils insured against;

“(b) Where the insurance is made for a definite period of time and the insured surrenders his policy, to such portion of the premium as corresponds with the unexpired time, at a pro rata rate, unless a short period rate has been agreed upon and appears on the face of the policy, after deducting from the whole premium any claim for loss or damage under the policy which has previously accrued: Provided, That no holder of a life insurance policy may avail himself of the privileges of this paragraph without sufficient cause as otherwise provided by law.

“SEC. 81. If a peril insured against has existed, and the insurer has been liable for any period, however short, the insured is not entitled to return of premiums, so far as that particular risk is concerned.

“SEC. 82. A person insured is entitled to a return of the premium when the contract is voidable, and subsequently annulled under the provisions of the Civil Code; or on account of the fraud or misrepresentation of the insurer, or of his agent, or on account of facts, or the existence of which the insured was ignorant of without his fault; or when by any default of the insured other than actual fraud, the insurer never incurred any liability under the policy.

“A person insured is not entitled to a return of premium if the policy is annulled, rescinded or if a claim is denied by reason of fraud.

“SEC. 83. In case of an over insurance by several insurers other than life, the insured is entitled to a ratable return of the premium, proportioned to the amount by which the aggregate sum insured in all the policies exceeds the insurable value of the thing at risk.

“SEC. 84. An insurer may contract and accept payments, in addition to regular premium, for the purpose of paying future premiums on the policy or to increase the benefits thereof.

“TITLE 9

“LOSS

“SEC. 85. An agreement not to transfer the claim of the insured against the insurer after the loss has happened, is void if made before the loss except as otherwise provided in the case of life insurance.

“SEC. 86. Unless otherwise provided by the policy, an insurer is liable for a loss of which a peril insured against was the proximate cause, although a peril not contemplated by the contract may have been a remote cause of the loss; but he is not liable for a loss of which the peril insured against was only a remote cause.

“SEC. 87. An insurer is liable where the thing insured is rescued from a peril insured against that would otherwise have caused a loss, if, in the course of such rescue, the thing is exposed to a peril not insured against, which permanently deprives the insured of its possession, in whole or in part; or where a loss is caused by efforts to rescue the thing insured from a peril insured against.

“SEC. 88. Where a peril is especially excepted in a contract of insurance, a loss, which would not have occurred but for such peril, is thereby excepted although the immediate cause of the loss was a peril which was not excepted.

“SEC. 89. An insurer is not liable for a loss caused by the willful act or through the connivance of the insured; but he is not exonerated by the negligence of the insured, or of the insurance agents or others.

“TITLE 10

“NOTICE OF LOSS

“SEC. 90. In case of loss upon an insurance against fire, an insurer is exonerated, if written notice thereof be not given to him by an insured, or some person entitled to the benefit of the insurance, without unnecessary delay. For other non-life insurance, the Commissioner may specify the period for the submission of the notice of loss.

“SEC. 91. When a preliminary proof of loss is required by a policy, the insured is not bound to give such proof as would be necessary in a court of justice; but it is sufficient for him to give the best evidence which he has in his power at the time.

“SEC. 92. All defects in a notice of loss, or in preliminary proof thereof, which the insured might remedy, and which the insurer omits to specify to him, without unnecessary delay, as grounds of objection, are waived.

“SEC. 93. Delay in the presentation to an insurer of notice or proof of loss is waived if caused by any act of him, or if he omits to take objection promptly and specifically upon that ground.

“SEC. 94. If the policy requires, by way of preliminary proof of loss, the certificate or testimony of a person other than the insured, it is sufficient for the insured to use reasonable diligence to procure it, and in case of the refusal of such person to give it, then to furnish reasonable evidence to the insurer that such refusal was not induced by any just grounds of disbelief in the facts necessary to be certified or testified.

“TITLE 11

“DOUBLE INSURANCE

“SEC. 95. A double insurance exists where the same person is insured by several insurers separately in respect to the same subject and interest.

“SEC. 96. Where the insured in a policy other than life is over insured by double insurance:

“(a) The insured, unless the policy otherwise provides, may claim payment from the insurers in such order as he may select, up to the amount for which the insurers are severally liable under their respective contracts;

“(b) Where the policy under which the insured claims is a valued policy, any sum received by him under any other policy shall be deducted from the value of the policy without regard to the actual value of the subject matter insured;

“© Where the policy under which the insured claims is an unvalued policy, any sum received by him under any policy shall be deducted against the full insurable value, for any sum received by him under any policy;

“(d) Where the insured receives any sum in excess of the valuation in the case of valued policies, or of the insurable value in the case of unvalued policies, he must hold such sum in trust for the insurers, according to their right of contribution among themselves;

“(e) Each insurer is bound, as between himself and the other insurers, to contribute ratably to the loss in proportion to the amount for which he is liable under his contract.

“TITLE 12

“REINSURANCE

“SEC. 97. A contract of reinsurance is one by which an insurer procures a third person to insure him against loss or liability by reason of such original insurance.

“SEC. 98. Where an insurer obtains reinsurance, except under automatic reinsurance treaties, he must communicate all the representations of the original insured, and also all the knowledge and information he possesses, whether previously or subsequently acquired, which are material to the risk.

“SEC. 99. A reinsurance is presumed to be a contract of indemnity against liability, and not merely against damage.

“SEC. 100. The original insured has no interest in a contract of reinsurance.

“CHAPTER II

“CLASSES OF INSURANCE

“TITLE I

“MARINE INSURANCE

“SUB-TITLE 1-A

“DEFINITION

“SEC. 101. Marine Insurance includes:

“(a) Insurance against loss of or damage to:

“(1) Vessels, craft, aircraft, vehicles, goods, freights, cargoes, merchandise, effects, disbursements, profits, moneys, securities, choses in action, instruments of debts, valuable papers, bottomry, and respondentia interests and all other kinds of property and interests therein, in respect to, appertaining to or in connection with any and all risks or perils of navigation, transit or transportation, or while being assembled, packed, crated, baled, compressed or similarly prepared for shipment or while awaiting shipment, or during any delays, storage, transhipment, or reshipment incident thereto, including war risks, marine builder’s risks, and all personal property floater risks;

“(2) Person or property in connection with or appertaining to a marine, inland marine, transit or transportation insurance, including liability for loss of or damage arising out of or in connection with the construction, repair, operation, maintenance or use of the subject matter of such insurance (but not including life insurance or surety bonds nor insurance against loss by reason of bodily injury to any person arising out of ownership, maintenance, or use of automobiles);

“(3) Precious stones, jewels, jewelry, precious metals, whether in course of transportation or otherwise; and

“(4) Bridges, tunnels and other instrumentalities of transportation and communication (excluding buildings, their furniture and furnishings, fixed contents and supplies held in storage); piers, wharves, docks and slips, and other aids to navigation and transportation, including dry docks and marine railways, dams and appurtenant facilities for the control of waterways.

“(b) Marine protection and indemnity insurance, meaning insurance against, or against legal liability of the insured for loss, damage, or expense incident to ownership, operation, chartering, maintenance, use, repair, or construction of any vessel, craft or instrumentality in use of ocean or inland waterways, including liability of the insured for personal injury, illness or death or for loss of or damage to the property of another person.

“SUB-TITLE 1-B

“INSURABLE INTEREST

“SEC. 102. The owner of a ship has in all cases an insurable interest in it, even when it has been chartered by one who covenants to pay him its value in case of loss: Provided, That in this case the insurer shall be liable for only that part of the loss which the insured cannot recover from the charterer.

“SEC. 103. The insurable interest of the owner of the ship hypothecated by bottomry is only the excess of its value over the amount secured by bottomry.

“SEC. 104. Freightage, in the sense of a policy of marine insurance, signifies all the benefits derived by the owner, either from the chartering of the ship or its employment for the carriage of his own goods or those of others.

“SEC. 105. The owner of a ship has an insurable interest in expected freightage which according to the ordinary and probable course of things he would have earned but for the intervention of a peril insured against or other peril incident to the voyage.

“SEC. 106. The interest mentioned in the last section exists, in case of a charter party, when the ship has broken ground on the chartered voyage. If a price is to be paid for the carriage of goods it exists when they are actually on board, or there is some contract for putting them on board, and both ship and goods are ready for the specified voyage.

“SEC. 107. One who has an interest in the thing from which profits are expected to proceed has an insurable interest in the profits.

“SEC. 108. The charterer of a ship has an insurable interest in it, to the extent that he is liable to be damnified by its loss.

“SUB-TITLE 1-C

“CONCEALMENT

“SEC. 109. In marine insurance, each party is bound to communicate, in addition to what is required by Section 28, all the information which he possesses, material to the risk, except such as is mentioned in Section 30, and to state the exact and whole truth in relation to all matters that he represents, or upon inquiry discloses or assumes to disclose.

“SEC. 110. In marine insurance, information of the belief or expectation of a third person, in reference to a material fact, is material.

“SEC. 111. A person insured by a contract of marine insurance is presumed to have knowledge, at the time of insuring, of a prior loss, if the information might possibly have reached him in the usual mode of transmission and at the usual rate of communication.

“SEC. 112. A concealment in a marine insurance, in respect to any of the following matters, does not vitiate the entire contract, but merely exonerates the insurer from a loss resulting from the risk concealed:

“(a) The national character of the insured;

“(b) The liability of the thing insured to capture and detention;

“© The liability to seizure from breach of foreign laws of trade;

“(d) The want of necessary documents; and

“(e) The use of false and simulated papers.

“SUB-TITLE 1-D

“REPRESENTATION

“SEC. 113. If a representation by a person insured by a contract of marine insurance, is intentionally false in any material respect, or in respect of any fact on which the character and nature of the risk depends, the insurer may rescind the entire contract.

“SEC. 114. The eventual falsity of a representation as to expectation does not, in the absence of fraud, avoid a contract of marine insurance.

“SUB-TITLE 1-E

“IMPLIED WARRANTIES

“SEC. 115. In every marine insurance upon a ship or freight, or freightage, or upon any thing which is the subject of marine insurance, a warranty is implied that the ship is seaworthy.

“SEC. 116. A ship is seaworthy when reasonably fit to perform the service and to encounter the ordinary perils of the voyage contemplated by the parties to the policy.

“SEC. 117. An implied warranty of seaworthiness is complied with if the ship be seaworthy at the time of the commencement of the risk, except in the following cases:

“(a) When the insurance is made for a specified length of time, the implied warranty is not complied with unless the ship be seaworthy at the commencement of every voyage it undertakes during that time;

“(b) When the insurance is upon the cargo which, by the terms of the policy, description of the voyage, or established custom of the trade, is to be transhipped at an intermediate port, the implied warranty is not complied with unless each vessel upon which the cargo is shipped, or transhipped, be seaworthy at the commencement of each particular voyage.

“SEC. 118. A warranty of seaworthiness extends not only to the condition of the structure of the ship itself, but requires that it be properly laden, and provided with a competent master, a sufficient number of competent officers and seamen, and the requisite appurtenances and equipment, such as ballasts, cables and anchors, cordage and sails, food, water, fuel and lights, and other necessary or proper stores and implements for the voyage.

“SEC. 119. Where different portions of the voyage contemplated by a policy differ in respect to the things requisite to make the ship seaworthy therefor, a warranty of seaworthiness is complied with if, at the commencement of each portion, the ship is seaworthy with reference to that portion.

“SEC. 120. When the ship becomes unseaworthy during the voyage to which an insurance relates, an unreasonable delay in repairing the defect exonerates the insurer on ship or shipowner’s interest from liability from any loss arising therefrom.

“SEC. 121. A ship which is seaworthy for the purpose of an insurance upon the ship may, nevertheless, by reason of being unfitted to receive the cargo, be unseaworthy for the purpose of insurance upon the cargo.

“SEC. 122. Where the nationality or neutrality of a ship or cargo is expressly warranted, it is implied that the ship will carry the requisite documents to show such nationality or neutrality and that it will not carry any documents which cast reasonable suspicion thereon.

“SUB-TITLE 1-F

“THE VOYAGE AND DEVIATION

“SEC. 123. When the voyage contemplated by a marine insurance policy is described by the places of beginning and ending, the voyage insured is one which conforms to the course of sailing fixed by mercantile usage between those places.

“SEC. 124. If the course of sailing is not fixed by mercantile usage, the voyage insured by a marine insurance policy is that way between the places specified, which to a master of ordinary skill and discretion, would mean the most natural, direct and advantageous.

“SEC. 125. Deviation is a departure from the course of the voyage insured, mentioned in the last two (2) sections, or an unreasonable delay in pursuing the voyage or the commencement of an entirely different voyage.

“SEC. 126. A deviation is proper:

“(a) When caused by circumstances over which neither the master nor the owner of the ship has any control;

“(b) When necessary to comply with a warranty, or to avoid a peril, whether or not the peril is insured against;

“© When made in good faith, and upon reasonable grounds of belief in its necessity to avoid a peril; or

“(d) When made in good faith, for the purpose of saving human life or relieving another vessel in distress.

“SEC. 127. Every deviation not specified in the last section is improper.

“SEC. 128. An insurer is not liable for any loss happening to the thing insured subsequent to an improper deviation.

“SUB-TITLE 1-G

“LOSS

“SEC. 129. A loss may be either total or partial.

“SEC. 130. Every loss which is not total is partial.

“SEC. 131. A total loss may be either actual or constructive.

“SEC. 132. An actual total loss is caused by:

“(a) A total destruction of the thing insured;

“(b) The irretrievable loss of the thing by sinking, or by being broken up;

“© Any damage to the thing which renders it valueless to the owner for the purpose for which he held it; or

“(d) Any other event which effectively deprives the owner of the possession, at the port of destination, of the thing insured.

“SEC. 133. A constructive total loss is one which gives to a person insured a right to abandon, under Section 141.

“SEC. 134. An actual loss may be presumed from the continued absence of a ship without being heard of. The length of time which is sufficient to raise this presumption depends on the circumstances of the case.

“SEC. 135. When a ship is prevented, at an intermediate port, from completing the voyage, by the perils insured against, the liability of a marine insurer on the cargo continues after they are thus reshipped.

“Nothing in this section shall prevent an insurer from requiring an additional premium if the hazard be increased by this extension of liability.

“SEC. 136. In addition to the liability mentioned in the last section, a marine insurer is bound for damages, expenses of discharging, storage, reshipment, extra freightage, and all other expenses incurred in saving cargo reshipped pursuant to the last section, up to the amount insured.

“Nothing in this or in the preceding section shall render a marine insurer liable for any amount in excess of the insured value or, if there be none, of the insurable value.

“SEC. 137. Upon an actual total loss, a person insured is entitled to payment without notice of abandonment.

“SEC. 138. Where it has been agreed that an insurance upon a particular thing, or class of things, shall be free from particular average, a marine insurer is not liable for any particular average loss not depriving the insured of the possession, at the port of destination, of the whole of such thing, or class of things, even though it becomes entirely worthless; but such insurer is liable for his proportion of all general average loss assessed upon the thing insured.

“SEC. 139. An insurance confined in terms to an actual loss does not cover a constructive total loss, but covers any loss, which necessarily results in depriving the insured of the possession, at the port of destination, of the entire thing insured.

“SUB-TITLE 1-H

“ABANDONMENT

“SEC. 140. Abandonment, in marine insurance, is the act of the insured by which, after a constructive total loss, he declares the relinquishment to the insurer of his interest in the thing insured.

“SEC. 141. A person insured by a contract of marine insurance may abandon the thing insured, or any particular portion thereof separately valued by the policy, or otherwise separately insured, and recover for a total loss thereof, when the cause of the loss is a peril insured against:

“(a) If more than three-fourths (¾) thereof in value is actually lost, or would have to be expended to recover it from the peril;

“(b) If it is injured to such an extent as to reduce its value more than three-fourths (¾);

“© If the thing insured is a ship, and the contemplated voyage cannot be lawfully performed without incurring either an expense to the insured of more than three-fourths (¾) the value of the thing abandoned or a risk which a prudent man would not take under the circumstances; or

“(d) If the thing insured, being cargo or freightage, and the voyage cannot be performed, nor another ship procured by the master, within a reasonable time and with reasonable diligence, to forward the cargo, without incurring the like expense or risk mentioned in the preceding subparagraph. But freightage cannot in any case be abandoned unless the ship is also abandoned.

“SEC. 142. An abandonment must be neither partial nor conditional.

“SEC. 143. An abandonment must be made within a reasonable time after receipt of reliable information of the loss, but where the information is of a doubtful character, the insured is entitled to a reasonable time to make inquiry.

“SEC. 144. Where the information upon which an abandonment has been made proves incorrect, or the thing insured was so far restored when the abandonment was made that there was then in fact no total loss, the abandonment becomes ineffectual.

“SEC. 145. Abandonment is made by giving notice thereof to the insurer, which may be done orally, or in writing: Provided, That if the notice be done orally, a written notice of such abandonment shall be submitted within seven (7) days from such oral notice.

“SEC. 146. A notice of abandonment must be explicit, and must specify the particular cause of the abandonment, but need state only enough to show that there is probable cause therefor, and need not be accompanied with proof of interest or of loss.

“SEC. 147. An abandonment can be sustained only upon the cause specified in the notice thereof.

“SEC. 148. An abandonment is equivalent to a transfer by the insured of his interest to the insurer, with all the chances of recovery and indemnity.

“SEC. 149. If a marine insurer pays for a loss as if it were an actual total loss, he is entitled to whatever may remain of the thing insured, or its proceeds or salvage, as if there had been a formal abandonment.

“SEC. 150. Upon an abandonment, acts done in good faith by those who were agents of the insured in respect to the thing insured, subsequent to the loss, are at the risk of the insurer, and for his benefit.

“SEC. 151. Where notice of abandonment is properly given, the rights of the insured are not prejudiced by the fact that the insurer refuses to accept the abandonment.

“SEC. 152. The acceptance of an abandonment may be either express or implied from the conduct of the insurer. The mere silence of the insurer for an unreasonable length of time after notice shall be construed as an acceptance.

“SEC. 153. The acceptance of an abandonment, whether express or implied, is conclusive upon the parties, and admits the loss and the sufficiency of the abandonment.

“SEC. 154. An abandonment once made and accepted is irrevocable, unless the ground upon which it was made proves to be unfounded.

“SEC. 155. On an accepted abandonment of a ship, freightage earned previous to the loss belongs to the insurer of said freightage; but freightage subsequently earned belongs to the insurer of the ship.

“SEC. 156. If an insurer refuses to accept a valid abandonment, he is liable as upon an actual total loss, deducting from the amount any proceeds of the thing insured which may have come to the hands of the insured.

“SEC. 157. If a person insured omits to abandon, he may nevertheless recover his actual loss.

“SUB-TITLE 1-I

“MEASURE OF INDEMNITY

“SEC. 158. A valuation in a policy of marine insurance is conclusive between the parties thereto in the adjustment of either a partial or total loss, if the insured has some interest at risk, and there is no fraud on his part; except that when a thing has been hypothecated by bottomry or respondentia, before its insurance, and without the knowledge of the person actually procuring the insurance, he may show the real value. But a valuation fraudulent in fact, entitles the insurer to rescind the contract.

“SEC. 159. A marine insurer is liable upon a partial loss, only for such proportion of the amount insured by him as the loss bears to the value of the whole interest of the insured in the property insured.

“SEC. 160. Where profits are separately insured in a contract of marine insurance, the insured is entitled to recover, in case of loss, a proportion of such profits equivalent to the proportion which the value of the property lost bears to the value of the whole.

“SEC. 161. In case of a valued policy of marine insurance on freightage or cargo, if a part only of the subject is exposed to risk, the valuation applies only in proportion to such part.

“SEC. 162. When profits are valued and insured by a contract of marine insurance, a loss of them is conclusively presumed from a loss of the property out of which they are expected to arise, and the valuation fixes their amount.

“SEC. 163. In estimating a loss under an open policy of marine insurance the following rules are to be observed:

“(a) The value of a ship is its value at the beginning of the risk, including all articles or charges which add to its permanent value or which are necessary to prepare it for the voyage insured;

“(b) The value of the cargo is its actual cost to the insured, when laden on board, or where the cost cannot be ascertained, its market value at the time and place of lading, adding the charges incurred in purchasing and placing it on board, but without reference to any loss incurred in raising money for its purchase, or to any drawback on its exportation, or to the fluctuation of the market at the port of destination, or to expenses incurred on the way or on arrival;

“© The value of freightage is the gross freightage, exclusive of primage, without reference to the cost of earning it; and

“(d) The cost of insurance is in each case to be added to the value thus estimated.

“SEC. 164. If cargo insured against partial loss arrives at the port of destination in a damaged condition, the loss of the insured is deemed to be the same proportion of the value which the market price at that port, of the thing so damaged, bears to the market price it would have brought if sound.

“SEC. 165. A marine insurer is liable for all the expenses attendant upon a loss which forces the ship into port to be repaired; and where it is stipulated in the policy that the insured shall labor for the recovery of the property, the insurer is liable for the expense incurred thereby, such expense, in either case, being in addition to a total loss, if that afterwards occurs.

“SEC. 166. A marine insurer is liable for a loss falling upon the insured, through a contribution in respect to the thing insured, required to be made by him towards a general average loss called for by a peril insured against: Provided, That the liability of the insurer shall be limited to the proportion of contribution attaching to his policy value where this is less than the contributing value of the thing insured.

“SEC. 167. When a person insured by a contract of marine insurance has a demand against others for contribution, he may claim the whole loss from the insurer, subrogating him to his own right to contribution. But no such claim can be made upon the insurer after the separation of the interests liable to contribution, nor when the insured, having the right and opportunity to enforce contribution from others, has neglected or waived the exercise of that right.

“SEC. 168. In the case of a partial loss of ship or its equipment, the old materials are to be applied towards payment for the new. Unless otherwise stipulated in the policy, a marine insurer is liable for only two-thirds (2/3) of the remaining cost of repairs after such deduction, except that anchors must be paid in full.

“TITLE 2

“FIRE INSURANCE

“SEC. 169. As used in this Code, the term fire insurance shall include insurance against loss by fire, lightning, windstorm, tornado or earthquake and other allied risks, when such risks are covered by extension to fire insurance policies or under separate policies.

“SEC. 170. An alteration in the use or condition of a thing insured from that to which it is limited by the policy made without the consent of the insurer, by means within the control of the insured, and increasing the risks, entitles an insurer to rescind a contract of fire insurance.

“SEC. 171. An alteration in the use or condition of a thing insured from that to which it is limited by the policy, which does not increase the risk, does not affect a contract of fire insurance.

“SEC. 172. A contract of fire insurance is not affected by any act of the insured subsequent to the execution of the policy, which does not violate its provisions, even though it increases the risk and is the cause of the loss.

“SEC. 173. If there is no valuation in the policy, the measure of indemnity in an insurance against fire is the expense it would be to the insured at the time of the commencement of the fire to replace the thing lost or injured in the condition in which it was at the time of the injury; but if there is a valuation in a policy of fire insurance, the effect shall be the same as in a policy of marine insurance.

“SEC. 174. Whenever the insured desires to have a valuation named in his policy, insuring any building or structure against fire, he may require such building or structure to be examined by an independent appraiser and the value of the insured’s interest therein may then be fixed as between the insurer and the insured. The cost of such examination shall be paid for by the insured. A clause shall be inserted in such policy stating substantially that the value of the insured’s interest in such building or structure has been thus fixed. In the absence of any change increasing the risk without the consent of the insurer or of fraud on the part of the insured, then in case of a total loss under such policy, the whole amount so insured upon the insured’s interest in such building or structure, as stated in the policy upon which the insurers have received a premium, shall be paid, and in case of a partial loss the full amount of the partial loss shall be so paid, and in case there are two (2) or more policies covering the insured’s interest therein, each policy shall contribute pro rata to the payment of such whole or partial loss. But in no case shall the insurer be required to pay more than the amount thus stated in such policy. This section shall not prevent the parties from stipulating in such policies concerning the repairing, rebuilding or replacing of buildings or structures wholly or partially damaged or destroyed.

“SEC. 175. No policy of fire insurance shall be pledged, hypothecated, or transferred to any person, firm or company who acts as agent for or otherwise represents the issuing company, and any such pledge, hypothecation, or transfer hereafter made shall be void and of no effect insofar as it may affect other creditors of the insured.

“TITLE 3

“CASUALTY INSURANCE

“SEC. 176. Casualty insurance is insurance covering loss or liability arising from accident or mishap, excluding certain types of loss which by law or custom are considered as falling exclusively within the scope of other types of insurance such as fire or marine. It includes, but is not limited to, employer’s liability insurance, motor vehicle liability insurance, plate glass insurance, burglary and theft insurance, personal accident and health insurance as written by non-life insurance companies, and other substantially similar kinds of insurance.

“TITLE 4

“SURETYSHIP

“SEC. 177. A contract of suretyship is an agreement whereby a party called the surety guarantees the performance by another party called the principal or obligor of an obligation or undertaking in favor of a third party called the obligee. It includes official recognizances, stipulations, bonds or undertakings issued by any company by virtue of and under the provisions of Act No. 536, as amended by Act No. 2206.

“SEC. 178. The liability of the surety or sureties shall be joint and several with the obligor and shall be limited to the amount of the bond. It is determined strictly by the terms of the contract of suretyship in relation to the principal contract between the obligor and the obligee.

“SEC. 179. The surety is entitled to payment of the premium as soon as the contract of suretyship or bond is perfected and delivered to the obligor. No contract of suretyship or bonding shall be valid and binding unless and until the premium therefor has been paid, except where the obligee has accepted the bond, in which case the bond becomes valid and enforceable irrespective of whether or not the premium has been paid by the obligor to the surety: Provided, That if the contract of suretyship or bond is not accepted by, or filed with the obligee, the surety shall collect only a reasonable amount, not exceeding fifty percent (50%) of the premium due thereon as service fee plus the cost of stamps or other taxes imposed for the issuance of the contract or bond: Provided, however, That if the nonacceptance of the bond be due to the fault or negligence of the surety, no such service fee, stamps or taxes shall be collected.

“In the case of a continuing bond, the obligor shall pay the subsequent annual premium as it falls due until the contract of suretyship is cancelled by the obligee or by the Commissioner or by a court of competent jurisdiction, as the case may be.

“SEC. 180. Pertinent provisions of the Civil Code of the Philippines shall be applied in a suppletory character whenever necessary in interpreting the provisions of a contract of suretyship.

“TITLE 5

“LIFE INSURANCE

“SEC. 181. Life insurance is insurance on human lives and insurance appertaining thereto or connected therewith.

“Every contract or undertaking for the payment of annuities including contracts for the payment of lump sums under a retirement program where a life insurance company manages or acts as a trustee for such retirement program shall be considered a life insurance contract for purposes of this Code.

“SEC. 182. An insurance upon life may be made payable on the death of the person, or on his surviving a specified period, or otherwise contingently on the continuance or cessation of life.

“Every contract or pledge for the payment of endowments or annuities shall be considered a life insurance contract for purposes of this Code.

“In the absence of a judicial guardian, the father, or in the latter’s absence or incapacity, the mother, of any minor, who is an insured or a beneficiary under a contract of life, health, or accident insurance, may exercise, in behalf of said minor, any right under the policy, without necessity of court authority or the giving of a bond, where the interest of the minor in the particular act involved does not exceed Five hundred thousand pesos (P500,000.00) or in such reasonable amount as may be determined by the Commissioner. Such right may include, but shall not be limited to, obtaining a policy loan, surrendering the policy, receiving the proceeds of the Policy, and giving the minor’s consent to any transaction on the policy.

“In the absence or in case of the incapacity of the father or mother, the grandparent, the eldest brother or sister at least eighteen (18) years of age, or any relative who has actual custody of the minor insured or beneficiary, shall act as a guardian without need of a court order or judicial appointment as such guardian, as long as such person is not otherwise disqualified or incapacitated. Payment made by the insurer pursuant to this section shall relieve such insurer of any liability under the contract.

“SEC. 183. The insurer in a life insurance contract shall be liable in case of suicide only when it is committed after the policy has been in force for a period of two (2) years from the date of its issue or of its last reinstatement, unless the policy provides a shorter period: Provided, however, That suicide committed in the state of insanity shall be compensable regardless of the date of commission.

“SEC. 184. A policy of insurance upon life or health may pass by transfer, will or succession to any person, whether he has an insurable interest or not, and such person may recover upon it whatever the insured might have recovered.

“SEC. 185. Notice to an insurer of a transfer or bequest thereof is not necessary to preserve the validity of a policy of insurance upon life or health, unless thereby expressly required.

“SEC. 186. Unless the interest of a person insured is susceptible of exact pecuniary measurement, the measure of indemnity under a policy of insurance upon life or health is the sum fixed in the policy.

“TITLE 6

“MICROINSURANCE

“SEC. 187. Microinsurance is a financial product or service that meets the risk protection needs of the poor where:

“(a) The amount of contributions, premiums, fees or charges, computed on a daily basis, does not exceed seven and a half percent (7.5%) of the current daily minimum wage rate for nonagricultural workers in Metro Manila; and

“(b) The maximum sum of guaranteed benefits is not more than one thousand (1,000) times of the current daily minimum wage rate for nonagricultural workers in Metro Manila.

“SEC. 188. No insurance company or mutual benefit association shall engage in the business of microinsurance unless it possesses all the requirements as may be prescribed by the Commissioner. The Commissioner shall issue such rules and regulations governing microinsurance.

“CHAPTER II-A

“FINANCIAL REPORTING FRAMEWORK

“SEC. 189. All companies regulated by the Commission, unless otherwise required by law, should comply with the financial reporting frameworks adopted by the Commission for purposes of creating the statutory financial reports and the annual statements to be submitted to the Commission. Financial reporting framework means a set of accounting and reporting principles, standards, interpretations and pronouncements that must be adopted in the preparation and submission of the statutory financial statements and reports required by the Commission. This financial reporting framework is not the same as the financial reporting framework used to prepare the financial statements that the Securities and Exchange Commission may require. The main purpose of the statutory statements is to present important information about the level of risk and solvency situation of insurers. In prescribing the applicable statutory financial reporting framework, the Commissioner shall take into account international standards concerning solvency and insurance company reporting as well as generally accepted actuarial principles concerning financial reporting promulgated by the Actuarial Society of the Philippines.

“The assets and investments discussed in Sections 204 to 215 shall be accounted for in accordance with this section.

“The valuation of reserves shall be accounted for in accordance with Title 5 of this Code.

“CHAPTER III

“THE BUSINESS OF INSURANCE

“TITLE 1

“INSURANCE COMPANIES, ORGANIZATION,
CAPITALIZATION AND AUTHORIZATION

“SEC. 190. For purposes of this Code, the term insurer or insurance company shall include all partnerships, associations, cooperatives or corporations, including government-owned or -controlled corporations or entities, engaged as principals in the insurance business, excepting mutual benefit associations. Unless the context otherwise requires, the term shall also include professional reinsurers defined in Section 288. Domestic company shall include companies formed, organized or existing under the laws of the Philippines. Foreign company when used without limitation shall include companies formed, organized, or existing under any laws other than those of the Philippines.

“SEC. 191. The provisions of the Corporation Code, as amended, shall apply to all insurance corporations now or hereafter engaged in business in the Philippines insofar as they do not conflict with the provisions of this chapter.

“SEC. 192. No corporation, partnership, or association of persons shall transact any insurance business in the Philippines except as agent of a corporation, partnership or association authorized to do the business of insurance in the Philippines, unless possessed of the capital and assets required of an insurance corporation doing the same kind of business in the Philippines and invested in the same manner; unless the Commissioner shall have granted it a certificate to the effect that it has complied with all the provisions of this Code.

“Every entity receiving any such certificate of authority shall be subject to the insurance and other applicable laws of the Philippines and to the jurisdiction and supervision of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 193. No insurance company shall transact any insurance business in the Philippines until after it shall have obtained a certificate of authority for that purpose from the Commissioner upon application therefor and payment by the company concerned of the fees hereinafter prescribed.

“The Commissioner may refuse to issue a certificate of authority to any insurance company if, in his judgment, such refusal will best promote the interest of the people of this country. No such certificate of authority shall be granted to any such company until the Commissioner shall have satisfied himself by such examination as he may make and such evidence as he may require that such company is qualified by the laws of the Philippines to transact business therein, that the grant of such authority appears to be justified in the light of local economic requirements, and that the direction and administration, as well as the integrity and responsibility of the organizers and administrators, the financial organization and the amount of capital, reasonably assure the safety of the interests of the policyholders and the public.

“In order to maintain the quality of the management of the insurance companies and afford better protection to policyholders and the public in general, any person of good moral character, unquestioned integrity and recognized competence may be elected or appointed director or officer of insurance companies in accordance with the pertinent provisions contained in the corporate governance circulars prescribed by the Commissioner. In addition hereto, the Commissioner shall prescribe the qualifications of directors, executive officers and other key officials of insurance companies for purposes of this section.

“No person shall concurrently be a Director and/or Officer of an insurance company and an adjustment company.

“Before issuing such certificate of authority, the Commissioner must be satisfied that the name of the company is not that of any other known company transacting a similar business in the Philippines, or a name so similar as to be calculated to mislead the public. The Commissioner may issue rules and regulations on the use of names of insurance companies and other supervised persons or entities.

“The certificate of authority issued by the Commissioner shall expire on the last day of December, three (3) years following its date of issuance, and shall be renewable every three (3) years thereafter, subject to the company’s continuing compliance with the provisions of this Code, circulars, instructions, rulings or decisions of the Commission.

“Every company receiving any such certificates of authority shall be subject to the provisions of this Code and other related laws and to the jurisdiction and supervision of the Commissioner.

“No insurance company may be authorized to transact in the Philippines the business of life and non-life insurance concurrently, unless specifically authorized to do so by the Commissioner: Provided, That the terms life and non-life insurance shall be deemed to include health, accident and disability insurance.

“No insurance company shall have equity in an adjustment company and neither shall an adjustment company have equity in an insurance company.

“No insurance company issued with a valid certificate of authority to transact insurance business anywhere in the Philippines by the Insurance Commissioner, shall be barred, prevented, or disenfranchised from issuing any insurance policy or from transacting any insurance business within the scope or coverage of its certificate of authority, anywhere in the Philippines, by any local government unit or authority, for whatever guise or reason whatsoever, including under any kind of ordinance, accreditation system, or scheme. Any local ordinance or local government unit regulatory issuance imposing such restriction or disenfranchisement on any insurance company shall be deemed null and void ab initio.

“SEC. 194. Except as provided in Section 289, no new domestic life or non-life insurance company shall, in a stock corporation, engage in business in the Philippines unless possessed of a paid-up capital equal to at least One billion pesos (P1,000,000,000.00): Provided, That a domestic insurance company already doing business in the Philippines shall have a net worth by June 30, 2013 of Two hundred fifty million pesos (P250,000,000.00). Furthermore, said company must have by December 31, 2016, an additional Three hundred million pesos (P300,000,000.00) in net worth; by December 31, 2019, an additional Three hundred fifty million pesos (P350,000,000.00) in net worth; and by December 31, 2022, an additional Four hundred million pesos (P400,000,000.00) in net worth.

“The Commissioner may, as a pre-licensing requirement of a new insurance company, in addition to the paid-up capital stock, require the stockholders to pay in cash to the company in proportion to their subscription interests a contributed surplus fund of not less than One hundred million pesos (P100,000,000.00). He may also require such company to submit to him a business plan showing the company’s estimated receipts and disbursements, as well as the basis therefor, for the next succeeding three (3) years.

“If organized as a mutual company, in lieu of such net worth, it must have available total members equity in an amount to be determined by the Insurance Commission above all liabilities for losses reported; expenses, taxes, legal reserve, and reinsurance of all outstanding risks, and the contributed surplus fund equal to the amounts required of stock corporations. A stock insurance company doing business in the Philippines may, subject to the pertinent law and regulation which now or hereafter may be in force, alter its organization and transform itself into a mutual insurance company.

“The Secretary of Finance may, upon recommendation of the Commissioner, increase such minimum paid-up capital stock or cash assets requirement under such terms and conditions as he may impose, to an amount which, in his opinion, would reasonably assure the safety of the interests of the policyholders and the public. The minimum paid-up capital and net worth requirement must remain unimpaired for the continuance of the license. The Commissioner may require the adoption of the risk-based capital approach and other internationally accepted forms of capital framework.

“For the purpose of this section, net worth shall consist of:

“(a) Paid-up capital;

“(b) Retained earnings;

“© Unimpaired surplus; and

“(d) Revaluation of assets as may be approved by the Commissioner.

“The Commission may adopt for purposes of compliance with capital build up requirement under this Code the recognition as part of the capital account, capital notes or debentures which are subordinate to all credits and senior only to common capital stocks.

“The President of the Philippines may order a periodic review every two (2) years the capital structure set out above to determine the capital adequacy of the local insurance industry from and after the integration and liberalization of the financial services, including insurance, in the ASEAN Region. For this purpose, a review committee consisting of representatives from the Department of Finance (DOF), the Insurance Commission (IC), the National Economic and Development Authority (NEDA), the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and other agencies which the President may designate shall conduct the review and may recommend to the President to adopt for implementation the necessary capital adjustment.

“SEC. 195. Every company must, before engaging in the business of insurance in the Philippines, file with the Commissioner the following:

“(a) A certified copy of the last annual statement or a verified financial statement exhibiting the condition and affairs of such company;

“(b) If incorporated under the laws of the Philippines, a copy of the articles of incorporation and bylaws, and any amendments to either, certified by the Securities and Exchange Commission to be a copy of that which is filed in its Office;

“© If incorporated under any laws other than those of the Philippines, a certificate from the Securities and Exchange Commission showing that it is duly registered in the mercantile registry of that Commission in accordance with the Corporation Code. A copy of the articles of incorporation and bylaws, and any amendments to either, if organized or formed under any law requiring such to be filed, duly certified by the officer having the custody of same, or if not so organized, a copy of the law, charter or deed of settlement under which the deed of organization is made, duly certified by the proper custodian thereof, or proved by affidavit to be a copy; also, a certificate under the hand and seal of the proper officer of such state or country having supervision of insurance business therein, if any there be, that such corporation or company is organized under the laws of such state or country, with the amount of capital stock or assets and legal reserve required by this Code;

“(d) If not incorporated and of foreign domicile, aside from the certificate mentioned in paragraph © of this section, a certificate setting forth the nature and character of the business, the location of the principal office, the name of the individual or names of the persons composing the partnership or association, the amount of actual capital employed or to be employed therein, and the names of all officers and persons by whom the business is or may be managed.

“The certificate must be verified by the affidavit of the chief officer, secretary, agent, or manager of the company; and if there are any written articles of agreement of the company, a copy thereof must accompany such certificate.

“SEC. 196. The Commissioner must require as a condition precedent to the transaction of insurance business in the Philippines by any foreign insurance company, that such company file in his office a written power of attorney designating some person who shall be a resident of the Philippines as its general agent, on whom any notice provided by law or by any insurance policy, proof of loss, summons and other legal processes may be served in all actions or other legal proceedings against such company, and consenting that service upon such general agent shall be admitted and held as valid as if served upon the foreign company at its home office. Any such foreign company shall, as further condition precedent to the transaction of insurance business in the Philippines, make and file with the Commissioner an agreement or stipulation, executed by the proper authorities of said company in form and substance as follows:

“The (name of company) does hereby stipulate and agree in consideration of the permission granted by the Insurance Commissioner to transact business in the Philippines, that if at any time said company shall leave the Philippines, or cease to transact business therein, or shall be without any agent in the Philippines on whom any notice, proof of loss, summons, or legal process may be served, then in any action or proceeding arising out of any business or transaction which occurred in the Philippines, service of any notice provided by law, or insurance policy, proof of loss, summons, or other legal process may be made upon the Insurance Commissioner, and that such service upon the Insurance Commissioner shall have the same force and effect as if made upon the company.

“Whenever such service of notice, proof of loss, summons, or other legal process shall be made upon the Commissioner, he must, within ten (10) days thereafter, transmit by mail, postage paid, a copy of such notice, proof of loss, summons, or other legal process to the company at its home or principal office. The sending of such copy by the Commissioner shall be a necessary part of the service of the notice, proof of loss, or other legal process.

“SEC. 197. No insurance company organized or existing under the government or laws other than those of the Philippines shall engage in business in the Philippines unless possessed of unimpaired capital or assets and reserve of not less than One billion pesos (P1,000,000,000.00), nor until it shall have deposited with the Commissioner for the benefit and security of the policyholders and creditors of such company in the Philippines, securities satisfactory to the Commissioner consisting of good securities of the Philippines, including new issues of stock of registered enterprises, as this term is defined in Executive Order No. 226 of 1987, as amended, to the actual market value of not less than the amount herein required: Provided, That at least fifty percent (50%) of such securities shall consist of bonds or other instruments of debt of the Government of the Philippines, its political subdivisions and instrumentalities, or of government-owned or -controlled corporations and entities, including the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas: Provided, further, That the total investment of a foreign insurance company in any registered enterprise shall not exceed twenty percent (20%) of the net worth of said foreign insurance company nor twenty percent (20%) of the capital of the registered enterprise, unless previously authorized in writing by the Commissioner.

“The Commissioner may, as a pre-licensing requirement of a new branch office of a foreign insurance company, in addition to the required asset or net worth, require the company to have an additional surplus fund in an amount to be determined by the Insurance Commission.

“For purposes of this Code, the net worth of a foreign insurance company shall refer only to its net worth in the Philippines.

“SEC. 198. The Commissioner shall hold the securities, deposited as required in the immediately preceding section, for the benefit and security of all the policyholders and creditors of the company depositing the same: Provided, That the Commissioner may as long as the company is solvent, permit the company to collect the interest or dividends on the securities so deposited, and, from time to time, with his assent, to withdraw any of such securities, upon depositing with said Commissioner other like securities, the market value of which shall be equal to the market value of such as may be withdrawn. In the event of any company ceasing to do business in the Philippines, the securities deposited as aforesaid shall be returned to the company upon the Commissioner’s written approval and only after the company has duly proven in its application therefor that it has no further liability whatsoever under any of its policies nor to any of its creditors in the Philippines.

“SEC. 199. Every foreign company doing business in the Philippines shall set aside an amount corresponding to the legal reserves of the policies written in the Philippines and invest and keep the same therein in accordance with the provisions of this section. The legal reserve therein required to be set aside shall be invested only in the classes of Philippine securities described in Section 206: Provided, however, That no investment in stocks or bonds of any single entity shall, in the aggregate exceed twenty percent (20%) of the net worth of the investing company or twenty percent (20%) of the capital of the issuing company, whichever is the lesser, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Commissioner. The securities purchased and kept in the Philippines under this section, shall not be sent out of the territorial jurisdiction of the Philippines without the written consent of the Commissioner.

“TITLE 2

“SOLVENCY

“SEC. 200. An insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall at all times maintain the minimum paid-up capital, and net worth requirements as prescribed by the Commissioner. Such solvency requirements shall be based on internationally accepted solvency frameworks and adopted only after due consultation with the insurance industry associations.

“Whenever the aforementioned requirement be found to be less than that herein required to be maintained, the Commissioner shall forthwith direct the company to make good any such deficiency by cash, to be contributed by all stockholders of record in proportion to their respective interests, and paid to the treasurer of the company, within fifteen (15) days from receipt of the order: Provided, That the company in the interim shall not be permitted to take any new risk of any kind or character unless and until it make good any such deficiency: Provided; further, That a stockholder who aside from paying the contribution due from him, pays the contribution due from another stockholder by reason of the failure or refusal of the latter to do so, shall have a lien on the certificates of stock of the insurance company concerned appearing in its books in the name of the defaulting stockholder on the date of default, as well as on any interests or dividends that have accrued or will accrue to the said certificates of stock, until the corresponding payment or reimbursement is made by the defaulting stockholder.

“SEC. 201. No domestic insurance corporation shall declare or distribute any dividend on its outstanding stocks unless it has met the minimum paid-up capital and net worth requirements under Section 194 and except from profits attested in a sworn statement to the Commissioner by the president or treasurer of the corporation to be remaining on hand after retaining unimpaired:

“(a) The entire paid-up capital stock;

“(b) The solvency requirements defined by Section 200;

“© In the case of life insurance corporations, the legal reserve fund required by Section 217;

“(d) In the case of corporations other than life, the legal reserve fund required by Section 219; and

“(e) A sum sufficient to pay all net losses reported, or in the course of settlement, and all liabilities for expenses and taxes.

“Any dividend declared or distributed under the preceding paragraph shall be reported to the Commissioner within thirty (30) days after such declaration or distribution.

“If the Commissioner finds that any such corporation has declared or distributed any such dividend in violation of this section, he may order such corporation to cease and desist from doing business until the amount of such dividend or the portion thereof in excess of the amount allowed under this section has been restored to said corporation.

“The Commissioner shall prescribe solvency requirements for branches of foreign insurance companies operating in the Philippines.

“TITLE 3

“ASSETS

“SEC. 202. In any determination of the financial condition of any insurance company doing business in the Philippines, there shall be allowed and admitted as assets only such assets legally or beneficially owned by the insurance company concerned as determined by the Commissioner which consist of:

“(a) Cash in the possession of the insurance company or in transit under its control, and the true and duly verified balance of any deposit of such company in a financially sound bank or trust company duly authorized by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas.

“(b) Investments in securities, including money market instruments, and in real property acquired or held in accordance with and subject to the applicable provisions of this Code and the income realized therefrom or accrued thereon.

“© Loans granted by the insurance company concerned to the extent of that portion thereof adequately secured by non-speculative assets with readily realizable values in accordance with and subject to the limitations imposed by applicable provisions of this Code.

“(d) Policy loans and other policy assets and liens on policies, contracts or certificates of a life insurance company, in an amount not exceeding legal reserves and other policy liabilities carried on each individual life insurance policy, contract or certificate.

“(e) The net amount of uncollected and deferred premiums and annuity considerations in the case of a life insurance company which carries the full mean tabular reserve liability.

“(f) Reinsurance recoverable by the ceding insurer:

“(1) From an insurer authorized to transact business in this country, the full amount thereof; or

“(2) From an insurer not authorized in this country, in an amount not exceeding the liabilities carried by the ceding insurer for amounts withheld under a reinsurance treaty with such unauthorized insurer as security for the payment of obligations thereunder if such funds are held subject to withdrawal by, and under the control of, the ceding insurer. The Commissioner may prescribe the conditions under which a ceding insurer may be allowed credit, as an asset or as a deduction from loss and unearned premium reserves, for reinsurance recoverable from an insurer not authorized in this country but which presents satisfactory evidence that it meets the applicable standards of solvency required in this country.

“(g) Funds withheld by a ceding insurer under a reinsurance treaty, provided reserves for unpaid losses and unearned premiums are adequately provided.

“(h) Deposits or amounts recoverable from underwriting associations, syndicates and reinsurance funds, or from any suspended banking institution, to the extent deemed by the Commissioner to be available for the payment of losses and claims and values to be determined by him.

“(i) Electronic data processing machines, as may be authorized by the Commissioner to be acquired by the insurance company concerned, the acquisition cost of which to be amortized in equal annual amounts within a period of five (5) years from the date of acquisition thereof.

“(j) Investments in mutual funds, real estate investment trusts, salary loans, unit investment trust funds and special deposit accounts, subject to the conditions as may be provided for by the Commissioner.

“(k) Other assets, not inconsistent with the provisions of paragraphs (a) to (j) hereof, which are deemed by the Commissioner to be readily realizable and available for the payment of losses and claims at values to be determined by him in a circular, rule or regulation.

“SEC. 203. In addition to such assets as the Commissioner may from time to time determine to be non-admitted assets of insurance companies doing business in the Philippines, the following assets shall in no case be allowed as admitted assets of an insurance company doing business in the Philippines, in any determination of its financial condition:

“(a) Goodwill, trade names, and other like intangible assets.

“(b) Prepaid or deferred charges for expenses and commissions paid by such insurance company.

“© Advances to officers (other than policy loans), which are not adequately secured and which are not previously authorized by the Commissioner, as well as advances to employees, agents, and other persons on mere personal security.

“(d) Shares of stock of such insurance company, owned by it, or any equity therein as well as loans secured thereby, or any proportionate interest in such shares of stock through the ownership by such insurance company of an interest in another corporation or business unit.

“(e) Furniture, furnishing, fixtures, safes, equipment, library, stationery, literature, and supplies.

“(f) Items of bank credits representing checks, drafts or notes returned unpaid after the date of statement.

“(g) The amount, if any, by which the aggregate value of investments as carried in the ledger assets of such insurance company exceeds the aggregate value thereof as determined in accordance with the provisions of this Code and/or the rules of the Commissioner.

“All non-admitted assets and all other assets of doubtful value or character included as ledger or non-ledger assets in any statement submitted by an insurance company to the Commissioner, or in any insurance examiner’s report to him, shall also be reported, to the extent of the value disallowed as deductions from the gross assets of such insurance company, except where the Commissioner permits a reserve to be carried among the liabilities of such insurance company in lieu of any such deduction.

“TITLE 4

“INVESTMENTS

“SEC. 204. A life insurance company may lend to any of its policyholders upon the security of the value of its policy such sum as may be determined pursuant to the provisions of the policy.

“No insurance company shall loan any of its money or deposits to any person, corporation or association, except upon the security of any of the following:

“(a) First mortgage or deeds of trust of registered, unencumbered, improved or unimproved real estate, including condominiums;

“(b) First mortgages or deeds of trust of actually cultivated, improved and unencumbered agricultural lands in the Philippines;

“© Purchase money mortgages, lease purchase agreements or similar securities executed or received by it on account of the sale or exchange of real property acquired pursuant to Sections 206 and 208;

“(d) Bonds or other instruments of indebtedness issued or guaranteed by the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions authorized by law to incur such obligations or issue such guarantees or of government-owned or -controlled corporations and instrumentalities including the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas; or

“(e) Obligations issued or guaranteed by universal banks, commercial banks, offshore banking units, investment houses or other financial intermediaries duly registered with the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas; or

“(f) Obligations issued or guaranteed by foreign banks or corporations, each of which shall have total net worth of at least One hundred fifty million US dollars ($US150,000,000.00) or such other higher net worth as may be prescribed by the Insurance Commission, as shown in their financial statements as of the immediately preceding fiscal year; or

“(g) Assignments of monetary instruments such as cash deposits, deposit certificates or other similar instruments of universal banks, commercial banks, investment houses or other financial intermediaries duly registered with the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas; or

“(h) Pledges of shares of stock, bonds or other instruments of indebtedness specified in Section 209; or

“(i) Chattel mortgages over equipment not more than three (3) years old; and

“(j) Such other security as may be approved by the Commissioner.

“The loans provided in the preceding subsection shall be subject to the following conditions:

“(1) The amount of loan secured by real estate mortgage over a non-agricultural land shall not exceed seventy percent (70%) of its appraised value, and in the case of a loan secured by a real estate mortgage over an agricultural land, the amount of loan shall not exceed forty percent (40%) of its market value: Provided, That, in no case shall such loan have a maturity period in excess of twenty-five (25) years;

“(2) Unless approved by the Commissioner, no loan may be granted upon the security of a mortgage on improved real estate if the improvements thereon do not belong to the owner of the land, and the owner of the improvements does not sign the deed of mortgage. However, if the owner of the land is the Government of the Philippines or any of its political subdivisions and a long-term lease has been executed in favor of the owner of the improvements, the owner of the land need not be a party to the deed of mortgage. The expiration date of the lease shall not, however, precede the maturity of the loan. The phrase ‘improved real estate’ as used herein shall mean land with permanent building or buildings erected thereon;

“(3) Lease-agreements or similar securities received on the sale of real estate property shall not exceed one hundred percent (100%) of the selling price of said property, or one hundred percent (100%) of its market value at the time of its disposition, whichever amount is lower. However, in no case shall such agreement have a maturity period not exceeding thirty (30) years;

“(4) Loans secured by shares of stock of solvent corporations or institutions shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of:

“(i) The weighted average market price for the one hundred eighty (180) days preceding the approval of the loan for shares listed in the stock exchange; and

“(ii) For unlisted shares, the adjusted book value of such shares.

“(5) Loans secured by the chattel mortgages over equipment shall not exceed seventy percent (70%) of the market value of said equipment.

“SEC. 205. No loan by any insurance company on the security of real estate shall be made unless the title to such real estate shall have first been registered in accordance with the existing Land Registration Act, or shall have been previously registered under the provisions of the existing Mortgage Law and the lien or interest of the insurance company as mortgagee has been registered.

“SEC. 206. (a) An insurance company may purchase, hold, own and convey such property, real and personal, as may have been mortgaged, pledged, or conveyed to it in good faith in trust for its benefit by reason of money loaned by it in pursuance of the regular business of the company, and such real or personal property as may have been purchased by it at sales under pledges, mortgages or deeds of trust for its benefit on account of money loaned by it; and such real and personal property as may have been conveyed to it by borrowers in satisfaction and discharge of loans made by the company in payment or by reason of any loan made by the company in payment or by reason of any loan made by it shall be sold by the company within twenty (20) years after the title thereto has been vested in it.

“(b) An insurance company may purchase, hold, and own the following:

“(1) Real properties which serve as its main place of business and/or branch offices: Provided, That such investment shall not in the overall exceed twenty percent (20%) of its net worth as shown by its latest financial statement approved by the Commissioner.

“(2) Bonds or other instruments of indebtedness of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions authorized by law to issue bonds at the reasonable market value thereof.

“(3) Bonds or other instruments of debt of government-owned or -controlled corporations and entities, including the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas.

“(4) Bonds, debentures or other instruments of indebtedness of any solvent corporation or institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines: Provided, however, That the issuing, assuming or guaranteeing entity or its predecessors shall not have defaulted in the payment of interest on any of its securities and that during each of any three (3) including the last two (2) of the five (5) fiscal years next preceding the date of acquisition by such insurance company of such bonds, debentures, or other instruments of indebtedness, the net earnings of the issuing, assuming or guaranteeing institution available for its fixed charges, as hereinafter defined, shall have been not less than one and one-quarter (1¼) times the total of its fixed charges for such year: Provided, further, That no life insurance company shall invest in or loan upon the obligations of any one institution in the kinds permitted under this subsection an amount in excess of twenty-five percent (25%) of the total admitted assets of such insurer as of December thirty-first next preceding the date of such investment.

“As used in this subsection the term net earnings available for fixed charges shall mean net income after deducting operating and maintenance expenses, taxes other than income taxes, depreciation and depletion; but excluding extraordinary nonrecurring items of income or expense appearing in the regular financial statement of the issuing, assuming or guaranteeing institution. The term fixed charges shall include interest on funded and unfunded debt, amortization of debt discount, and rentals for leased properties.

“(5) Preferred or guaranteed stocks of any solvent corporation or institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines: Provided, That if the stocks are guaranteed, the amount of stocks so guaranteed is not in excess of fifty percent (50%) of the amount of the preferred or common stocks, as the case may be, of the guaranteeing corporation: Provided, finally, That no life insurance company shall invest in or loan upon obligations of any one institution in the kinds permitted under this subsection an amount in excess of ten percent (10%) of the total admitted assets of such insurer as of December thirty-first next preceding the date of such investment.

“(6) Common stocks of any solvent corporation or institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines: Provided, however, That no life insurance company shall invest in or loan upon the obligations of any one corporation or institution in the kinds permitted under this subsection an amount in excess of ten percent (10%) of the total admitted assets of such insurer as of December thirty-first next preceding the date of such investment.

“(7) Securities issued by a registered enterprise, as this term is defined in Executive Order No. 226, otherwise known as the Omnibus Investments Code of 1987, as amended: Provided, That the total investment of a domestic non-life insurance company in any registered enterprise shall not exceed twenty percent (20%) of the net worth of said insurance company as shown by its aforesaid financial statement unless previously authorized by the Commissioner.

“(8) Certificates, notes and other obligations issued by the trustees or receivers of any institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines which, or the assets of which, are being administered under the direction of any court having jurisdiction: Provided, however, That such certificates, notes or other obligations are adequately secured as to principal and interests.

“(9) Equipment trust obligations or certificates which are adequately secured or other adequately secured instruments evidencing an interest in equipment wholly or in part within the Philippines: Provided, however, That there is a right to receive determined portions of rental, purchase or other fixed obligatory payments for the use or purchase of such equipment.

“(10) Any obligation of any corporation or institution created or existing under the laws of the Philippines which is, on the date of acquisition by the insurer, adequately secured and has qualities and characteristics wherein the speculative elements are not predominant.

“(11) Such other securities as may be approved by the Commissioner.

“© Any domestic insurer which has outstanding insurance, annuity or reinsurance contracts in currencies other than the national currency of the Philippines may invest in, or otherwise acquire or loan upon securities and investments in such currency which are substantially of the same kinds, classes and investment grades as those eligible for investment under the foregoing subdivisions of this section; but the aggregate amount of such investments and of such cash in such currency which is at any time held by such insurer shall not exceed one and one-half (1½) times the amount of its reserves and other obligations under such contracts or the amount which such insurer is required by the law of any country or possession outside the Republic of the Philippines to be invested in such country or possession, whichever shall be greater.

“SEC. 207. An insurance company may:

“(1) Invest in equities of other financial institutions; and

“(2) Engage in the buying and selling of long-term debt instruments: Provided, That any or all of such investments shall be with the prior approval of the Commissioner. Insurance companies may, however, invest in listed equities of other financial institutions without need of prior approval by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 208. Any life insurance company may:

“(a) Acquire or construct housing projects and, in connection with any such project, may acquire land or any interest therein by purchase, lease or otherwise, or use land acquired pursuant to any other provision of this Code. Such company may thereafter own, maintain, manage, collect or receive income from, or sell and convey, any land or interest therein so acquired and any improvements thereon. The aggregate book value of the investments of any such company in all such projects shall not exceed at the time of such investments twenty-five percent (25%) of the total admitted assets of such company on the thirty-first day of December next preceding: Provided, That the funds of the company for the payment of pending claims and obligations shall not be used for such investments.

“(b) Acquire real property, other than property to be used primarily for providing housing and property for accommodation of its own business, as an investment for the production of income, or may acquire real property to be improved or developed for such investment purpose pursuant to a program therefor, subject to the condition that the cost of each parcel of real property so acquired under the authority of this paragraph (b), including the estimated cost to the company of the improvement or development thereof, when added to the book value of all other real property held by it pursuant to this paragraph (b), shall not exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of its admitted assets as of the thirty-first day of December next preceding.

“SEC. 209. Every domestic insurance company shall, to the extent of an amount equal in value to twenty-five percent (25%) of the minimum net worth required under Section 194, invest its funds only in securities, satisfactory to the Commissioner, consisting of bonds or other instruments of debt of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions or instrumentalities, or of government-owned or -controlled corporations and entities, including the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas: Provided, That such investments shall at all times be maintained free from any lien or encumbrance: Provided, further, That such securities shall be deposited with and held by the Commissioner for the faithful performance by the depositing insurer of all its obligations under its insurance contracts. The provisions of Section 198 shall, so far as practicable, apply to the securities deposited under this section.

“Except as otherwise provided in this Code, no judgment creditor or other claimant shall have the right to levy upon any of the securities of the insurer held on deposit under this section or held on deposit pursuant to the requirement of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 210. After satisfying the requirements contained in the preceding section, any domestic non-life insurance company, shall invest, to an amount prescribed below, its funds in, or otherwise, acquire or loan upon, only the classes of investments described in Section 206, including securities issued by any registered enterprise, as this term is defined in Executive Order No. 226, otherwise known as ‘The Omnibus Investments Code of 1987′ and such other classes of investments as may be authorized by the Commissioner for purposes of this section: Provided, That:

“(a) No more than twenty percent (20%) of the net worth of such company as shown by its latest financial statement approved by the Commissioner shall be invested in the lot and building in which the insurance company conducts its business; and

“(b) The total investment of an insurance company in any registered enterprise shall not exceed twenty percent (20%) of the net worth of said insurance company as shown by its aforesaid financial statement nor twenty percent (20%) of the paid-up capital of the registered enterprise excluding the intended investment, unless previously authorized by the Commissioner: Provided, further, That such investments, free from any lien or encumbrance, shall be at least equal in amount to the aggregate amount of: (1) its legal reserve, as provided in Section 219, and (2) its reserve fund held for reinsurance as provided for in the pertinent treaty provision in the case of reinsurance ceded to authorized insurers.

“SEC. 211. After satisfying the requirements contained in Sections 197, 199, 209 and 210, any non-life insurance company may invest any portion of its funds representing earned surplus in any of the investments described in Sections 204, 206 and 207, or in any securities issued by a registered enterprise mentioned in the preceding sections: Provided, That no investment in stocks or bonds of any single entity shall in the aggregate, exceed twenty percent (20%) of the net worth of the insurance company as shown in its latest financial statement approved by the Commissioner or twenty percent (20%) of the paid-up capital of the issuing company, whichever is lesser, unless otherwise approved by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 212. After satisfying the minimum capital investment required in Section 209, any life insurance company may invest its legal policy reserve, as provided in Section 217 or in Section 218, in any of the classes of securities or types of investments described in Sections 204, 206, 207 and 208, subject to the limitations therein contained, and in any securities issued by any registered enterprise mentioned in Section 210, free from any lien or encumbrance, in such amounts as may be approved by the Commissioner. Such company may likewise invest any portion of its earned surplus in the aforesaid securities or investments subject to the aforesaid limitations.

“SEC. 213. Any investment made in violation of the applicable provisions of this title shall be considered non-admitted assets.

“SEC. 214. (a) All bonds or other instruments of indebtedness having a fixed term and rate of interest and held by any life insurance company authorized to do business in this country, if amply secured and if not in default as to principal or interest, shall be valued based on their amortized cost using effective interest method less impairment and unrecoverable amount based on appropriate measurement methods which are generally accepted in the industry and accepted by the Commissioner. The Commissioner shall have the power to determine the eligibility of any such investments for valuation on the basis of amortization, and may by regulation prescribe or limit the classes of securities so eligible for amortization. All bonds or other instruments of indebtedness which in the judgment of the Commissioner are not amply secured shall not be eligible for amortization and shall be valued in accordance with paragraph two. The Commissioner may, if he finds that the interest of policyholders so permit or require, by official regulation permit or require any class or classes of insurers, other than life insurance companies authorized to do business in this country, to value their bonds or other instruments of indebtedness in accordance with the foregoing rule.

“(b) The investments of all insurers authorized to do business in this country, except securities subject to amortization and except as otherwise provided in this chapter, shall be valued, in the discretion of the Commissioner, at their amortized cost using effective interest method less impairment and unrecoverable amount or at valuation representing their fair market value. If the Commissioner finds that in view of the character of investments of any insurer authorized to do business in this country it would be prudent for such insurer to establish a special reserve for possible losses or fluctuations in the values of its investments, he may require such insurer to establish such reserve, reasonable in amount, and include a report thereon in any statement or report of the financial condition of such insurer. The Commissioner may, in connection with any examination or required financial statement of an authorized insurer, require such insurer to furnish him complete financial statements and audited report of the financial condition of any corporation of which the securities are owned wholly or partly by such insurer and may cause an examination to be made of any subsidiary or affiliate of such insurer as appropriate to specific investments as provided in appropriate circulars issued by the Commissioner.

“© Investments in equity of an insurance company shall be valued as follows:

“(1) Listed stocks shall be valued at market value and periodically adjusted to reflect market changes through a special valuation account to reflect their realizable value when sold;

“(2) Unlisted stocks shall be valued at adjusted book value based on the latest unqualified audited financial statements of the company which issued such stocks; and

“(3) Stocks of a corporation under the control of the insurer shall be valued using the equity method which is the cost plus or minus the share of the controlling company in the earnings or losses of the controlled company after acquisition of such stocks.

“(d) The stock of an insurance company shall be valued at the lesser of its market value or its book value as shown by its last approved audited financial statement or the last report on examination, whichever is more recent. The book value of a share of common stock of an insurance company shall be ascertained by dividing (1) the amount of its capital and surplus less the value of all of its preferred stock, if any, outstanding, by (2) the number of shares of its common stock issued and outstanding.

“Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions, an insurer may, at its option, value its holdings of stock in a subsidiary insurance company in an amount not less than acquisition cost if such acquisition cost is less than the value determined as hereinbefore provided.

“(e) Real estate acquired by foreclosure or by deed in lieu thereof, in the absence of a recent appraisal deemed by the Commissioner to be reliable, shall not be valued at an amount greater than the unpaid principal of the defaulted loan at the date of such foreclosure or deed, together with any taxes and expenses paid or incurred by such insurer at such time in connection with such acquisition, and the cost of additions or improvements thereafter paid by such insurer and any amount or amounts thereafter paid by such insurer or any assessments levied for improvements in connection with the property.

“(f) Purchase money mortgages received on dispositions of real property held pursuant to Section 208 shall be valued in an amount equivalent to ninety percent (90%) of the value of such real property. Purchase money mortgages received on disposition of real property otherwise held shall be valued in an amount not exceeding ninety percent (90%) of the value of such real property as determined by an appraisal made by an appraiser at or about the time of disposition of such real property.

“(g) The stock of a subsidiary of an insurer shall be valued on the basis of the greater of:

“(1) The value of only such of the assets of such subsidiary as would constitute lawful investments for the insurer if acquired or held directly by the insurer; or

“(2) Such other value determined pursuant to standards and cumulative limitations, contained in a regulation to be promulgated by the Commissioner.

“(h) Notwithstanding any provision contained in this section or elsewhere in this chapter, if the Commissioner finds that the interests of policyholders so permit or require, he may permit or require any class or classes of insurers authorized to do business in this country to value their investments or any class or classes thereof as of any date heretofore or hereafter in accordance with any applicable valuation or method.

“SEC. 215. It shall be the duty of the officers of the insurance company to report within the first fifteen (15) days of every month all such investments as may be made by them during the preceding month, and the Commissioner may, if such investments or any of them seem injudicious to him, require the sale or disposal of the same. The report shall also include a list of investments sold or disposed of by the company during the same period.

“TITLE 5

“RESERVES

“SEC. 216. Every life insurance company, doing business in the Philippines, shall annually make a valuation of all policies, additions thereto, unpaid dividends, and all other obligations outstanding on the thirty-first day of December of the preceding year. All such valuations shall be made according to the standard adopted by the company, as prescribed by the Commissioner in accordance with internationally accepted actuarial standards, which standard shall be stated in its annual report.

“Such standard of valuations shall be according to a standard table of mortality with interest to be determined by the Insurance Commissioner. When the preliminary term basis is used, the term insurance shall be limited to the first policy year.

“The results of such valuations shall be reported to the Commissioner on or before the thirtieth day of April of each year accompanied by a sworn statement of a designated company officer and stating the methods and assumptions used in arriving at the values reported.

“SEC. 217. The aggregate net value so ascertained of the policies of such company shall be deemed its reserve liability, to provide for which it shall hold funds in secure investments equal to such net value, above all its other liabilities; and it shall be the duty of the Commissioner, after having verified, to such an extent as he may deem necessary, the valuation of all policies in force, to satisfy himself that the company has such amount in safe legal securities after all other debts and claims against it have been provided for.

“The reserve liability for variable contracts defined in Section 238 shall be established in accordance with actuarial procedures that recognize the variable nature of the benefits provided, and shall be approved by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 218. Every life insurance company, conducted on the mutual plan or a plan in which policyholders are by the terms of their policies entitled to share in the profits or surplus shall, on all policies of life insurance heretofore or hereafter issued, under the conditions of which the distribution of surplus is deferred to a fixed or specified time and contingent upon the policy being in force and the insured living at that time, annually ascertain the amount of the surplus to which all such policies as a separate class are entitled, and shall annually apportion to such policies as a class the amount of the surplus so ascertained, and carry the amount of such apportioned surplus, plus the actual interest earnings and accretions to such fund, as a distinct and separate liability to such class of policies on and for which the same was accumulated, and no company or any of its officers shall be permitted to use any part of such apportioned surplus fund for any purpose whatsoever other than for the express purpose for which the same was accumulated.

“SEC. 219. Every insurance company, other than life, shall maintain a reserve for unearned premiums on its policies in force, which shall be charged as a liability in any determination of its financial condition. Such reserve shall be calculated based on the twenty-fourth (24^th) method.

“SEC. 220. In addition to its liabilities and reserves on contracts of insurance issued by it, every insurance company shall be charged with the estimated amount of all of its other liabilities, including taxes, expenses and other obligations due or accrued at the date of statement, and including any special reserves required by the Commissioner pursuant to the provisions of this Code.

TITLE 6

“LIMIT OF SINGLE RISK

“SEC. 221. No insurance company other than life, whether foreign or domestic, shall retain any risk on any one subject of insurance in an amount exceeding twenty percent (20%) of its net worth. For purposes of this section, the term subject of insurance shall include all properties or risks insured by the same insurer that customarily are considered by non-life company underwriters to be subject to loss or damage from the same occurrence of any hazard insured against.

“The Commissioner may issue regulations providing for a maximum limit on the overall retained risks of insurers to serve as a catastrophe cover requirement for the same.

“Reinsurance ceded as authorized under the succeeding title shall be deducted in determining the risk retained. As to surety risk, deduction shall also be made of the amount assumed by any other company authorized to transact surety business and the value of any security mortgaged, pledged, or held subject to the surety’s control and for the surety’s protection.

“TITLE 7

“REINSURANCE TRANSACTIONS

“SEC. 222. An insurance company doing business in the Philippines may accept reinsurances only of such risks, and retain risk thereon within such limits, as it is otherwise authorized to insure.

“SEC. 223. No insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall cede all or part of any risks situated in the Philippines by way of reinsurance directly to any foreign insurer not authorized to do business in the Philippines unless such foreign insurer or, if the services of a nonresident broker are utilized, such nonresident broker is represented in the Philippines by a resident agent duly registered with the Commissioner as required in this Code.

“The resident agent of such unauthorized foreign insurer or nonresident broker shall immediately upon registration furnish the Commissioner with the annual statement of such insurer, or of such company or companies where such broker may place Philippine business as of the year preceding such registration, and annually thereafter as soon as available.

“SEC. 224. All insurance companies, both life and non-life, authorized to do business in the Philippines shall cede their excess risks to other companies similarly authorized to do business in the Philippines in such amounts and under such arrangements as would be consistent with sound underwriting practices before they enter into reinsurance arrangements with unauthorized foreign insurers.

“SEC. 225. Any insurance company doing business in the Philippines desiring to cede their excess risks to foreign insurance or reinsurance companies not authorized to transact business in the Philippines may do so under such terms and conditions which the Commissioner may prescribe.

“Should any reinsurance agreement be for any reason cancelled or terminated, the ceding company concerned shall inform the Commissioner in writing of such cancellation or termination within thirty (30) days from the date of such cancellation or termination or from the date notice or information of such cancellation or termination is received by such company as the case may be.

“SEC. 226. Every insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines shall report to the Commissioner on forms prescribed by him the particulars of reinsurance treaties or any new treaties or changes in existing treaties within three (3) months from their effectivity.

“SEC. 227. No credit shall be allowed as an admitted asset or as a deduction from liability, to any ceding insurer for reinsurance made, ceded, renewed, or otherwise becoming effective after January 1, 1975, unless the reinsurance shall be payable by the assuming insurer on the basis of the liability of the ceding insurer under the contract or contracts reinsured without diminution because of the insolvency of the ceding insurer nor unless under the contract or contracts of reinsurance the liability for such reinsurance is assumed by the assuming insurer or insurers as of the same effective date; nor unless the reinsurance agreement provides that payments by the assuming insurer shall be made directly to the ceding insurer or to its liquidator, receiver, or statutory successor except:

“(a) Where the contract specifically provides another payee of such reinsurance in the event of the insolvency of the ceding insurer; and

“(b) Where the assuming insurer with the consent of the direct insured or insureds has assumed such policy obligations of the ceding insurer as direct obligations of the assuming insurer to the payees under such policies and in substitution for the obligations of the ceding insurer to such payees.

“SEC. 228. No life insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall reinsure its whole risk on any individual life or joint lives, or substantially all of its insurance in force, without having first obtained the written permission of the Commissioner.

“TITLE 8

“ANNUAL STATEMENT

“SEC. 229. Every insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall terminate its fiscal period on the thirty-first day of December every year, and shall annually on or before the thirtieth day of April of each year render to the Commissioner a statement signed and sworn to by the chief officer of such company showing, in such form and details as may be prescribed by the Commissioner, the exact condition of its affairs on the preceding thirty-first day of December.

“The annual statement shall be prepared in accordance with the financial reporting framework as determined by the Commissioner. In addition, the Commissioner may require other relevant information. The form and details of such other relevant information shall be prescribed by the Commissioner and shall form part of the supplementary schedules to the annual statement.

“Any entry in the statement which is found to be false shall constitute a misdemeanor and the officer signing such statement shall be subject to the penalty provided for under Section 442.

“SEC. 230. Every insurance company authorized under Title 10 of this chapter to issue, deliver or use variable contracts shall annually file with the Commissioner separate annual statement of its separate variable accounts. Such statement shall be on a form prescribed or approved by the Commissioner and shall include details as to all of the income, disbursements, assets and liability items of and associated with the said separate variable accounts. Said statement shall be under oath of two (2) officers of the company and shall be filed simultaneously with the annual statement required by the preceding section.

“SEC. 231. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of the annual statement approved by the Commissioner, every insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall publish in a newspaper of general circulation, a full synopsis of its annual financial statement showing fully the conditions of its business, and setting forth its resources and liabilities in accordance with such form prescribed by the Commissioner.

“The Commissioner shall have the authority to make, amend, and rescind such accounting rules and regulations as may be necessary to carry out the provisions of this Code, and define accounting, technical and trade terms used in this Code: Provided, That such shall be in accordance with internationally accepted accounting standards. Among other things, the Commissioner may prescribe the form or forms in which required information shall be set forth, the items or details to be shown in the balance sheet and income statement, and the methods to be followed in the preparation of accounts, appraisal or valuation of assets and liabilities, determination of recurring and nonrecurring income, differentiation of investment and operating income, and in the preparation, where the Commissioner deems it necessary or desirable, of consolidated balance sheets or income accounts of any person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by the insurance company.

“TITLE 9

“POLICY FORMS

“SEC. 232. No policy, certificate or contract of insurance shall be issued or delivered within the Philippines unless in the form previously approved by the Commissioner, and no application form shall be used with, and no rider, clause, warranty or endorsement shall be attached to, printed or stamped upon such policy, certificate or contract unless the form of such application, rider, clause, warranty or endorsement has been approved by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 233. In the case of individual life or endowment insurance, the policy shall contain in substance the following conditions:

“(a) A provision that the policyholder is entitled to a grace period either of thirty (30) days or of one (1) month within which the payment of any premium after the first may be made, subject at the option of the insurer to an interest charge not in excess of six percent (6%) per annum for the number of days of grace elapsing before the payment of the premium, during which period of grace the policy shall continue in full force, but in case the policy becomes a claim during the said period of grace before the overdue premium is paid, the amount of such premium with interest may be deducted from the amount payable under the policy in settlement;

“(b) A provision that the policy shall be incontestable after it shall have been in force during the lifetime of the insured for a period of two (2) years from its date of issue as shown in the policy, or date of approval of last reinstatement, except for nonpayment of premium and except for violation of the conditions of the policy relating to military or naval service in time of war;

“© A provision that the policy shall constitute the entire contract between the parties, but if the company desires to make the application a part of the contract it may do so provided a copy of such application shall be indorsed upon or attached to the policy when issued, and in such case the policy shall contain a provision that the policy and the application therefor shall constitute the entire contract between the parties;

“(d) A provision that if the age of the insured is considered in determining the premium and the benefits accruing under the policy, and the age of the insured has been misstated, the amount payable under the policy shall be such as the premium would have purchased at the correct age;

“(e) If the policy is participating, a provision that the company shall periodically ascertain and apportion any divisible surplus accruing on the policy under conditions specified therein;

“(f) A provision specifying the options to which the policyholder is entitled to in the event of default in a premium payment after three (3) full annual premiums shall have been paid. Such option shall consist of:

“(1) A cash surrender value payable upon surrender of the policy which shall not be less than the reserve on the policy, the basis of which shall be indicated, for the then current policy year and any dividend additions thereto, reduced by a surrender charge which shall not be more than one-fifth (1/5) of the entire reserve or two and one-half percent (2½%) of the amount insured and any dividend additions thereto; and

“(2) One or more paid-up benefits on a plan or plans specified in the policy of such value as may be purchased by the cash surrender value.

“(g) A provision that at any time after a cash surrender value is available under the policy and while the policy is in force, the company will advance, on proper assignment or pledge of the policy and on sole security thereof, a sum equal to, or at the option of the owner of the policy, less than the cash surrender value on the policy, at a specified rate of interest, not more than the maximum allowed by law, to be determined by the company from time to time, but not more often than once a year, subject to the approval of the Commissioner; and that the company will deduct from such loan value any existing indebtedness on the policy and any unpaid balance of the premium for the current policy year, and may collect interest in advance on the loan to the end of the current policy year, which provision may further provide that such loan may be deferred for not exceeding six (6) months after the application therefor is made;

“(h) A table showing in figures cash surrender values and paid-up options available under the policy each year upon default in premium payments, during at least twenty (20) years of the policy beginning with the year in which the values and options first become available, together with a provision that in the event of the failure of the policyholder to elect one of the said options within the time specified in the policy, one of said options shall automatically take effect and no policyholder shall ever forfeit his right to same by reason of his failure to so elect;

“(i) In case the proceeds of a policy are payable in installments or as an annuity, a table showing the minimum amounts of the installments or annuity payments;

“(j) A provision that the policyholder shall be entitled to have the policy reinstated at any time within three (3) years from the date of default of premium payment unless the cash surrender value has been duly paid, or the extension period has expired, upon production of evidence of insurability satisfactory to the company and upon payment of all overdue premiums and any indebtedness to the company upon said policy, with interest rate not exceeding that which would have been applicable to said premiums and indebtedness in the policy years prior to reinstatement.

“Any of the foregoing provisions or portions thereof not applicable to single premium or term policies shall to that extent not be incorporated therein; and any such policy may be issued and delivered in the Philippines which in the opinion of the Commissioner contains provisions on any one or more of the foregoing requirements more favorable to the policyholder than hereinbefore required.

“This section shall not apply to policies of group life or industrial life insurance.

“SEC. 234. No policy of group life insurance shall be issued and delivered in the Philippines unless it contains in substance the following provisions, or provisions which in the opinion of the Commissioner are more favorable to the persons insured, or at least as favorable to the persons insured and more favorable to the policyholders:

“(a) A provision that the policyholder is entitled to a grace period of either thirty (30) days or of one (1) month for the payment of any premium due after the first, during which grace period the death benefit coverage shall continue in force, unless the policyholder shall have given the insurer written notice of discontinuance in advance of the date of discontinuance and in accordance with the terms of the policy. The policy may provide that the policyholder shall be liable for the payment of a pro rata premium for the time the policy is in force during such grace period;

“(b) A provision that the validity of the policy shall not be contested, except for nonpayment of premiums after it has been in force for two (2) years from its date of issue; and that no statement made by any insured under the policy relating to his insurability shall be used in contesting the validity of the insurance with respect to which such statement was made after such insurance has been in force prior to the contest for a period of two (2) years during such person’s lifetime nor unless contained in a written instrument signed by him;

“© A provision that a copy of the application, if any, of the policyholder shall be attached to the policy when issued, that all statements made by the policyholder or by persons insured shall be deemed representations and not warranties, and that no statement made by any insured shall be used in any contest unless a copy of the instrument containing the statement is or has been furnished to such person or to his beneficiary;

“(d) A provision setting forth the conditions, if any, under which the insurer reserves the right to require a person eligible for insurance to furnish evidence of individual insurability satisfactory to the insurer as a condition to part or all of his coverage;

“(e) A provision specifying an equitable adjustment of premiums or of benefits or of both to be made in the event that the age of a person insured has been misstated, such provision to contain a clear statement of the method of adjustment to be used;

“(f) A provision that any sum becoming due by reason of death of the person insured shall be payable to the beneficiary designated by the insured, subject to the provisions of the policy in the event that there is no designated beneficiary, as to all or any part of such sum, living at the death of the insured, and subject to any right reserved by the insurer in the policy and set forth in the certificate to pay at its option a part of such sum not exceeding Five hundred pesos (P500.00) to any person appearing to the insurer to be equitably entitled thereto by reason of having incurred funeral or other expenses incident to the last illness or, death of the person insured;

“(g) A provision that the insurer will issue to the policyholder for delivery to each person insured a statement as to the insurance protection to which he is entitled, to whom the insurance benefits are payable, and the rights set forth in paragraphs (h), (i) and (j) following;

“(h) A provision that if the insurance, or any portion of it, on a person covered under the policy ceases because of termination of employment or of membership in the class or classes eligible for coverage under the policy, such person shall be entitled to have issued to him by the insurer, without evidence of insurability, an individual policy of life insurance without disability or other supplementary benefits, provided application for the individual policy and payment of the first premium to the insurer shall be made within thirty (30) days after such termination, and provided further that:

“(1) The individual policy shall be on any one of the forms, except term insurance, then customarily issued by the insurer at the age and for an amount not in excess of the coverage under the group policy; and

“(2) The premium on the individual policy shall be at the insurer’s then customary rate applicable to the form and amount of the individual policy, to the class of risk to which such person then belongs, and to his age attained on the effective date of the individual policy.

“(i) A provision that if the group policy terminates or is amended so as to terminate the insurance of any class of insured persons, every person insured thereunder at the date of such termination whose insurance terminates and who has been so insured for five (5) years prior to such termination date shall be entitled to have issued to him by the insurer an individual policy of life insurance subject to the same limitations as set forth in paragraph (h), except that the group policy may provide that the amount of such individual policy shall not exceed the amount of the person’s life insurance protection ceasing;

“(j) A provision that if a person insured under the group policy dies during the thirty (30)-day period within which he would have been entitled to an individual policy issued to him in accordance with paragraphs (h) and (i) above and before such individual policy shall have become effective, the amount of life insurance which he would have been entitled to have issued to him as an individual policy shall be payable as a claim under the group policy whether or not application for the individual policy or the payment of the first premium has been made;

“(k) In the case of a policy issued to a creditor to insure debtors of such creditor, a provision that the insurer will furnish to the policyholder for delivery to each debtor insured under the policy a form which will contain a statement that the life of the debtor is insured under the policy and that any death benefit paid thereunder by reason of his death shall be applied to reduce or extinguish indebtedness.

“The provisions of paragraphs (f) to (j) shall not apply to policies issued to a creditor to insure his debtors. If a group life policy is on a plan of insurance other than term, it shall contain a non-forfeiture provision or provisions which in the opinion of the Commissioner is or are equitable to the insured or the policyholder: Provided, That nothing herein contained shall be so construed as to require group life policies to contain the same non-forfeiture provisions as are required of individual life policies.

“SEC. 235. The term industrial life insurance as used in this Code shall mean that form of life insurance under which the premiums are payable either monthly or oftener, if the face amount of insurance provided in any policy is not more than five hundred times that of the current statutory minimum daily wage in the City of Manila, and if the words industrial policy are printed upon the policy as part of the descriptive matter.

“An industrial life policy shall not lapse for nonpayment of premium if such nonpayment was due to the failure of the company to send its representative or agent to the insured at the residence of the insured or at some other place indicated by him for the purpose of collecting such premium: Provided, That the provisions of this paragraph shall not apply when the premium on the policy remains unpaid for a period of three (3) months or twelve (12) weeks after the grace period has expired.

“SEC. 236. In the case of industrial life insurance, the policy shall contain in substance the following provisions:

“(a) A provision that the insured is entitled to a grace period of four (4) weeks within which the payment of any premium after the first may be made, except that where premiums are payable monthly, the period of grace shall be either one (1) month or thirty (30) days; and that during the period of grace, the policy shall continue in full force, but if during such grace period the policy becomes a claim, then any overdue and unpaid premiums may be deducted from any amount payable under the policy in settlement;

“(b) A provision that the policy shall be incontestable after it has been in force during the lifetime of the insured for a specified period, not more than two (2) years from its date of issue, except for nonpayment of premiums and except for violation of the conditions of the policy relating to naval or military service, or services auxiliary thereto, and except as to provisions relating to benefits in the event of disability as defined in the policy, and those granting additional insurance specifically against death by accident or by accidental means, or to additional insurance against loss of, or loss of use of, specific members of the body;

“© A provision that the policy shall constitute the entire contract between the parties, or if a copy of the application is endorsed upon and attached to the policy when issued, a provision that the policy and the application therefor shall constitute the entire contract between the parties, and in the latter case, a provision that all statements made by the insured shall, in the absence of fraud, be deemed representations and not warranties;

“(d) A provision that if the age of the person insured, or the age of any person, considered in determining the premium, or the benefits accruing under the policy, has been misstated, any amount payable or benefit accruing under the policy shall be such as the premium paid would have purchased at the correct age;

“(e) A provision that if the policy is a participating policy, the company shall periodically ascertain and apportion any divisible surplus accruing on the policy under the conditions specified therein;

“(f) A provision that in the event of default in premium payments after three (3) full years’ premiums have been paid, the policy shall be converted into a stipulated form of insurance, and that in the event of default in premium payments after five (5) full years’ premiums have been paid, a specified cash surrender value shall be available, in lieu of the stipulated form of insurance, at the option of the policyholder. The net value of such stipulated form of insurance and the amount of such cash value shall not be less than the reserve on the policy and dividend additions thereto, if any, at the end of the last completed policy year for which premiums shall have been paid (the policy to specify the mortality table, rate of interest and method of valuation adopted to compute such reserve), exclusive of any reserve on disability benefits and accidental death benefits, less an amount not to exceed two and one-half percent (2½%) of the maximum amount insured by the policy and dividend additions thereto, if any, when the issue age is under ten (10) years, and less an amount not to exceed two and one-half percent (2½%) of the current amount insured by the policy and dividend additions thereto, if any, if the issue age is ten (10) years or older, and less any existing indebtedness to the company on or secured by the policy;

“(g) A provision that the policy may be surrendered to the company at its home office within a period of not less than sixty (60) days after the due date of a premium in default for the specified cash value: Provided, That the insurer may defer payment for not more than six (6) months after the application therefor is made;

“(h) A table that shows in figures the nonforfeiture benefits available under the policy every year upon default in payment of premiums during at least the first twenty (20) years of the policy, such table to begin with the year in which such values become available, and a provision that the company will furnish upon request an extension of such table beyond the year shown in the policy;

“(i) A provision that specifies which one of the stipulated forms of insurance provided for under the provision of paragraph (f) of this section shall take effect in the event of the insured’s failure, within sixty (60) days from the due date of the premium in default, to notify the insurer in writing as to which one of such forms he has selected;

“(j) A provision that the policy may be reinstated at any time within two (2) years from the due date of the premium in default unless the cash surrender value has been paid or the period of extended term insurance expired, upon production of evidence of insurability satisfactory to the company and payment of arrears of premiums with interest at a rate not exceeding six percent (6%) per annum payable annually;

“(k) A provision that when a policy shall become a claim by death of the insured, settlement shall be made upon receipt of due proof of death, or not later than two (2) months after receipt of such proof;

“(l) A title on the face and on the back of the policy correctly describing its form;

“(m) A space on the front or the back of the policy for the name of the beneficiary designated by the insured with a reservation of the insured’s right to designate or change the beneficiary after the issuance of the policy. The policy may also provide that no designation or change of beneficiary shall be binding on the insurer until endorsed on the policy by the insurer, and that the insurer may refuse to endorse the name of any proposed beneficiary who does not appear to the insurer to have an insurable interest in the life of the insured. Such policy may also contain a provision that if the beneficiary designated in the policy does not surrender the policy with due proof of death within the period stated in the policy, which shall not be less than thirty (30) days after the death of the insured, or if the beneficiary is the estate of the insured, or is a minor, or dies before the insured, or is not legally competent to give valid release, then the insurer may make any payment thereunder to the executor or administrator of the insured, or to any of the insured’s relatives by blood or legal adoption or connections by marriage or to any person appearing to the insurer to be equitably entitled thereto by reason of having incurred expense for the maintenance, medical attention or burial of the insured; and

“(n) A provision that when an industrial life insurance policy is issued providing for accidental or health benefits, or both, in addition to life insurance, the foregoing provisions shall apply only to the life insurance portion of the policy.

“Any of the foregoing provisions or portions thereof not applicable to nonparticipating or term policies shall to that extent not be incorporated therein. The foregoing provisions shall not apply to policies issued or granted pursuant to the nonforfeiture provisions prescribed in provisions of paragraphs (f) and (i) of this section, nor shall provisions of paragraphs (f), (g), (h), and (i) hereof be required in term insurance of twenty (20) years or less but such term policies shall specify the mortality table, rate of interest, and method of computing reserves.

“SEC. 237. No policy of industrial life insurance shall be issued or delivered in the Philippines if it contains any of the following provisions:

“(a) A provision that gives the insurer the right to declare the policy void because the insured has had any disease or ailment, whether specified or not, or because the insured has received institutional, hospital, medical or surgical treatment or attention, except a provision which gives the insurer the right to declare the policy void if the insured has, within two (2) years prior to the issuance of the policy, received institutional, hospital, medical or surgical treatment or attention and if the insured or the claimant under the policy fails to show that the condition occasioning such treatment or attention was not of a serious nature or was not material to the risk;

“(b) A provision that gives the insurer the right to declare the policy void because the insured has been rejected for insurance, unless such right be conditioned upon a showing by the insurer that knowledge of such rejection would have led to a refusal by the insurer to make such contract;

“© A provision that allows the company to pay the proceeds of the policy at the death of the insured to any person other than the named beneficiary, except in accordance with a standard provision as specified under the provisions of paragraph (m) of the preceding section;

“(d) A provision that limits the time within which any action at law or in equity may be commenced to less than six (6) years after the cause of action shall accrue; and

“(e) A provision that specifies any mode of settlement at maturity of less value than the amount insured by the policy plus dividend additions, if any, less any indebtedness to the company on the policy and less any premium that may by the terms of the policy be deducted, payments to be made in accordance with the terms of the policy.

“Nothing contained in this section nor in the provision of paragraph (b) of the preceding section, relating to incontestability, shall be construed as prohibiting the life insurance company from placing in its industrial life policies provisions limiting its liability with respect to:

“(1) Death resulting from aviation other than as a fare-paying passenger on a regularly scheduled route between definitely established airports; and

“(2) Military or naval service: Provided, That if the liability of the company is limited as herein provided, such liability shall in no event be fixed at an amount less than the reserve on the policy (excluding the reserve for any additional benefits in the event of death by accident or accidental means or for benefits in the event of any type of disability), less any indebtedness on or secured by such policy; nor shall any provision of this section apply to any provision in an industrial life insurance policy for additional benefits in the event of death by accident or accidental means.

“TITLE 10

“VARIABLE CONTRACTS

“SEC. 238. (a) No insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines shall issue, deliver, sell or use any variable contract in the Philippines, unless and until such company shall have satisfied the Commissioner that its financial and general condition and its methods of operations, including the issue and sale of variable contracts, are not and will not be hazardous to the public or to its policy and contract owners. No foreign insurance company shall be authorized to issue, deliver or sell any variable contract in the Philippines, unless it is likewise authorized to do so by the laws of its domicile.

“(b) The term variable contract shall mean any policy or contract on either a group or on an individual basis issued by an insurance company providing for benefits or other contractual payments or values thereunder to vary so as to reflect investment results of any segregated portfolio of investments or of a designated separate account in which amounts received in connection with such contracts shall have been placed and accounted for separately and apart from other investments and accounts. This contract may also provide benefits or values incidental thereto payable in fixed or variable amounts, or both. It shall not be deemed to be a security or securities as defined in The Securities Act, as amended, or in the Investment Company Act, as amended, nor subject to regulations under said Acts.

“© In determining the qualifications of a company requesting authority to issue, deliver, sell or use variable contracts, the Commissioner shall always consider the following:

“(1) The history, financial and general condition of the company: Provided, That such company, if a foreign company, must have deposited with the Commissioner for the benefit and security of its variable contract owners in the Philippines, securities satisfactory to the Commissioner consisting of bonds of the Government of the Philippines or its instrumentalities with an actual market value of Two million pesos (P2,000,000.00);

“(2) The character, responsibility and fitness of the officers and directors of the company; and

“(3) The law and regulation under which the company is authorized in the state of domicile to issue such contracts.

“(d) If after notice and hearing, the Commissioner shall find that the company is qualified to issue, deliver, sell or use variable contracts in accordance with this Code and the regulations and rules issued thereunder, the corresponding order of authorization shall be issued. Any decision or order denying authority to issue, deliver, sell or use variable contracts shall clearly and distinctly state the reasons and grounds on which it is based.

“SEC. 239. Any insurance company issuing variable contracts pursuant to this Code may in its discretion issue contracts providing a combination of fixed amount and variable amount of benefits and for option lump-sum payment of benefits.

“SEC. 240. Every variable contract form delivered or issued for delivery in the Philippines, and every certified form evidencing variable benefits issued pursuant to any such contract on a group basis, and the application, rider and endorsement forms applicable thereto and used in connection therewith, shall be subject to the prior approval of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 241. Illustration of benefits payable under any variable contract shall not include or involve projections of past investment experience into the future and shall conform with the rules and regulations promulgated by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 242. Variable contracts may be issued on the industrial life basis, provided that the pertinent provisions of this Code and of the rules and regulations of the Commissioner governing variable contracts are complied with in connection with such contracts.

“SEC. 243. Every life insurance company authorized under the provisions of this Code to issue, deliver, sell or use variable contracts shall, in connection with the same, establish one or more separate accounts to be known as separate variable accounts. All amounts received by the company in connection with any such contracts which are required by the terms thereof, to be allocated or applied to one or more designated separate variable accounts shall be placed in such designated account or accounts. The assets and liabilities of each such separate variable account shall at all times be clearly identifiable and distinguishable from the assets and liabilities in all other accounts of the company. Notwithstanding any provision of law to the contrary, the assets held in any such separate variable account shall not be chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business the company may conduct but shall be held and applied exclusively for the benefit of the owners or beneficiaries of the variable contracts applicable thereto. In the event of the insolvency of the company, the assets of each such separate variable account shall be applied to the contractual claims of the owners or beneficiaries of the variable contracts applicable thereto. Except as otherwise specifically provided by the contract, no sale, exchange or other transfer of assets may be made by a company, between any of its separate accounts or between any other investment account and one or more of its separate accounts, unless in the case of a transfer into a separate account, such transfer is made solely to establish the account or to support the operation of the contracts with respect to the separate account to which the transfer is made, or in case of a transfer from a separate account, such transfer would not cause the remaining assets of the account to become less than the reserves and other contract liabilities with respect to such separate account. Such transfer, whether into or from a separate account, shall be made by a transfer of cash, or by a transfer of securities having a valuation which could be readily determined in the market place: Provided, That such transfer of securities is approved by the Commissioner. The Commissioner may authorize other transfers among such accounts, if, in his opinion, such transfers would not be inequitable. All amounts and assets allocated to any such separate variable account shall be owned by the company and with respect to the same the company shall not be nor hold itself out to be a trustee.

“SEC. 244. Any insurance company which has established one or more separate variable accounts pursuant to the preceding section may invest and reinvest all or any part of the assets allocated to any such account in the securities and investments authorized by Sections 204, 206, 207 and 208 for any of the funds of an insurance company in such amount or amounts as may be approved by the Commissioner. In addition thereto, such company may also invest in common stocks or other equities which are listed on or admitted to trading in a securities exchange located in the Philippines, or which are publicly held and traded in the over-the-counter market as defined by the Commissioner and as to which market quotations have been available: Provided, however, That no such company shall invest in excess of ten percent (10%) of the assets of any such separate variable accounts in any one corporation issuing such common stock. The assets and investments of such separate variable accounts shall not be taken into account in applying the quantitative investment limitations applicable to other investments of the company. In the purchase of common capital stock or other equities, the insurer shall designate to the broker, or to the seller if the purchase is not made through a broker, the specific variable account for which the investment is made.

“SEC. 245. Assets allocated to any separate variable account shall be valued at their market value on the date of any valuation, or if there is no readily available market value then in accordance with the terms of the variable contract applicable to such assets, or if there are no such contract terms then in such manner as may be prescribed by the rules and regulations of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 246. The reserve liability for variable contracts shall be established in accordance with actuarial procedures that recognize the variable nature of the benefits provided, and shall be approved by the Commissioner.

“TITLE 11

“CLAIMS SETTLEMENT

“SEC. 247. (a) No insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall refuse, without just cause, to pay or settle claims arising under coverages provided by its policies, nor shall any such company engage in unfair claim settlement practices. Any of the following acts by an insurance company, if committed without just cause and performed with such frequency as to indicate a general business practice, shall constitute unfair claim settlement practices:

“(1) Knowingly misrepresenting to claimants pertinent facts or policy provisions relating to coverage at issue;

“(2) Failing to acknowledge with reasonable promptness pertinent communications with respect to claims arising under its policies;

“(3) Failing to adopt and implement reasonable standards for the prompt investigation of claims arising under its policies;

“(4) Not attempting in good faith to effectuate prompt, fair and equitable settlement of claims submitted in which liability has become reasonably clear; or

“(5) Compelling policyholders to institute suits to recover amounts due under its policies by offering without justifiable reason substantially less than the amounts ultimately recovered in suits brought by them.

“(b) Evidence as to numbers and types of valid and justifiable complaints to the Commissioner against an insurance company, and the Commissioner’s complaint experience with other insurance companies writing similar lines of insurance shall be admissible in evidence in an administrative or judicial proceeding brought under this section.

“© If it is found, after notice and an opportunity to be heard, that an insurance company has violated this section, each instance of noncompliance with paragraph (a) may be treated as a separate violation of this section and shall be considered sufficient cause for the suspension or revocation of the company’s certificate of authority.

“SEC. 248. The proceeds of a life insurance policy shall be paid immediately upon maturity of the policy, unless such proceeds are made payable in installments or as an annuity, in which case the installments, or annuities shall be paid as they become due: Provided, however, That in the case of a policy maturing by the death of the insured, the proceeds thereof shall be paid within sixty (60) days after presentation of the claim and filing of the proof of death of the insured. Refusal or failure to pay the claim within the time prescribed herein will entitle the beneficiary to collect interest on the proceeds of the policy for the duration of the delay at the rate of twice the ceiling prescribed by the Monetary Board, unless such failure or refusal to pay is based on the ground that the claim is fraudulent.

“The proceeds of the policy maturing by the death of the insured payable to the beneficiary shall include the discounted value of all premiums paid in advance of their due dates, but are not due and payable at maturity.

“SEC. 249. The amount of any loss or damage for which an insurer may be liable, under any policy other than life insurance policy, shall be paid within thirty (30) days after proof of loss is received by the insurer and ascertainment of the loss or damage is made either by agreement between the insured and the insurer or by arbitration; but if such ascertainment is not had or made within sixty (60) days after such receipt by the insurer of the proof of loss, then the loss or damage shall be paid within ninety (90) days after such receipt. Refusal or failure to pay the loss or damage within the time prescribed herein will entitle the assured to collect interest on the proceeds of the policy for the duration of the delay at the rate of twice the ceiling prescribed by the Monetary Board, unless such failure or refusal to pay is based on the ground that the claim is fraudulent.

“SEC. 250. In case of any litigation for the enforcement of any policy or contract of insurance, it shall be the duty of the Commissioner or the Court, as the case may be, to make a finding as to whether the payment of the claim of the insured has been unreasonably denied or withheld; and in the affirmative case, the insurance company shall be adjudged to pay damages which shall consist of attorney’s fees and other expenses incurred by the insured person by reason of such unreasonable denial or withholding of payment plus interest of twice the ceiling prescribed by the Monetary Board of the amount of the claim due the insured, from the date following the time prescribed in Section 248 or in Section 249, as the case may be, until the claim is fully satisfied: Provided, That failure to pay any such claim within the time prescribed in said sections shall be considered prima facie evidence of unreasonable delay in payment.

“SEC. 251. It is unlawful to:

“(a) Present or cause to be presented any fraudulent claim for the payment of a loss under a contract of insurance; and

“(b) Fraudulently prepare, make or subscribe any writing with intent to present or use the same, or to allow it to be presented in support of any such claim. Any person who violates this section shall be punished by a fine not exceeding twice the amount claimed or imprisonment of two (2) years, or both, at the discretion of the court.

“TITLE 12

“EXAMINATION OF COMPANIES

“SEC. 252. The Commissioner shall require every insurance company doing business in the Philippines to keep its books, records, accounts and vouchers in such manner that he or his authorized representatives may readily verify its annual statements and ascertain whether the company is solvent and has complied with the provisions of this Code or the circulars, instructions, rulings or decisions of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 253. The Commissioner shall at least once a year and whenever he considers the public interest so demands, cause an examination to be made into the affairs, financial condition and method of business of every insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines and of any other person, firm or corporation managing the affairs and/or property of such insurance company. Such company, as well as such managing person, firm or corporation, shall submit to the examiner all such books, papers and securities as he may require and such examiner shall also have the power to examine the officers of such company under oath touching its business and financial condition, and the authority to transact business in the Philippines of any such company shall be suspended by the Commissioner if such examination is refused and such company shall not thereafter be allowed to transact further business in the Philippines until it has fully complied with the provisions of this section.

“Government-owned or -controlled corporations or entities engaged in social or private insurance shall similarly be subject to such examination by the Commissioner unless their respective charters otherwise provide.

“TITLE 13

“SUSPENSION OR REVOCATION OF AUTHORITY

“SEC. 254. If the Commissioner is of the opinion upon examination of other evidence that any domestic or foreign insurance company is in an unsound condition, or that it has failed to comply with the provisions of law or regulations obligatory upon it, or that its condition or method of business is such as to render its proceedings hazardous to the public or to its policyholders, or that its net worth requirement, in the case of a domestic stock company, or its available cash assets, in the case of a domestic mutual company, or its security deposits, in the case of a foreign company, is impaired or deficient, or that the margin of solvency required of such company is deficient, the Commissioner is authorized to suspend or revoke all certificates of authority granted to such insurance company, its officers and agents, and no new business shall thereafter be done by such company or for such company by its agent in the Philippines while such suspension, revocation or disability continues or until its authority to do business is restored by the Commissioner. Before restoring such authority, the Commissioner shall require the company concerned to submit to him a business plan showing the company’s estimated receipts and disbursements, as well as the basis therefor, for the next succeeding three (3) years.

“TITLE 14

“APPOINTMENT OF CONSERVATOR

“SEC. 255. If at any time before, or after, the suspension or revocation of the certificate of authority of an insurance company as provided in the preceding title, the Commissioner finds that such company is in a state of continuing inability or unwillingness to maintain a condition of solvency or liquidity deemed adequate to protect the interest of policyholders and creditors, he may appoint a conservator to take charge of the assets, liabilities, and the management of such company, collect all moneys and debts due to said company and exercise all powers necessary to preserve the assets of said company, reorganize the management thereof, and restore its viability. The said conservator shall have the power to overrule or revoke the actions of the previous management and board of directors of the said company, any provision of law, or of the articles of incorporation or bylaws of the company, to the contrary notwithstanding, and such other powers as the Commissioner shall deem necessary.

“The conservator may be another insurance company doing business in the Philippines, any officer or officers of such company, or any other competent and qualified person, firm or corporation. The remuneration of the conservator and other expenses attendant to the conservation shall be borne by the insurance company concerned.

“The conservator shall not be subject to any action, claim or demand by, or liability to, any person in respect of anything done or omitted to be done in good faith in the exercise, or in connection with the exercise, of the powers conferred on the conservator.

“The conservator appointed shall report and be responsible to the Commissioner until such time as the Commissioner is satisfied that the insurance company can continue to operate on its own and the conservatorship shall likewise be terminated should the Commissioner, on the basis of the report of the conservator or of his own findings, determine that the continuance in business of the insurance company would be hazardous to policyholders and creditors, in which case the provisions of Title 15 shall apply.

“No insurance company, life or non-life, or any professional reinsurer, ordered to be liquidated by the Commissioner under the provisions hereunder may be rehabilitated or authorized to transact anew, insurance or reinsurance business, as the case may be.

“TITLE 15

“PROCEEDINGS UPON INSOLVENCY

“SEC. 256. Whenever, upon examination or other evidence, it shall be disclosed that the condition of any insurance company doing business in the Philippines is one of insolvency, or that its continuance in business would be hazardous to its policyholders and creditors, the Commissioner shall forthwith order the company to cease and desist from transacting business in the Philippines and shall designate a receiver to immediately take charge of its assets and liabilities, as expeditiously as possible collect and gather all the assets and administer the same for the benefit of its policyholders and creditors, and exercise all the powers necessary for these purposes including, but not limited to, bringing suits and foreclosing mortgages in the name of the insurance company.

“The Commissioner shall thereupon determine within ninety (90) days whether the insurance company may be reorganized or otherwise placed in such condition so that it may be permitted to resume business with safety to its policyholders and creditors and shall prescribe the conditions under which such resumption of business shall take place as well as the time for fulfillment of such conditions. In such case, the expenses and fees in the collection and administration of the insurance company shall be determined by the Commissioner and shall be paid out of the assets of such company.

“If the Commissioner shall determine and confirm within the said period that the insurance company is insolvent, as defined hereunder, or cannot resume business with safety to its policyholders and creditors, he shall, if the public interest requires, order its liquidation, indicate the manner of its liquidation and approve a liquidation plan and implement it immediately. The Commissioner shall designate a competent and qualified person as liquidator who shall take over the functions of the receiver previously designated and, with all convenient speed, reinsure all its outstanding policies, convert the assets of the insurance company to cash, or sell, assign or otherwise dispose of the same to the policyholders, creditors and other parties for the purpose of settling the liabilities or paying the debts of such company and he may, in the name of the company, institute such actions as may be necessary in the appropriate court to collect and recover accounts and assets of the insurance company, and to do such other acts as may be necessary to complete the liquidation as ordered by the Commissioner.

“The provisions of any law to the contrary notwithstanding, the actions of the Commissioner under this section shall be final and executory, and can be set aside by the court upon petition by the company and only if there is convincing proof that the action is plainly arbitrary and made in bad faith. The Commissioner, through the Solicitor General, shall then file the corresponding answer reciting the proceeding taken and praying the assistance of the court in the liquidation of the company. No restraining order or injunction shall be issued by the court enjoining the Commissioner from implementing his actions under this section, unless there is convincing proof that the action of the Commissioner is plainly arbitrary and made in bad faith and the petitioner or plaintiff files with the Clerk or Judge of the Court in which the action is pending a bond executed in favor of the Commissioner in an amount to be fixed by the court. The restraining order or injunction shall be refused or, if granted, shall be dissolved upon filing by the Commissioner, if he so desires, of a bond in an amount twice the amount of the bond of the petitioner or plaintiff conditioned that it will pay the damages which the petition or plaintiff may suffer by the refusal or the dissolution of the injunction. The provisions of Rule 58 of the New Rules of Court insofar as they are applicable shall govern the issuance and dissolution of the restraining order or injunction contemplated in this section.

“All proceedings under this title shall be given preference in the courts. The Commissioner shall not be required to pay any fee to any public officer for filing, recording, or in any manner authenticating any paper or instrument relating to the proceedings.

“As used in this title, the term Insolvency shall mean the inability of an insurance company to pay its lawful obligations as they fall due in the usual and ordinary course of business as may be shown by its failure to maintain the solvency requirements under Section 200 of this Code.

“SEC. 257. The receiver or the liquidator, as the case may be, designated under the provisions of this title, shall not be subject to any action, claim or demand by, or liability to, any person in respect of anything done or omitted to be done in good faith in the exercise, or in connection with the exercise, of the powers conferred on such receiver or liquidator.

“TITLE 16

“CONSOLIDATION AND MERGER OF
INSURANCE COMPANIES

“SEC. 258. Upon prior notice to the Commissioner, two (2) or more domestic insurance companies, acting through their respective boards of directors, may negotiate to merge into a single corporation which shall be one of the constituent corporations, or consolidate into a single corporation which shall be a new corporation to be formed by the consolidation. A common agreement of the proposed merger or consolidation shall be drawn up for submission to the stockholders or members of the constituent companies for adoption and approval in accordance with the provisions of the respective bylaws of the constituent companies and all existing laws that may be pertinent.

“SEC. 259. Such agreement shall include, aside from the proposed merger or consolidation, provisions relative to the manner of transfer of assets to and assumption of liabilities by the absorbing or acquiring company from the absorbed or dissolved company or companies; the proposed articles of merger or consolidation and bylaws of the surviving or acquiring company; the corporate name to be adopted which should not be that of any other existing company transacting similar business or one so similar as to be calculated to mislead the public; the rights of the stockholders or members of the absorbed or dissolved companies; date of effectivity of the merger or consolidation; and such particulars as may be necessary to explain and make manifest the objects and purposes of the absorbing or acquiring company.

“SEC. 260. Upon execution of such agreement to merge or consolidate by and between or among the boards of directors of the constituent companies, notice thereof shall be mailed immediately to their policyholders and creditors. The company or companies to be absorbed or dissolved shall discharge all its accrued liabilities; otherwise, such liabilities shall, with the consent of its creditors, be transferred to and assumed by the absorbing or acquiring company, or such liabilities be reinsured by the latter. In the case of such policies as are subject to cancellation by the company or companies to be absorbed or dissolved, same may be cancelled pursuant to the terms thereof in lieu of such transfer, assumption, or reinsurance.

“SEC. 261. Upon approval or adoption in the meetings of the stockholders or members called for the purpose in each of the constituent companies of the agreement to merge or consolidate, all stockholders or members dissenting or objecting to the merger or consolidation shall be paid the value of their shares by the company concerned in accordance with the bylaws thereof.

“SEC. 262. Upon approval or adoption of the agreement to merge or consolidate by the stockholders or members of the constituent companies, the corresponding articles of merger or of consolidation shall be duly executed by the presidents and attested by the corporate secretaries and shall bear the corporate seals of the merging or consolidating companies setting forth:

“(a) The plan of merger or the plan of consolidation;

“(b) As to each corporation, the number of shares outstanding, or in case of mutual corporations, the number of members; and

“© As to each corporation, the number of shares or members voted for and against such plan, respectively. Thereafter, a certified copy of such articles of merger or consolidation, together with a certificate of approval or adoption by the stockholders or members of such articles of merger or consolidation, verified by affidavits of such officers and under the seal of the constituent companies, shall be submitted to the Commissioner, together with such other papers or documents which the Commissioner may require, for his consideration.

“SEC. 263. The articles of merger or of consolidation, signed and verified as hereinabove required, shall be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission for its examination and approval.

“SEC. 264. Upon receipt from the Securities and Exchange Commission of the certificate of merger or of consolidation, the constituent companies shall surrender to the Commissioner their respective certificates of authority to transact insurance business. The absorbing or surviving company in case of merger, or the newly formed company in case of consolidation, shall immediately file with the Commissioner the corresponding application for issuance of a new certificate of authority to transact insurance business, together with a certified copy of the certificate of merger or of consolidation, and of the certificate of increase of stocks, if there is any, issued by the Securities and Exchange Commission.

“SEC. 265. Nothing in this title shall be construed to enlarge the powers of the absorbing or surviving company in case of merger, or the newly formed company in case of consolidation, except those conferred by the certificate of merger or of consolidation and the articles of merger or of consolidation, or the amended articles of incorporation, as registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

“SEC. 266. No director, officer, or stockholder of any such constituent companies shall receive any fee, commission, compensation, or other valuable consideration whatsoever, directly or indirectly, or in any manner aiding, promoting or assisting in such merger or consolidation.

“SEC. 267. The merger or consolidation of companies under this Code shall be subject to the provisions of the Corporation Code, and, in those cases specified in Republic Act No. 5455, as amended, be further subject to the provisions of said law.

“TITLE 17

“MUTUALIZATION OF STOCK LIFE
INSURANCE COMPANIES

“SEC. 268. Any domestic stock life insurance company doing business in the Philippines may convert itself into an incorporated mutual life insurer. To that end it may provide and carry out a plan for the acquisition of the outstanding shares of its capital stock for the benefit of its policyholders, or any class or classes of its policyholders, by complying with the requirements of this chapter.

“SEC 269. Such plan shall include appropriate proceedings for amending the insurer’s articles of incorporation to give effect to the acquisition, by said insurer, for the benefit of its policyholders or any class or classes thereof, of the outstanding shares of its capital stock and the conversion of the insurer from a stock corporation into a nonstock corporation for the benefit of its members. The members of such nonstock corporation shall be the policyholders from time to time of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock of the insurer was acquired, and the policyholders of such other class or classes as may be specified in such corporation’s articles of incorporation as they may be amended from time to time. Such plan shall be:

“(a) Adopted by a vote of a majority of the directors;

“(b) Approved by the vote of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares at a special meeting of shareholders called for that purpose, or by the written consent of such shareholders;

“© Submitted to the Commissioner and approved by him in writing;

“(d) Approved by a majority vote of all the policyholders of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock is to be acquired voting at an election by the policyholders called for that purpose, subject to the provisions of Section 271. The terms policyholder or policyholders as used in this chapter shall be deemed to mean the person or persons insured under an individual policy of life insurance, or of health and accident insurance, or of any combination of life, health and accident insurance. They shall also include the person or persons to whom any annuity or pure endowment is presently or prospectively payable by the terms of an individual annuity or pure endowment contract, except where the policy or contract declares some other person to be the owner or holder thereof, in which case such other person shall be deemed policyholder. In any case where a policy or contract names two or more persons as joint insured, payees, owners or holders thereof, the persons so named shall be deemed collectively to be one (1) policyholder for the purpose of this chapter. In any case where a policy or contract shall have been assigned by assignment absolute on its face to an assignee other than the insurer, and such assignment shall have been filed at the principal office of the insurer at least thirty (30) days prior to the date of any election or meeting referred to in this chapter, then such assignee shall be deemed at such election or meeting to be the policyholder. For the purpose of this chapter the terms policyholder and policyholders include the employer to whom, or a president, secretary or other executive officer of any corporation or association to which a master group policy has been issued, but exclude the holders of certificates or policies issued under or in connection with a master group policy. Beneficiaries under unmatured contracts shall not as such be deemed to be policyholders; and

“(e) Filed with the Commissioner after having been approved as provided in this section.

“SEC. 270. The Commissioner shall examine the plan submitted to him under the provisions of subparagraph © of Section 269. He shall not approve such plan unless in his opinion the rights and interests of the insurer, its policyholders and shareholders are protected nor unless he is satisfied that the plan will be fair and equitable in its operation.

“SEC. 271. The election prescribed by subparagraph (d) of Section 269 shall be called by the board of directors or the president, and every policyholder of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock is to be acquired, whose insurance shall have been in force for at least one (1) year prior to such election shall have one vote, regardless of the number of policies or amount of insurance he holds, and regardless of whether such policies are policies of life insurance or policies of health and accident insurance or annuity contracts. Notice of such election shall be given to policyholders entitled to vote by mail from the principal office of such insurer at least thirty (30) days prior to the date set for such election, in a sealed envelope, postage prepaid, addressed to each such policyholder at his last known address.

“Voting shall be by one of the following methods:

“(a) At a meeting of such policyholders, held pursuant to such notice, by ballot in person or by proxy.

“(b) If not by the method described in the preceding subparagraph, then by mail pursuant to a procedure and on forms to be prescribed by such plan.

“Such election shall be conducted under the direction and supervision of three (3) impartial and disinterested inspectors appointed by the insurer and approved by the Commissioner. In case any person appointed as inspector fails to appear at such meeting or fails or refuses to act at such election, the vacancy, if occurring in advance of the convening of the meeting or in advance of the opening of the mail vote, may be filled in the manner prescribed for the appointment of inspectors and, if occurring at the meeting or during the canvass of the mail vote, may be filled by the person acting as chairman of said meeting or designated for that purpose in such plan. The decision, act or certificate of a majority of the inspectors shall be effective in all respects as the decision, act or certificate of all. The inspectors of election shall determine the number of policyholders, the voting power of each, the policyholders represented at the meeting or voting by mail, the existence of a quorum and the authenticity, validity and effect of proxies. They shall receive votes, hear and determine all challenges and questions in any way arising in connection with the right to vote, count and tabulate all votes, determine the result, and do such other acts as are proper to conduct the vote with fairness to all policyholders. The inspectors of election shall, before commencing performance of their duties, subscribe to and file with the insurer and with the Commissioner an oath that they, and each of them, will perform their duties impartially, in good faith, to the best of their ability and as expeditiously as is practicable. On the request of the insurer, the Commissioner, a policyholder or his proxy, the inspectors shall make a report in writing of any challenge or question or matter determined by them and execute a certificate of any fact found by them. They shall also certify the result of such vote to the insurer and to the Commissioner. Any report or certificate made by them shall be prima facie evidence of facts stated therein. All necessary expenses incurred in connection with such election shall be paid by the insurer. For the purpose of this section, a quorum shall consist of five percent (5%) of the policyholders of such insurer entitled to vote at such election.

“SEC. 272. In carrying out any such plan, the insurer may acquire any shares of its own stock by gift, bequest or purchase. Any shares so acquired shall, unless as a result of such acquisition all of the shares of the insurer shall have been acquired, be acquired in trust for the policyholders of the class or classes for whose benefit the plan provides that the stock of the insurer shall be acquired as hereinafter provided. Such shares shall be assigned and transferred on the books of such insurer and approved by the Commissioner. Such trustees shall hold such stock in trust until all of the outstanding shares of capital stock of such insurer have been acquired, but for not longer than thirty (30) years with such extensions of not more than five (5) years each as may be granted by the Commissioner. Such extensions may be granted by the Commissioner if the plan so provides and if in his opinion the plan of acquisition of all of such stock can be completed within a reasonable period. Such trustees shall vote such stock at all corporate meetings at which stockholders have the right to vote. When all the outstanding shares of capital stock of such insurer have been acquired, all said shares shall be cancelled, the certificate of amendment of the insurer’s articles of incorporation giving effect thereto shall be filed in accordance with the provisions of the Corporation Code, and the insurer shall become a nonstock corporation for the profit of its members and such trust shall thereupon terminate. Thereafter such corporation shall be conducted for the mutual benefit, ratably, of its policyholders of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock was acquired and shall have power to issue non-assessable policies on a reserve basis subject to all provisions of law applicable to incorporated life insurers issuing non-assessable policies on a reserve basis. Policies so issued may be upon the basis of full or partial participation therein as agreed between the insurer and the insured.

“Upon the termination of any such voting trust, either in accordance with its terms or as hereinabove provided, such plan of mutualization shall terminate, unless theretofore completed. Upon such termination, unless the plan of mutualization provides for the disposition of the shares acquired by the insurer under such plan or for the disposition of the proceeds thereof, the shares held by such trustees shall be disposed of in accordance with an order of the court of competent jurisdiction in the judicial district in which is located the principal office of such insurer, made upon a verified petition of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 273. Any such plan of mutualization may provide for the creation of a voting trust under a trust agreement for the holding and voting by three (3) or more trustees of any portion or all of the shares of the insurer not required upon the adoption of such plan. The voting trustees shall be named in accordance with such plan or, if no provision is made therein for the naming of such trustees, then by the insurer. The voting trust agreement and voting trustees shall be subject to the approval of the Commissioner. Any or all of the trustees under such voting trust agreement may be the same person or persons as any or all of the trustees referred to in Section 272. Such voting trust agreement shall provide that in the event of acquisition by the insurer of any of the shares of stock held thereunder in accordance with the provisions of the plan, such shares so acquired together with the voting rights thereof shall be transferred by the trustees named under the provisions of this section to the trustees named under the provisions of Section 272. Any voting trust agreement created pursuant to the provisions of this section may be made irrevocable for not longer than thirty (30) years and thereafter until the termination of the trust provided for in Section 272. The trust created pursuant to the provisions of this section shall terminate in any event upon termination of the trust provided for in Section 272. Upon the termination of the trust created pursuant to the provisions of this section, any shares held in such trust shall revert to the persons entitled thereto by law.

“SEC. 274. Every payment for the acquisition of any shares of the capital stock of such insurer, the purchase price of which is not fixed by such plan, shall be subject to the prior approval of the Commissioner. Neither such plan, nor any such payment, may be approved by the Commissioner unless he finds that the rights and interests of the insurer, its policyholders, and shareholders are protected.

“SEC. 275. The trustees referred to in Section 272 shall file with such insurer and with the Commissioner a verified acceptance of their appointments and verified declarations that they will faithfully discharge their duties as such trustees. All dividends and other sums received by said trustees on the shares held by them, after paying the necessary expenses of executing their trust, shall be immediately repaid to such insurer for the benefit of all who are, or may become, policyholders of such insurance of the class or classes for whose benefit the stock of such insurer was acquired and entitled to participate in the profits thereof and shall be added to and become part of the assets of such insurer.

“SEC. 276. If, at any time within the period provided in the plan for the acquisition of the outstanding shares of stock of the insurer, ninety percent (90%) thereof has already been acquired and transferred to the trustees under the plan, the insurer by a vote of a majority of the directors may determine to make an offer, with the permission of the Commissioner and subject to such requirement as he may specify, to acquire by purchase all of the shares not theretofore acquired under the plan, at a specified price which the insurer considers to be their fair value as of the date of making such offer.

“If the offer to acquire is permitted by the Commissioner, the insurer shall make a written offer by registered mail to each shareholder whose shares have not theretofore been acquired under the plan or otherwise, offering to acquire all his shares at such price if accepted in writing within thirty (30) days after the mailing of such offer. Any shareholder accepting such offer within the time therefor shall, within sixty (60) days after his acceptance, transfer to the insurer the certificates representing such shares and, upon doing so, shall be paid by the insurer the amount of such offer for his shares. Any share so acquired shall be assigned and transferred to the trustees under the plan and held by them as shares acquired pursuant to the plan.

“Each shareholder who does not accept such offer to acquire his shares within the time stated in such offer for acceptance thereof shall within fifteen (15) days after the expiration of such offer apply to the Secretary of Finance for a determination of the fair value of his shares as of the date of making such offer. The Secretary of Finance may himself, after due notice and hearing, determine upon the evidence received the fair value of the shares as of the date of making such offer, or appoint three (3) impartial and disinterested persons to appraise the fair value of such shares with such direction as he shall deem proper and necessary to expedite the proceedings. Upon completion of the appraisal proceedings, the appraisers shall file with the Secretary of Finance their report in writing stating the fair value of such shares as of the date of the making of such offer and setting forth their findings in support of such statement. The appraisers shall furnish each party to the proceedings a copy of their appraisal report, and within ten (10) days after receipt thereof, any such party may signify his objection, if any, to the report or move for the approval thereof. Upon the expiration of the period of ten (10) days referred to above, the report shall be set for hearing, after which the Secretary of Finance shall issue an order adopting, modifying or rejecting the report, in whole or in part, or he may receive further evidence or may recommit it with instructions. Whenever the Secretary of Finance shall determine in any manner, as aforesaid, the fair value of such shares, he may also determine the terms of payment thereof by the insurer. The expenses incidental to the proceedings including charges of the appraisers, if any, shall be paid equally by the insurer and the shareholder.

“The findings of the Secretary of Finance on all questions of fact raised at the hearing of the application for determination of the fair value of such shares shall be conclusive upon all parties to the proceedings. The order of the Secretary of Finance determining the fair value of the shares and the terms of payment thereof shall have the force and effect of a judgment which shall be appealable on any question of law. Such order shall become final and executory fifteen (15) days after receipt thereof by the parties to the proceedings.

“Upon any such order becoming final and from which no appeal is pending, or when the time to appeal therefrom has expired, each shareholder party to the proceedings shall transfer his shares to the insurer and surrender to the said insurer the certificates representing such shares and the insurer shall make payment therefor as provided in such order. Any shares so acquired by the insurer shall be assigned and transferred to the trustees and held by them as shares acquired pursuant to the plan.

“Any shareholder who does not apply to the Secretary of Finance in the manner and within the time hereinbefore prescribed shall be deemed to have accepted the offer referred to above, effective, however, upon the expiration of the time hereinabove prescribed for making such application, and such shareholder’s time for accepting such offer shall, for that purpose only, be deemed to have been extended accordingly.

“Any offer to acquire shares made pursuant to this section shall, except as otherwise provided herein, be irrevocable until all proceedings upon such offer have been completed or all shares have otherwise been earlier acquired by the insurer.

“Any shareholder who has expressly or impliedly accepted the plan or the offer to acquire his shares not theretofore acquired under the plan, and any shareholder who has rejected such plan or such offer and has applied, as aforesaid, to the Secretary of Finance for a determination of the fair value of his shares subsequent to which an agreement has been reached or a final order issued fixing such fair value but who fails to surrender his certificates for cancellation upon payment of the amount to which he is entitled, may be compelled to do so by an order of the Secretary of Finance for that purpose and such order may provide that upon failure of such shareholder to surrender such certificates for cancellation, such order shall stand in lieu of such surrender and cancellation.

“SEC. 277. Such insurer, after mutualization, shall be a continuation of the original insurer, and such mutualization shall not affect such insurer’s certificate of authority nor existing suits, rights or contracts except as provided in said plan for the acquisition of the outstanding shares of the capital stock of such insurer, approved as provided in this chapter. Such insurer, after mutualization, shall exercise all the rights and powers and shall perform all the duties conferred or imposed by law upon insurers writing the classes of insurance written by it, and to protect rights and contracts existing prior to mutualization, subject to the effect of said plan. The board of directors of such insurer, prior to mutualization, may adopt amendments to its bylaws to take effect upon mutualization.

“SEC. 278. (a) An annual meeting of members shall be held at ten o’clock in the morning of the fourth Tuesday of March of each year at the principal office of the insurer, unless a different time or place is provided in the bylaws.

“(b) Special meetings of the members, for any purpose or purposes whatsoever, may be called at any time by the president, or by the board of directors, or by one or more members holding not less than one-fifth (1/5) of the voting power of such insurer, or by such other officers or persons as the bylaws authorize.

© Notice of all meetings of members whether annual or special shall be given in writing to the members entitled to vote by the secretary, or an assistant secretary, or other person charged with that duty, or if there be no such officer, or in case of his neglect or refusal, by any director or member. At the option of the insurer such notice may be imprinted on premium notices or receipts or on both.

“A notice may be given by such insurer to any member either personally, or by mail, or other means of written communication, charges prepaid, addressed to such member at his address appearing on the books of the insurer, or given by him to the insurer for the purpose of notice. If a member gives no address, notice shall be deemed to have been given him if sent by mail or other means of written communication addressed to the place where the principal office of the insurer is situated, or if published at least once in some newspaper of general circulation in the place in which said office is located.

“Notice of any meeting of members shall be sent to each member entitled thereto not less than seven (7) days before such meeting, unless the bylaws provide otherwise.

“Notice of any meeting of members shall specify the place, the day and the hour of the meeting and the general nature of the business to be transacted.

“Notice of an annual meeting to be held at the time and place specified in subparagraph (a) of this section shall be sufficiently given if published at least once in each of four (4) successive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the place in which the principal office of such insurer is located, and if so published no other notice of such meeting shall be required.

“(d) The presence in person or by proxy of five percent (5%) of the members entitled to vote at any meeting shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business, including the amendment of the articles of incorporation and/or the bylaws unless otherwise provided by the bylaws.

“(e) Each such member shall have one (1) vote at any meeting of members regardless of the number of policies or the amount of insurance that such member holds and regardless of whether such policies are policies of life insurance, or of health and accident insurance, or both. Any member entitled to vote shall have the right to do so either in person or by an agent or agents authorized by a written proxy executed by such person or his duly authorized agent and filed with the secretary of such insurer.

“(f) The directors of the insurer in office at the time the insurer is mutualized as provided in this chapter shall continue in office until the first annual meeting of members. At the first annual meeting of members and at each annual meeting thereafter, directors shall be elected by the members for the term or terms authorized by this chapter.

“(g) The articles of incorporation or the bylaws may provide that the directors may be divided into two (2) or more classes whose terms of office shall expire at different times, but no terms shall continue longer than six (6) years. In the absence of such provisions, each director, except members of the board of directors at the time the insurer is mutualized, shall be elected for a term of one (1) year. All directors shall hold office for a term for which they are elected and until their successors are elected and qualified. A director may, but need not be a member or policyholder of the insurer of which he is acting as director. Vacancies in the board of directors may be filled by a majority of the remaining directors, though less than a quorum, and each director so elected shall hold office until the next annual meeting.

“(h) All insurers mutualized under the provisions of this chapter shall be subject to all other applicable provisions of this Code. The provisions of the Corporation Code shall apply in a suppletory manner.

“SEC. 279. The provisions of Commonwealth Act No. 83, otherwise known as the Securities Act, as amended, shall not apply to any of the following:

“(a) Shares of the capital stock of such insurer acquired as provided in Section 272 and assigned and transferred to the trustees as is provided in said section, and the assignment and transfer of said shares as so provided;

“(b) Any certificate or other instrument issued to a policyholder of such mutualized insurer conferring or evidencing membership in such mutualized insurer or conferring or evidencing such member’s right to participate in the profits or share in the assets of such mutualized insurer by virtue of his membership therein, and the issuance of such certificate or other instrument;

“© The plan for the acquisition of the outstanding shares of the capital stock of such insurer authorized by the provisions of this chapter, the submission of said plan to the Commissioner and to the policyholders of such insurer as provided in this chapter, and the approval and carrying out of said plan or any part thereof in accordance with the provisions of this chapter.

“SEC. 280. A domestic mutual life insurance company doing business in the Philippines may convert itself into an incorporated stock life insurance company by demutualization. To that end, it may provide and carry out a plan for the conversion by complying with the requirements of this title.

“The conversion of a domestic mutual life insurance company to an incorporated stock life insurance company shall be carried out pursuant to a conversion plan duly approved by the Commissioner.

“The Commissioner shall promulgate such rules and regulations as he or she may deem necessary to carry out the provisions of this title, after due consultation with representatives of the insurance industry.

“All converted insurers under the provisions of this title shall be subject to all other applicable provisions of this Code. The provisions of the Corporation Code shall apply in a suppletory manner.

“TITLE 18

“WITHDRAWAL OF FOREIGN
INSURANCE COMPANIES

“SEC. 281. A foreign insurance company doing business in the Philippines, upon payment of the fee hereinafter prescribed and surrender to the Commissioner of its certificate of authority, may apply to withdraw from the Philippines. Such application shall be duly executed in writing, accompanied by evidence of due authority for such execution, properly acknowledged.

“SEC. 282. The Commissioner shall publish the application for withdrawal once a week for three (3) consecutive weeks in a newspaper of general circulation in the Philippines. The expenses of such publication shall be paid by the insurance company filing such application.

“SEC. 283. Every foreign insurance company desiring to withdraw from the Philippines shall, prior to such withdrawal, discharge its liabilities to policyholders and creditors in this country. In case of its policies insuring residents of the Philippines, it shall cause the primary liabilities under such policies to be reinsured and assumed by another insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines. In the case of such policies as are subject to cancellation by the withdrawing company, it may cancel such policies pursuant to the terms thereof in lieu of such reinsurance and assumption of liabilities.

“SEC. 284. The Commissioner shall cause an examination of the books and records of the withdrawing company, and if, upon such examination, the Commissioner finds that the insurer has no outstanding liabilities to policyholders and creditors in the Philippines, and no policies uncancelled; or its primary liabilities have been reinsured or assumed by another insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines, as required in the preceding section, it shall cancel the withdrawing company’s certificate of authority, if unexpired, and shall permit the insurer to withdraw. The cost and expenses of all such examination shall be paid as prescribed in Section 440.

“SEC. 285. Upon the failure of such withdrawing insurance company or its agents in the Philippines to pay the expenses of such publication within thirty (30) days after the presentation of the bill therefor, the Commissioner shall collect such fee from the deposit furnished in accordance with the provisions of Section 197.

“SEC. 286. A foreign life insurance company that withdraws from the Philippines shall be considered a servicing insurance company if its business transactions are confined to accepting periodic premium payments from, or granting policy loans and paying cash surrender values of outstanding policies to, or reviving lapsed policies of, Philippine policyholders, and such other related services.

“SEC. 287. No company shall act as a servicing insurance company until after it shall have obtained a special certificate of authority to act as such from the Commissioner upon application therefor and payment by the company of the fees hereinafter prescribed. Such certificate shall expire on the last day of December of the third year and shall be renewed, while the company continues to service its policyholders, and to comply with all the applicable provisions of law and regulations.

“TITLE 19

“PROFESSIONAL REINSURERS

“SEC. 288. Except as otherwise provided in this Code, no partnership, association or corporation shall transact any business in the Philippines as a professional reinsurer until it shall have obtained a certificate of authority for that purpose from the Commissioner upon application therefor and payment by such entity of the fees hereinafter prescribed. As used in this Code, the term ‘professional reinsurer’ shall mean any entity that transacts solely and exclusively reinsurance business in the Philippines.

“The Commissioner may refuse to issue a certificate of authority to any such entity when such refusal will best promote public interest. No such certificate of authority shall be granted to any such entity unless and until the Commissioner is satisfied by such examination and such evidence as may be required that such entity is qualified by the laws of the Philippines to transact business therein as a professional reinsurer.

“Before issuing such certificate of authority, the Commissioner must be satisfied that the name of the applicant is not that of any other known company transacting insurance or reinsurance business in the Philippines, or a name so similar as to be calculated to mislead the public.

“Such certificate of authority shall expire on the last day of December the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

“Every such partnership, association, or corporation receiving such certificate of authority shall be subject to the provisions of this Code and other related laws, and to the jurisdiction and supervision of the Commissioner.

“SEC. 289. Any partnership, association, or corporation authorized to transact solely reinsurance business must have a capitalization of at least Three billion pesos (P3,000,000,000.00) paid in cash of which at least fifty percent (50%) is paid-up and the remaining portion thereof is contributed surplus, which in no case shall be less than Four hundred million pesos (P400,000,000.00) or such capitalization as may be determined by the Secretary of Finance, upon the recommendation of the Commissioner: Provided, That twenty-five percent (25%) of the paid-up capital must be invested in securities satisfactory to the Commissioner consisting of bonds or other instruments of debt of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions or instrumentalities, or of government-owned or -controlled corporations and entities, including the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas, and deposited with the Commissioner, and the remaining seventy-five percent (75%) in such other securities as may be allowed and permitted by the Commissioner, which securities shall at all times be maintained free from any lien or encumbrance: Provided, further, That the aforesaid capital requirement is without prejudice to other requirements to be imposed under any risk-based capital method that may be adopted by the Commissioner: Provided, finally, That the provisions of this chapter applicable to insurance companies shall as far as practicable be likewise applicable to professional reinsurers.

“TITLE 20

“HOLDING COMPANIES

“SEC. 290. As used in this title, the following terms shall have the respective meanings hereinafter set forth unless the context shall otherwise require:

“(a) Person means an individual, partnership, firm, association, corporation, trust, any similar entity or any combination of the foregoing acting in concert.

“(b) Control, including the terms controlling, controlled by and under common control with, means the possession directly or indirectly of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of a person, whether through the ownership of voting securities by a contract other than a commercial contract for goods or non-management services or otherwise. Subject to Section 292, control shall be presumed to exist if any person directly or indirectly owns, controls or holds with the power to vote forty percent (40%) or more of the voting securities of any other person: Provided, That no person shall be deemed to control another person solely by reason of his being an officer or director of such other person.

“© Holding company means any person who directly or indirectly controls any authorized insurer.

“(d) Controlled insurer means an authorized insurer controlled directly or indirectly by a holding company.

“(e) Controlled person means any person, other than a controlled insurer, who is controlled directly or indirectly by a holding company.

“(f) Holding company system means a holding company together with its controlled insurers and controlled persons.

“SEC. 291. Notwithstanding paragraph (b) of Section 290, the Commissioner may determine after notice and opportunity to be heard, that a person exercises directly or indirectly either alone or pursuant to an agreement with one or more other persons such a controlling influence over the management or policies of an authorized insurer as to make it necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of policyholders or stockholders of the insurer that the person be deemed to control the insurer.

“SEC. 292. The Commissioner may determine upon application that any person, either alone or pursuant to agreement with one or more other persons, does not or will not upon the taking of some proposed action control another person. The filing of an application hereunder in good faith by any person shall relieve the applicant from any obligation or liability imposed by this title with respect to the subject of the application, except as contained in Section 302, until the Commissioner has acted upon the application. Within thirty (30) days or such further period as he may prescribe, the Commissioner may prospectively revoke or modify his determination, after notice and opportunity to be heard, whenever in his judgment, revocation or modification is consistent with this title.

“SEC. 293. Notwithstanding any other provisions of this title, the following shall not be deemed holding companies:

“(a) Authorized insurers or reinsurers or their subsidiaries; and

“(b) The Government of the Philippines, or any political subdivision, agency or instrumentality thereof, or any corporation which is wholly owned directly or indirectly by one or more of the foregoing.

“The Commissioner may conditionally or unconditionally exempt any specified person or class of persons from any of the obligations or liabilities imposed under this title, if and to the extent he finds the exemption necessary or appropriate in the public interest or not adverse to the interests of policyholders or stockholders and consistent with the purposes of this title.

“SEC. 294. (a) Every person who on the date this Code takes effect is a controlled insurer and every person who thereafter becomes a controlled insurer, shall, within sixty (60) days thereafter, or within thirty (30) days after becoming a controlled insurer, whichever is later, register with the Commissioner. Such registration shall be amended within thirty (30) days following any change in the identity of its holding company. The Commissioner may grant one or more reasonable extensions of the time to register.

“(b) Every registrant shall furnish the Commissioner with the following information concerning its holding company:

“(1) A copy of its charter or articles of incorporation and its bylaws;

“(2) The identities of its principal shareholders, officers, directors and controlled persons; and

“(3) Information as to its capital structure and financial condition, and a description of its principal business activities.

“SEC. 295. Every controlled insurer shall file with the Commissioner such reports or material as he may direct for the purpose of disclosing information concerning the operations of persons within the holding company system which may materially affect the operations, management or financial condition of the insurer.

“SEC. 296. Every holding company and every controlled person within a holding company system shall be subject to examination by order of the Commissioner if he has cause to believe that the operations of such persons may materially affect the operations, management or financial condition of any controlled insurer with the system and that he is unable to obtain relevant information from such controlled insurer. The grounds relied upon by the Commissioner for such examination shall be stated in his order, which order shall be subject to judicial review only at the instance of the person sought to be examined. Such examination shall be confined to matters specified in the order. The cost of such examination shall be assessed against the person examined and no portion thereof shall thereafter be reimbursed to it directly or indirectly by the controlled insurer.

“SEC. 297. The Commissioner shall keep the contents of each report made pursuant to this title and any information obtained by him in connection therewith confidential and shall not make the same public without the prior written consent of the controlled insurer to which it pertains unless the Commissioner after notice and an opportunity to be heard shall determine that the interests of policyholders, stockholders or the public will be served by the publication thereof. In any action or proceeding by the Commissioner against the person examined or any other person within the same holding company system a report of such examination published by him shall be admissible as evidence of the facts stated therein.

“SEC. 298. Transactions within a holding company system to which a controlled insurer is a party shall be subject to the following:

“(a) The terms shall be fair and equitable;

“(b) Charges or fees for services performed shall be reasonable;

“© Expenses incurred and payments received shall be allocated to the insurer on an equitable basis in conformity with customary insurance accounting practices consistently applied.

“The books, accounts and records of each party to all such transactions shall be maintained as to clearly and accurately disclose the nature and details of the transactions including such accounting information as is necessary to support the reasonableness of the charges or fees to the respective parties.

“SEC. 299. The prior written approval of the Commissioner shall be required for the following transactions between a controlled insurer and any person in its holding company system: sales, purchases, exchanges, loans or extensions of credit, or investments, involving five percent (5%) or more of the insurer’s admitted assets as of the thirty-first day of December next preceding.

“SEC. 300. The following transactions between a controlled insurer and any person in its holding company system may not be entered into unless the insurer has notified the Commissioner in writing of its intention to enter into any such transaction at least thirty (30) days prior thereto, or such shorter period as he may permit, and he has not disapproved it within such period:

“(a) Sales, purchases, exchanges, loans or extensions of credit, or investments, involving more than one-half of one percent (½%) but less than five percent (5%) of the insurer’s admitted assets as of the thirty-first day of December next preceding;

“(b) Reinsurance treaties or agreements;

“© Rendering of services on a regular or systematic basis; or

“(d) Any material transaction, specified by regulation, which the Commissioner determines may adversely affect the interest of the insurer’s policyholders or stockholders or of the public.

“Nothing herein contained shall be deemed to authorize or permit any transaction which, in the case of a non-controlled insurer, would be otherwise contrary to law.

“SEC. 301. The Commissioner, in reviewing transactions pursuant to Sections 299 and 300, shall consider whether the transactions comply with the standard set forth in Section 298 and whether they may adversely affect the interests of policyholders. This section shall not apply to transactions subject to other sections of this Code which impose notice or approval requirements greater than those prescribed by this title.

“SEC. 302. (a) No person, other than an authorized insurer, shall acquire control of any domestic insurer, whether by purchase of its securities or otherwise, except:

“(1) After twenty (20) days written notice to its insurer or such shorter period as the Commissioner may permit, of its intention to acquire control; and

“(2) With the prior written approval of the Commissioner.

“(b) The Commissioner shall disapprove the acquisition of control of a domestic insurer if he determines, after notice and an opportunity to be heard, that such action is reasonably necessary to protect the interest of the people of this country. The following shall be the only factors to be considered by him in reaching the foregoing determination:

“(1) The financial condition of the acquiring person and the insurer;

“(2) The trustworthiness of the acquiring person or any of its officers or directors;

“(3) A plan for the proper and effective conduct of the insurer’s operations;

“(4) The source of the funds or assets for the acquisition;

“(5) The fairness of any exchange of stock, assets, cash or other consideration for the stock or assets to be received;

“(6) Whether the effect of the acquisition may be substantially to lessen competition in any line of commerce in insurance or to tend to create a monopoly therein; and

“(7) Whether the acquisition is likely to be hazardous or prejudicial to the insurer’s policyholders or stockholders.

“© The following conditions affecting any controlled insurer, regardless of when such control has been acquired, are violations of this title:

“(1) The controlling person or any of its officers or directors have demonstrated untrustworthiness; and

“(2) The effect of retention of control may be substantially to lessen competition in any line of commerce in insurance in this country or to tend to create a monopoly therein. If, after notice and an opportunity to be heard, the Commissioner determines that any of the foregoing violations exists, he shall reduce his findings to writing and shall issue an order based thereon and cause the same to be served upon the insurer and upon all persons affected thereby directing any person found to be in violation thereof to take appropriate action to cure such violation. Upon the failure of any such person to comply with such order, Section 306 shall become applicable.

“(d) The Commissioner may require the submission of such information as he deems necessary to determine whether any acquisition or retention of control complies with this title and may require, as a condition of approval of such acquisition or retention of control, that all or any portion of such information be disclosed to the insurer’s stockholders.

“(e) Unless subject to registration under Section 294 or unless acquisition of its control is subject to paragraphs (a) and (b) hereof, every authorized insurer shall notify the Commissioner in writing of the identity of any person whom the insurer then knows or has reason to believe controls or has taken any action, other than preliminary negotiations or discussion, to acquire control of the insurer.

“SEC. 303. (a) Notwithstanding the control of an authorized insurer by any person, the officers and directors of the insurer shall not thereby be relieved of any obligation or liability to which they would otherwise be subject by law, and the insurer shall be managed so as to assure its separate operating identity consistent with this title.

“(b) Nothing herein shall preclude an authorized insurer from having or sharing a common management or cooperative or joint use of personnel, property or services with one or more other persons under arrangements meeting the standards of Section 298.

“SEC. 304. To the extent that any information or material is set forth in forms or other matter on file with any government agency or in a registration form filed with the Commissioner by another person within the same holding company system, the controlled insurer may comply with the registration or reporting requirements of this title by referring in its registration form or report to such other filed matter and attaching a copy thereof certified by the insurer as a true and complete copy, to such registration form or report or, if such other filed matter is on file with the Commissioner, incorporating such matter by reference.

“SEC. 305. No holding company or controlled person shall directly or indirectly or through another person do or cause to be done for or in behalf of the controlled insurer any act intended to affect the insurance operations of the insurer which, if done by the insurer, would violate any provision of this Code.

“SEC. 306. In addition to any other penalty provided by law, the Commissioner may, upon the willful failure of any person within a holding company system to comply with this title or any regulation or order promulgated hereunder:

“(a) Proceed under Title 14 or Title 15, Chapter III of this Code with respect to insurer within the holding company system; or

“(b) Revoke or refuse to renew the authority to do business in this country of an insurer within the holding company system or refuse to issue such authority to any other insurer in the system; or

“© Direct that, in addition to any other penalty provided by law, such person forfeit to the people of this country a sum not less than Five thousand pesos (P5,000.00) for a first violation and Twenty-five thousand pesos (P25,000.00) for any subsequent violation. An additional sum not less than Twenty-five thousand pesos (P25,000.00) shall be imposed for each month during which any such violation shall continue.

“CHAPTER IV

“SALES AGENCIES AND TECHNICAL SERVICES

“TITLE l

“INSURANCE AGENTS AND INSURANCE BROKERS

“SEC. 307. No insurance company doing business in the Philippines, nor any agent thereof, shall pay any commission or other compensation to any person for services in obtaining insurance, unless such person shall have first procured from the Commissioner a license to act as an insurance agent of such company or as an insurance broker as hereinafter provided.

“No person shall act as an insurance agent or as an insurance broker in the solicitation or procurement of applications for insurance, or receive for services in obtaining insurance, any commission or other compensation from any insurance company doing business in the Philippines, or any agent thereof, without first procuring a license so to act from the Commissioner, which must be renewed every three (3) years thereafter. Such license shall be issued by the Commissioner only upon the written application of the person desiring it, such application if for a license to act as insurance agent, being approved or endorsed by the company such person desires to represent, and shall be upon a form prescribed by the Commissioner giving such information as he may require, and upon payment of the corresponding fee hereinafter prescribed. The Commissioner shall satisfy himself as to the competence and trustworthiness of the applicant and shall have the right to refuse to issue or renew and to suspend or revoke any such license in his discretion. The license shall expire after the thirty-first day of December of the third year following the date of issuance unless it is renewed.

“Licenses may be renewed in the case of the company represented by such agents, and in the case of insurance brokers, upon the application of the said brokers, themselves.

“SEC. 308. The provisions of Sections 307 and 309 shall apply to an employee who shall be engaged to sell insurance products by an insurance company.

“SEC. 309. Any person who for compensation solicits or obtains insurance on behalf of any insurance company or transmits for a person other than himself an application for a policy or contract of insurance to or from such company or offers or assumes to act in the negotiating of such insurance shall be an insurance agent within the intent of this section and shall thereby become liable to all the duties, requirements, liabilities and penalties to which an insurance agent is subject.

“An insurance agent is an independent contractor and not an employee of the company represented. ‘Insurance agent’ includes an agency leader, agency manager, or their equivalent.

“Since the insurance industry is imbued with public interest, the insurance companies upon approval of the Commissioner may exercise wide latitude in supervising the activities of their insurance agents to ensure the protection of the insuring public.

“SEC. 310. Any person who for any compensation, commission or other thing of value acts or aids in any manner in soliciting, negotiating or procuring the making of any insurance contract or in placing risk or taking out insurance, on behalf of an insured other than himself, shall be an insurance broker within the intent of this Code, and shall thereby become liable to all the duties, requirements, liabilities and penalties to which an insurance broker is subject.

“SEC. 311. Every applicant for an insurance broker’s license shall file with the application and shall thereafter maintain in force while so licensed, a bond in favor of the people of the Republic of the Philippines executed by a company authorized to become surety upon official recognizances, stipulations, bonds and undertakings. The bond shall be in such amount as may be fixed by the Commissioner, but in no case less than Five hundred thousand pesos (P500,000.00), and shall be conditioned upon full accounting and due payment to the person entitled thereto of funds coming into the broker’s possession through insurance transactions under license. The bond shall remain in force until released by the Commissioner, or until cancelled by the surety. Without prejudice to any liability previously incurred thereunder, the surety may cancel the bond on thirty (30) days advance written notice to both the broker and the Commissioner.

“Upon approval of the application, the applicant must also file two (2) errors and omissions (professional liability or professional indemnity) policies issued separately by two (2) insurance companies authorized to do business in the Philippines, satisfactory to the Commissioner to indemnify the applicant against any claim or claims for breach of duty as insurance broker which may be made against him by reason of any negligent act, error or omission, whenever or wherever committed or alleged to have been committed, on the part of the applicant or any person who has been, is now, or may hereafter during the subsistence of the policies be employed by the said applicant in his capacity as insurance broker: Provided, That the filing of any claim or claims under one of such policies shall preclude the filing of the said claim or claims under the other policy. The said policies shall be in such amounts as may be prescribed by the Commissioner, depending upon the size or amount of the broking business of the applicant, but in no case shall the amount of each of such policies be less than Five hundred thousand pesos (P500,000.00).

“SEC. 312. The Commissioner shall, in order to determine the competence of every applicant to have the kind of license applied for, require such applicant to submit to a written examination and to pass the same to the satisfaction of the Commissioner. The Commissioner may delegate or authorize the administration of the examination to an independent organization, subject to such conditions that the Commissioner may provide.

“SEC. 313. An applicant for the written examination mentioned in the preceding section must be of good moral character and must not have been convicted of any crime involving moral turpitude. He must satisfactorily show to the Commissioner that he has been trained in the kind of insurance contemplated in the license applied for. Such examination may be waived if it is shown to the satisfaction of the Commissioner that the applicant has undergone extensive education and/or training in insurance.

“SEC. 314. An application for the issuance or renewal of a license to act as an insurance agent or insurance broker may be refused, or such license, if already issued or renewed, shall be suspended or revoked if the Commissioner finds that the applicant for, or holder of, such license:

“(a) Has willfully violated any provision of this Code; or

“(b) Has intentionally made a material misstatement in the application to qualify for such license; or

“© Has obtained or attempted to obtain a license by fraud or misrepresentation; or

“(d) Has been guilty of fraudulent or dishonest practices; or

“(e) Has misappropriated or converted to his own use or illegally withheld moneys required to be held in a fiduciary capacity; or

“(f) Has not demonstrated trustworthiness and competence to transact business as an insurance agent or insurance broker in such manner as to safeguard the public; or

“(g) Has materially misrepresented the terms and conditions of policies or contracts of insurance which he seeks to sell or has sold; or

“(h) Has failed to pass the written examination prescribed, if not otherwise exempt from taking the same.

“In addition to the foregoing causes, no license to act as insurance agent or insurance broker shall be renewed if the holder thereof has not been actively engaged as such agent or broker in accordance with such rules as the Commissioner may prescribe.

“SEC. 315. The premium, or any portion thereof, which an insurance agent or insurance broker collects from an insured and which is to be paid to an insurance company because of the assumption of liability through the issuance of policies or contracts of insurance, shall be held by the agent or broker in a fiduciary capacity and shall not be misappropriated or converted to his own use or illegally withheld by the agent or broker.

“Any insurance company which delivers to an insurance agent or insurance broker a policy or contract of insurance shall be deemed to have authorized such agent or broker to receive on its behalf payment of any premium which is due on such policy or contract of insurance at the time of its issuance or delivery or which becomes due thereon.

“In order to ensure faithful performance by the insurance agent or insurance broker of these fiduciary responsibilities, the Insurance Commissioner shall prescribe the minimum terms and conditions on such matters in the standard agency or brokers agreement between the agents and/or the broker with the insurance companies.

“SEC. 316. Any provision of existing laws to the contrary notwithstanding, no person shall, within the Philippines, sell or offer for sale a variable contract or do or perform any act or thing in the sale, negotiation, making or consummating of any variable contract other than for himself unless such person shall have a valid and current license from the Commissioner authorizing such person to act as a variable contract agent. No such license shall be issued unless and until the Commissioner is satisfied, after examination that such person is by training, knowledge, ability and character qualified to act as such agent. Any such license may be withdrawn and cancelled by the Commissioner after notice and hearing, if he shall find that the holder thereof does not then have the qualifications required for the issuance of such license.

“SEC. 317. It shall be unlawful for any person, company or corporation in the Philippines to act as general agent of any insurance company unless he is empowered by a written power of attorney duly executed by such insurance company, and registered with the Commissioner to receive notices, summons and legal processes for and in behalf of the insurance company concerned in connection with actions or other legal proceedings against said insurance company. It shall be the duty of said general agent to notify the Commissioner of his post office address in the Philippines, or any change thereof. Notices, summons, or processes of any kind sent by registered mail to the last registered address of such general agent of the company concerned or to the Commissioner shall be sufficient service and deemed as if served on the insurance company itself.

“SEC. 318. Except as otherwise provided by law or treaty, it shall be unlawful for any person, partnership, association or corporation in the Philippines, for himself or itself, or for some other person, partnership, association or corporation, either to procure, receive or forward applications of insurance in, or to issue or to deliver or accept policies or contracts of insurance of or for, any insurance company or companies not authorized to transact business in the Philippines, covering risks, life or non-life, situated in the Philippines; and any such person, partnership, association or corporation violating the provisions of this section shall be deemed guilty of a penal offense, and upon conviction thereof, shall for each such offense be punished by a fine of Two hundred fifty thousand pesos (P250,000.00), or imprisonment of six (6) months, or both, at the discretion of the court: Provided, That the provisions of this section shall not apply to reinsurance.

“TITLE 2

“REINSURANCE BROKERS

“SEC. 319. Except as provided in the next succeeding title, no person shall act as reinsurance broker in the Philippines unless he is authorized as such by the Commissioner.

“A reinsurance broker is one who, for compensation, not being a duly authorized agent, employee or officer of an insurer in which any reinsurance is effected, acts or aids in any manner in negotiating contracts of reinsurance, or placing risks of effecting reinsurance, for any insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines.

“SEC. 320. Upon application and payment of the corresponding fee hereinafter prescribed, and the filing of two (2) errors and omissions (professional liability or professional indemnity) policies hereinafter described, a person may, if found qualified, be issued a license to act as reinsurance broker by the Commissioner. No such license shall be valid after December 31 of the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

“The errors and omissions (professional liability or professional indemnity) policies mentioned above shall indemnify the applicant against any claim or claims for breach of duty as reinsurance broker which may be made against him by reason of any negligent act, error or omission, whenever or wherever committed or alleged to have been committed, on the part of the applicant or any person who has been, is now, or may hereafter during the subsistence of the policies be employed by the said applicant in his capacity as reinsurance broker: Provided, That the filing of any claim or claims under one of such policies shall preclude the filing of the said claim or claims under the other policy. The said policies shall be issued separately by two (2) insurance companies authorized to do business in the Philippines and shall be in such amounts as may be prescribed by the Insurance Commissioner, depending upon the size or amount of the broking business of the applicant, but in no case shall the amount of each of such policies be less than Five hundred thousand pesos (P500,000.00).

“SEC. 321. The Commissioner may recall, suspend or revoke the license granted to a reinsurance broker for violation of any existing law, rule and regulation, or any provision of this Code after due notice and hearing.

“TITLE 3

“RESIDENT AGENTS

“SEC. 322. No person shall act as resident agent, as hereinafter defined, unless he is registered as such with the Commissioner.

“SEC. 323. The term resident agent, as used in this title, is one duly appointed by a foreign insurer or broker not authorized to do business in the Philippines to receive in its behalf notices, summons and legal processes in connection with actions or other legal proceedings against such foreign insurer or broker.

“SEC. 324. The application for a certificate of registration as resident agent filed with the Commissioner must be accompanied with a copy of the power of attorney, duly notarized and authenticated by the Philippine Consul in the place where such foreign insurer or broker is domiciled, empowering the applicant to act as resident agent and to receive notices, summons and legal processes for and in behalf of such foreign insurer or broker in connection with any action or legal proceeding against such foreign insurer or broker.

“SEC. 325. It shall be the duty of such resident agent to notify immediately the Commissioner of any change of his office address.

“SEC. 326. A certificate of registration issued to a resident agent shall expire on the thirty-first day of December of the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

“The Commissioner may, after due notice and hearing, recall or cancel the certificate of registration issued to a resident agent for violation of any existing law, rule or regulation, or any provision of this Code.

“TITLE 4

“NON-LIFE COMPANY UNDERWRITER

“SEC. 327. No person shall act, and no company shall employ any person, as non-life company underwriter, whose duty and responsibility it shall be to select, evaluate and accept risks for, and to determine the terms and conditions, including those pertaining to amounts of retentions, under which such risks are to be accepted by the company, unless such underwriter is registered as such with the Commissioner.

“SEC. 328. Every non-life insurance company doing business in the Philippines must maintain at all times a register of risks accepted and a claims register for each line of risks engaged in by such non-life insurance company with such entries therein as are now or as may hereafter be required by the Commissioner, and it shall be the responsibility of the underwriter on the particular line of risk involved to see to it that the said registers are well maintained and kept, and that all entries therein are properly and correctly recorded. Such registers shall be open to inspection and examination of duly authorized representatives of the Commissioner at all times during business hours.

“SEC. 329. No person shall be registered with the Commissioner, unless such person shall be at least twenty-one (21) years of age on the date of such registration; a resident of the Philippines; of good moral character and with no conviction of any crime involving moral turpitude; has had at the time such registration is made at least two (2) years of underwriting work in the particular line of risk involved; and has passed such qualifying written examination that the Commissioner shall conduct at such time and in such place as he may decide to hold for applicants desiring to act as underwriters.

“Such examination shall not be required of any person who has served as non-life company underwriter for a period of at least five (5) years, if the Commissioner is satisfied of the applicant’s competence as shown by the results of his underwriting work in the non-life insurance company or companies that employed him in that capacity. The minimum underwriting experience herein required may be reduced or waived if it is shown to the satisfaction of the Commissioner that the non-life company underwriter has undergone extensive education and/or training in insurance.

“SEC. 330. Any applicant who misrepresents or omits any material fact in his application for registration as a non-life company underwriter, or commits any dishonest act in taking or in connection with the qualifying written examination for underwriters, shall be barred from being registered as such non-life company underwriter and, if already registered, his registration shall be cancelled and the certificate of registration issued in his favor shall be recalled immediately by the Commissioner.

“In the event that the certificate of authority of a non-life insurance company to transact business is suspended or revoked due to business failure arising largely from the imprudent and injudicious acceptance of risks by the underwriter concerned, the registration of such underwriter shall likewise be cancelled and his certificate of registration shall be recalled by the Commissioner, and no similar certificate shall thereafter be issued in his favor.

“SEC. 331. No certificate of registration issued to an underwriter shall be valid after December 31 of the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

“The Commissioner may, after due notice and hearing, also suspend or cancel such certificate for violation of existing laws, rules and regulations or of any provisions of this Code.

“TITLE 5

“ADJUSTERS

“SEC. 332. No person, partnership, association, or corporation shall act as an adjuster, as hereinafter defined, unless authorized so to act by virtue of a license issued or renewed by the Commissioner pursuant to the provisions of this Code: Provided, That in the case of a natural person, he must be a Filipino citizen and in the case of a partnership, association or corporation, at least sixty percent (60%) of its capital must be owned by citizens of the Philippines.

“SEC. 333. An adjuster may be an independent adjuster or a public adjuster.

“The term independent adjuster means any person, partnership, association or corporation which, for money, commission or any other thing of value, acts for or on behalf of an insurer in the adjusting of claims arising under insurance contracts or policies issued by such insurer.

“The term public adjuster means any person, partnership, association or corporation which, for money, commission or any other thing of value, acts on behalf of an insured in negotiating for, or effecting, the settlement of a claim or claims of the said insured arising under insurance contracts or policies, or which advertises for or solicits employment as an adjuster of such claims.

“SEC. 334. For every line of insurance claim adjustment, adjusters shall be licensed either as independent adjusters or as public adjusters. No adjuster shall act on behalf of an insurer unless said adjuster is licensed as an independent adjuster; and no adjuster shall act on behalf of an insured unless said adjuster is licensed as a public adjuster: Provided, however, That when a firm or person has been licensed as a public adjuster, he shall not be granted another license as independent adjuster and vice versa.

“No license, however, shall be required of any company adjuster who is a salaried employee of an insurance company for the adjustment of claims filed under policies issued by such insurance company.

“SEC. 335. Such license or any renewal thereof may be issued by the Commissioner upon written application filed by the person interested on the form or forms prescribed by the Commissioner, which shall contain such information as he may require, and upon payment of the corresponding fee hereinafter prescribed.

“SEC. 336. The Commissioner shall conduct, at such times, and in such places as he may decide to hold, written examinations to determine the competence and ability of applicants desiring to act as adjuster of insurance claims.

“SEC. 337. No adjuster’s license issued hereunder shall be valid after December 31 of the third year following the issuance of such license unless it is renewed.

“SEC. 338. Nothing contained in this title shall apply to any duly licensed attorney-at-law who acts or aids in adjusting insurance claims as an incident to the practice of his profession and who does not advertise himself as an adjuster.

“SEC. 339. The Commissioner may suspend or revoke any adjuster’s license if, after giving notice and hearing to the adjuster concerned, the Commissioner finds that the said adjuster:

“(a) Has violated any provision of this Code and of the circulars, rulings and instructions of the Commissioner or has violated any law in the course of his dealings as an adjuster; or

“(b) Has made a material misstatement in the application for such license; or

“© Has been guilty of fraudulent or dishonest practices; or

“(d) Has demonstrated his incompetence or untrustworthiness to act as adjuster; or

“(e) Has made patently unjust valuation of loss; or

“(f) Has failed to make a report of the adjustment he proposed within sixty (60) days from the date of the filing of the claim by the insured with the insurer, unless prevented so to do by reasons beyond his control; or

“(g) Has refused to allow an examination into his affairs or method of doing business as hereinafter provided.

“SEC. 340. Every adjuster shall submit to the Commissioner a quarterly report of all losses which are the subject of adjustment effected by him during each month in the form prescribed by the Commissioner. The report shall be filed within one (1) month after the end of each quarter.

“SEC. 341. Every adjuster shall keep his or its books, records, reports, accounts, and vouchers in such manner that the Commissioner or his duly authorized representatives may readily verify the quarterly reports of the said adjuster and ascertain whether the said adjuster has complied with the provisions of law or regulations obligatory upon him or whether the method of doing business of the said adjuster has been fair, just and honest.

“SEC. 342. The Commissioner shall, at least once a year and whenever he considers the public interest so demands, cause an examination to be made into the affairs and method of doing business of every adjuster.

“SEC. 343. Any violation of any provision of this title shall be punished by a fine of not less than Ten thousand pesos (P10,000.00), or by imprisonment at the discretion of the court: Provided, That, in case of a partnership, association or corporation, the said penalty shall be imposed upon the partner, president, manager, managing director, director or person in charge of its business or responsible for the violation.

“TITLE 6

“ACTUARIES

“SEC. 344. No life insurance company shall be licensed to do business in the Philippines nor shall any life insurance company doing business in the Philippines be allowed to continue doing such business unless they shall engage the services of an actuary duly accredited with the Commissioner who shall, during his tenure of office, be directly responsible for the direction and supervision of all actuarial work connected with or that may be involved in the business of the insurance company. The Commissioner may also require non-life insurance companies to engage the services of an accredited actuary, in accordance with the rules and regulations that the Commissioner will formulate.

“SEC. 345. Any person may be officially accredited by the Commissioner to act as an actuary in any life insurance company or in any mutual benefit association authorized to do business in the Philippines upon application therefor and the payment of the corresponding fee hereinafter prescribed: Provided, That:

“(a) He is a fellow of good standing of the Actuarial Society of the Philippines at the time of his appointment and remains in such good standing during the tenure of his engagement; or

“(b) In the case of one who is not a fellow of the Actuarial Society of the Philippines, he meets all the requirements of the said Society for accreditation as a fellow of the Society, and has been given permission by the pertinent government authorities in the Philippines to render services in the Philippines, in the event that he is not a citizen of the Philippines.

“The registration of the actuary shall be suspended or revoked by the Commissioner on the following grounds:

“(1) Failure to adequately perform required functions and duties under this Code;

“(2) Failure to disclose conflict of interest;

“(3) Failure to comply with the Code of Conduct of the Actuarial Society of the Philippines; or

“(4) Such other grounds that may be determined by the Commissioner.

“No actuary engaged by a life insurance company shall be at the same time a stockholder or a director of the board, chief executive officer or chief financial officer of the company or hold any position that the Commissioner may determine to have an inherent conflict of interest to the position of an actuary.

“No certificate of registration issued under this title shall be valid after December 31 of the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

“SEC. 346. The following documents, which are from time to time submitted to the Commissioner by a life insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines, shall be duly certified by an accredited actuary employed by such company:

“(a) Policy reserves, claims or loss reserves and net due and deferred premiums.

“(b) Statements of bases and net premiums, loading for gross premiums, and on non-forfeiture values and reserves, when applying for approval of gross premiums, reserves and non-forfeiture values.

“© Policies of insurance under any plan submitted to the Commissioner as required by law.

“(d) Annual statements and valuation reports submitted to the Commissioner as required by law.

“(e) Financial projection showing the probable income and outgo and reserve requirements, enumerating the actuarial assumptions and bases of projections.

“(f) Valuation of annuity funds or retirement plans.

“The Commissioner may also require non-life insurance companies to submit, from time to time, similar documents which shall be duly certified by an accredited actuary employed by such company.

“Any life insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines may employ any person who is not officially accredited under either of the qualifications for any kind of actuarial work: Provided, That he shall not, at any time, have the authority to certify to the correctness of the foregoing documents.

“SEC. 347. No accredited actuary shall serve more than one client or employer at the same time. However, one already in the employ of an insurance company may be allowed by the Commissioner to serve a mutual benefit association or any other insurance company, provided the following conditions are first complied with:

“(a) That the request to engage his services by the other employer is in writing;

“(b) That his present employer acquiesced to it in writing; and

“© That he furnishes the Commissioner with copies of said request and acquiescence.

“No external auditor shall be engaged by supervised persons or entities unless it has been issued an accreditation certificate by the Commissioner. The accreditation certificate shall be valid until December 31 of the third year from issuance unless it is revoked or suspended. The Commissioner shall issue rules and regulations to govern the accreditation of the external auditor and the revocation or suspension of the accreditation.

“TITLE 7

“RATING ORGANIZATION AND RATE MAKING

“SEC. 348. Every organization which now exists or which may hereafter be formed for the purpose of making rates to be used by more than one insurance company authorized to do business in the Philippines shall be known as a rating organization. The term rate as used in this title shall generally mean the ratio of the premium to the amount insured and shall include, as the context may require, either the consideration to be paid or charged for insurance contracts, including surety bonds, or the elements and factors forming the basis for the determination or application of the same, or both.

“SEC. 349. Every rating organization which now exists or which may hereafter be formed shall be subject to the provisions of this title.

“SEC. 350. No rating organization hereafter formed shall commence rate-making operations until it shall have obtained a license from the Commissioner. Before obtaining such license, such rating organization shall file with the Commissioner a notice of its intention to commence rate-making operations, a copy of its constitution, articles of agreement or association, or of incorporation, and its bylaws, a list of insurance companies that have agreed to become members or subscribers, and such other information concerning such rating organization and its operations as may be required by the Commissioner. If the Commissioner finds that the organization has complied with the provisions of law and that it has a sufficient number of members or subscribers and is otherwise qualified to function as a rating organization, the Commissioner may issue a license to such rating organization authorizing it to make rates for the kinds of insurance or subdivisions thereof as may be specified in such license. No license issued to a rating organization shall be valid after December 31 of the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed. No rating organization which now exists and is not licensed pursuant to this section shall continue rate-making operations until it shall have obtained from the Commissioner a license which he may issue if satisfied that such organization is complying with the provisions of this title. Every rating organization shall notify the Commissioner promptly of every change in:

“(a) Its constitution, its articles of agreement or association or its certificate of incorporation, and its bylaws, rules and regulations governing the conduct of its business; and

“(b) Its list of members and subscribers.

“A member means an insurer who participates in or is entitled to participate in the management of a rating organization.

“A subscriber means an insurer which is furnished at its request with rates and rating manuals by a rating organization of which it is not a member.

“SEC. 351. Each rating organization shall furnish its rating service without discrimination to all of its members and subscribers, and shall, subject to reasonable rules and regulations, permit any insurance company doing business in the Philippines, not admitted to membership, to become a subscriber to its rating services for any kind of insurance or subdivisions thereof. Notice of proposed changes in such rules and regulations shall be given to subscribers. The reasonableness of any rule or regulation in its application to subscribers, or the refusal of any rating organization to admit an insurance company as a subscriber, shall, at the request of any subscriber or any such insurance company, be reviewed by the Commissioner at a hearing held upon at least ten (10) days’ written notice to such rating organization and to such subscriber or insurance company. The Commissioner may, after such hearing, issue an appropriate order.

“SEC. 352. No rating organization or any other association shall refuse to do business with, or prohibit or prevent the payment of commissions to, any person licensed as an insurance broker pursuant to the provisions of Title 1 of this chapter.

“SEC. 353. Rating organizations shall be subject to examination by the Commissioner, as often as he may deem such examination expedient, pursuant to the provisions of this Code applicable to the examination of insurance companies. He shall cause such an examination of each rating organization to be made at least once in every five (5) years.

“SEC. 354. The Commissioner may suspend or revoke the license of any rating organization which fails to comply with his order within the time limited by such order, or any extension thereof which he may grant. The Commissioner may determine when a suspension of license shall become effective and it shall remain in effect for the period fixed by him, unless he modifies or rescinds such suspension.

“SEC. 355. Any rating organization may subscribe for or purchase actuarial, technical or other services, and such services shall be available to all members and subscribers without discrimination.

“SEC. 356. Any rating organization may provide for the examination of policies, daily reports, binders, renewal certificates, endorsements or other instruments of insurance, or the cancellation thereof, and may make reasonable rules governing their submission. Such rules shall contain a provision that in the event an insurance company does not within sixty (60) days furnish satisfactory evidence to the rating organization of the correction of any error or omission previously called to its attention by the rating organization, it shall be the duty of the rating organization to notify the Commissioner thereof. All information so submitted for examination shall be confidential.

“SEC. 357. Cooperation among rating organizations or among rating organizations and insurers in rate making or in other matters within the scope of this title is hereby authorized, provided the filings resulting from such cooperation are subject to all provisions of this title which are applicable to filings generally. The Commissioner may review such cooperative activities and practices and if he finds that any such activity or practice is unfair or unreasonable or otherwise inconsistent with the provisions of this title, he may issue a written order specifying in what respects such activity or practice is unfair or unreasonable or otherwise inconsistent with the provisions of this title, and requiring the discontinuance of such activity or practice.

“SEC. 358. Every rating organization and every insurance company which makes and files its own rates, shall make rates for all risks rated by such organization or insurance company in accordance with the following provisions:

“(a) Basic classification, manual, minimum, class, or schedule rates or rating plans, shall be made and adopted for all such risks. Any departure from such rates shall be in accordance with schedules, rating plans and rules filed with the Commissioner;

“(b) Rates shall be reasonable and adequate for the class of risks to which they apply;

“© No rate shall discriminate unfairly between risks involving essentially the same hazards and expense elements or between risks in the application of like charges and credits;

“(d) Consideration shall be given to the past and prospective loss experience, including the conflagration and catastrophe hazards, if any, to all factors reasonably attributable to the class of risks, to a reasonable profit, to commissions paid during the most recent annual period and to past and prospective other expenses. In case of fire insurance rates, consideration shall be given to the experience of the fire insurance business during a period of not less than five (5) years next preceding the year in which the review is made;

“(e) Risk may be grouped by classifications for the establishment of rates and minimum premiums. Classification rates may be modified to produce rates for individual risks in accordance with rating plans which establish standards for measuring variations in hazards or expense provisions, or both. Such standards may measure any difference among risks that can be demonstrated to have a probable effect upon losses or expenses.

“SEC. 359. No rating organization and no insurance company which makes and files its own rates shall make or promulgate any rate or schedule of rates which is to be applied to any fire risk on the condition that the whole amount of insurance on any risk or any specified part thereof shall be placed with the members of or subscribers to such rating organization or with such insurer.

“SEC. 360. Every insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall annually file with the rating organization of which it is a member or subscriber, or with such other agency as the Commissioner may designate, a statistical report showing a classification schedule of its premiums and losses on all kinds or types of insurance business to which Section 358 is applicable, and such other information as the Commissioner may deem necessary or expedient for the administration of the provisions of this title.

“SEC. 361. Every non-life rating organization and every non-life insurance company doing business in the Philippines shall file with the Commissioner, except as to risks which by general custom of the business are not written according to manual rates or rating plans, every rate manual, schedule of rates, classification of risks, rating plan, and every other rating rule and every modification of any of the foregoing which it proposes to use. An insurance company may satisfy its obligation to make such filings for any kind or type of insurance by becoming a member of or subscriber to a rating organization which makes such filings for such kind or type of insurance, and by authorizing the Commissioner to accept such filings of the rating organization on behalf of such insurance company.

“SEC. 362. Every manual or schedule of rates and every rating plan filed as provided in the preceding section shall state or clearly indicate the character and extent of the coverage to which any such rate or any modification thereof will be applied.

“SEC. 363. The Commissioner shall review filings as soon as reasonably possible after they have been made in order to determine whether they meet the requirements of this title. When a filing is not accompanied by the information upon which the insurance company supports such filing, and the Commissioner does not have sufficient information to determine whether such filing meets the requirements of this title, he shall require such insurance company to furnish the information upon which it supports such filing. The information furnished in support of a filing may include:

“(a) The experience or judgment of the insurance company or rating organization making the filing;

“(b) Its interpretation of any statistical data it relies upon;

“© The experience of other insurance companies or rating organization; or

“(d) Any other relevant factors.

“SEC. 364. If the Commissioner finds that any rate filings theretofore filed with him do not comply with the provisions of this title or that they provide rates or rules which are inadequate, excessive, unfairly discriminatory or otherwise unreasonable, he may order the same withdrawn and at the expiration of sixty (60) days thereafter the same shall be deemed no longer on file. Before making any such finding and order, the Commissioner shall give notice, not less than ten (10) days in advance, and a hearing, to the rating organization, or to the insurer, which filed the same. Such order shall not affect any contract or policy made or issued prior to the expiration of such sixty (60)-day period.

“SEC. 365. No member or subscriber of a rating organization, and no insurance company doing business in the Philippines, or agent, employee or other representative of such company, and no insurance broker shall charge or demand a rate or receive a premium which deviates from the rates, rating plans, classifications, schedules, rules and standards, made and last filed by a rating organization or by or on behalf of the insurance company, or shall issue or make any policy or contract involving a violation of such rate filings.

“SEC. 366. Notwithstanding any other provisions of this title, upon the written application of the insurer, stating his reasons therefor, filed with and approved by the Commissioner, a rate in excess of that provided by a filing otherwise applicable may be used on any specific risk.

“SEC. 367. Whenever the Commissioner shall determine, after notice and a hearing, that the rates charged or filed on any class of risks are excessive, discriminatory, inadequate or unreasonable, he shall order that such rates be appropriately adjusted. For the purpose of applying the provisions of this section, the Commissioner may from time to time approve reasonable classifications of risks for any or all such classes, having due regard to the past and prospective loss experience, including conflagration or catastrophe hazards, if any, to all other relevant factors and to a reasonable profit.

“SEC. 368. Nothing contained in this title shall be construed as requiring any insurer to become a member of or subscriber to any rating organization.

“SEC. 369. Agreements may be made among insurance companies with respect to the equitable apportionment among them of insurance which may be afforded applicants who are in good faith entitled to but are unable to procure such insurance through ordinary methods and such insurance companies may agree among themselves on the use of reasonable rates and modifications for such insurance, such agreements and rate modifications to be subject to the approval of the Commissioner: Provided, however, That the provisions of this section shall not be deemed to apply to workmen’s compensation insurance.

“SEC. 370. No insurance company doing business in the Philippines or any agent thereof, no insurance broker, and no employee or other representative of any such insurance company, agent, or broker, shall make, procure or negotiate any contract of insurance or agreement as to policy contract, other than is plainly expressed in the policy or other written contract issued or to be issued as evidence thereof, or shall directly or indirectly, by giving or sharing a commission or in any manner whatsoever, pay or allow or offer to pay or allow to the insured or to any employee of such insured, either as an inducement to the making of such insurance or after such insurance has been effected, any rebate from the premium which is specified in the policy, or any special favor or advantage in the dividends or other benefits to accrue thereon, or shall give or offer to give any valuable consideration or inducement of any kind, directly or indirectly, which is not specified in such policy or contract of insurance; nor shall any such company, or any agent thereof, as to any policy or contract of insurance issued, make any discrimination against any Filipino in the sense that he is given less advantageous rates, dividends or other policy conditions or privileges than are accorded to other nationals because of his race.

“SEC. 371. No insurance company doing business in the Philippines, and no officer, director, or agent thereof, and no insurance broker or any other person, partnership or corporation shall issue or circulate or cause or permit to be issued or circulated any literature, illustration, circular or statement of any sort misrepresenting the terms of any policy issued by any insurance company of the benefits or advantages promised thereby, or any misleading estimate of the dividends or share of surplus to be received thereon, or shall use any name or title of any policy or class of policies misrepresenting the true nature thereof; nor shall any such company or agent thereof, or any other person, partnership or corporation make any misleading representation or incomplete comparison of policies to any person insured in such company for the purpose of inducing or tending to induce such person to lapse, forfeit, or surrender his said insurance.

“SEC. 372. If the Commissioner, after notice and hearing, finds that any insurance company, rating organization, agent, broker or other person has violated any of the provisions of this title, it shall order the payment of a fine not to exceed Twenty-five thousand pesos (P25,000.00) for each such offense, and shall immediately suspend or revoke the license issued to such insurance company, rating organization, agent, or broker. The issuance, procurement or negotiation of a single policy or contract of insurance shall be deemed a separate offense.

“TITLE 8

“PROVISION COMMON TO AGENTS,
BROKERS AND ADJUSTERS

“SEC. 373. A license issued to a partnership, association or corporation to act as an insurance agent, general agent, insurance broker, reinsurance broker, or adjuster shall authorize only the individual named in the license who shall qualify therefor as though an individual licensee. The Commissioner shall charge, and the licensee shall pay, a full additional license fee as to each respective individual so named in such license in excess of one.

“Licenses and certificates of registration issued under the provisions of this chapter may be renewed by the filing of notices of intention on forms to be prescribed by the Commissioner and payment of the fees therefor.

“SEC. 374. The Commissioner, in consultation with the duly accredited associations representing the insurance industry, shall adopt and promulgate a code of conduct to promote integrity, honesty and ethical business practices among insurance agents, distributors and other intermediaries.

“TITLE 9

“BANCASSURANCE

“SEC. 375. The term bancassurance shall mean the presentation and sale to bank customers by an insurance company of its insurance products within the premises of the head office of such bank duly licensed by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas or any of its branches under such rules and regulations which the Commissioner and the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas may promulgate. To engage in bancassurance arrangement, a bank is not required to have equity ownership of the insurance company. No insurance company shall enter into a bancassurance arrangement unless it possesses all the requirements as may be prescribed by the Commissioner and the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas.

“No insurance product under this section, whether life or non-life, shall be issued or delivered unless in the form previously approved by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 376. Personnel tasked to present and sell insurance products within the bank premises shall be duly licensed by the Commissioner and shall be subject to the rules and regulations of this Act.

“SEC. 377. The Commissioner and the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas shall promulgate rules and regulations to effectively supervise the business of bancassurance.

“CHAPTER V

“SECURITY FUND

“SEC. 378. There is hereby created a fund to be known as the Security Fund which shall be used in the payment of allowed claims against an insurance company authorized to transact business in the Philippines remaining unpaid by reason of the insolvency of such company. The said Fund may also be used to reinsure the policy of the insolvent insurer in any solvent insurer authorized to do business in the Philippines as provided in Section 256. The Fund may likewise be used to pay insured claims which otherwise would not be compensable under the provisions of the policy. No payment from the Security Fund shall, however, be made to any person who owns or controls ten percent (10%) or more of the voting shares of stock of the insolvent insurer and no payment on any one claim shall exceed Twenty thousand pesos (P20,000.00).

“SEC. 379. Such Fund shall consist of all payments made to the Fund by insurance companies authorized to do business in the Philippines. Payments made by life insurance companies shall be treated separately from those made by non-life insurance companies and the corresponding fund shall be called Life Account and Non-Life Account, respectively, and shall be held and administered as such by the Commissioner in accordance with the provisions of this title. The Life Account shall be utilized exclusively for disbursements that refer to life insurance companies, while the Non-Life Account shall be utilized exclusively for disbursements that refer to non-life insurance companies.

“SEC. 380. All insurance companies doing business in the Philippines shall contribute to the Security Fund, Life or Non-Life Account, as the case may be, the aggregate amount of Five million pesos (P5,000,000.00) for each Account. The contributions of the life insurance companies and of the non-life insurance companies shall be in direct proportion to the ratio between a particular life insurance company or a particular non-life insurance company’s net worth and the aggregate net worth of all life insurance companies or all non-life insurance companies, as the case may be, as shown in their latest financial statements approved by the Commissioner. This proportion applied to the Five million pesos (P5,000,000.00) shall be the contribution of a particular company to the corresponding Account of the Security Fund.

“The amount of Five million pesos (P5,000,000.00) in each Account shall be in the form of a revolving trust fund. The respective contributions of the companies shall remain as admitted assets in their books and any disbursement therefrom shall be deducted proportionately from the contributions of each company which will be allowed as deductions for income tax purposes. Any earnings of the Fund shall be turned over to the contributing companies in proportion to their contributions.

“In the case of disbursements of funds from the Fund as provided in the foregoing paragraph, the life and non-life companies, as the case may be, shall replenish the amount disbursed in direct proportion to the individual company’s net worth and the aggregate net worth of the life or non-life companies, as the case may be. However, in no case shall the Fund exceed the aggregate amount of Ten million pesos (P10,000,000.00), or Five million pesos (P5,000,000.00) for each Account.

“Should the Fund, Life or Non-Life Account, as the case may be, be inadequate for a disbursement as provided for, then the Life or Non-Life companies, as the case may be, shall contribute to the Fund their respective shares in the proportion previously mentioned.

“SEC. 381. The Commissioner may adopt, amend, and enforce all reasonable rules and regulations necessary for the proper administration of the Fund and of the Accounts. In the event any insurer shall fail to make any payment required by this title, or that any payment made is incorrect, he shall have full authority to examine all the books and records of the insurer for the purpose of ascertaining the facts and shall determine the correct amount to be paid and may proceed in any court of competent jurisdiction to recover for the benefit of the Fund or of the Account concerned any sum shown to be due upon such examination and determination. Any insurer which fails to make any payment to the Fund or to the Account concerned when due, shall thereby forfeit to said Fund or Account concerned a penalty of five percent (5%) of the amount determined to be due as provided by this title, plus one percent (1%) of such amount for each month of delay or fraction thereof, after the expiration of the first month of such delay, but the Commissioner, if satisfied that the delay was excusable, may remit all or any part of such penalty. The Commissioner, in his discretion, may suspend or revoke the certificate of authority to do business in the Philippines of any insurance company which shall fail to comply with this title or to pay any penalty imposed in accordance therewith.

“SEC. 382. The Accounts created by this title shall be separate and apart from each other and from any other fund. The Treasurer of the Philippines shall be the custodian of the Life Account and Non-Life Account of the Security Fund; and all disbursements from any Account shall be made by the Treasurer of the Philippines upon vouchers signed by the Commissioner or his deputy, as hereinafter provided. The moneys of said Account may be invested by the Commissioner only in bonds or other instruments of debt of the Government of the Philippines or its political subdivisions or instrumentalities. The Commissioner may sell any of the securities in which an Account is invested, if advisable, for its proper administration or in the best interest of such Account.

“SEC. 383. Payments from either the Life Insurance Account or Non-Life Account, as the case may be, shall be made by the Treasurer of the Philippines to the Commissioner, upon the authority of appropriate certificate filed with him by the Commissioner acting in such capacity.

“SEC. 384. The Commissioner may, in his discretion, designate or appoint a duly authorized representative or representatives to appear and defend before any court or other body or official having jurisdiction any or all actions or proceedings against principals or assureds on insurance policies or contracts issued to them where the insurer has become insolvent or unable to meet its insurance obligations. The Commissioner shall have, as of the date of insolvency of such insurer or as of the date of its inability to meet its insurance obligations, only the rights which such insurer would have had if it had not become insolvent or unable to meet its insurance obligations. For the purpose of this title, the Commissioner shall have power to employ such counsel, clerks and assistants as he may deem necessary.

“SEC. 385. The expense of administering an Account shall be paid out of the Account concerned. The Commissioner shall serve as administrator of the Fund and of the Accounts without additional compensation, but may be allowed and paid from the Account concerned expenses incurred in the performance of his duties in connection with said Account. The compensation of those persons employed by the Commissioner shall be deemed administration expense payable from the Account concerned. The Commissioner shall include in his annual report to the Secretary of Finance a statement of the expenses of administration of the Fund and of the Life Account and Non-Life Account for the preceding year.

“CHAPTER VI

“COMPULSORY MOTOR VEHICLE
LIABILITY INSURANCE

“SEC. 386. For purposes of this chapter:

“(a) Motor Vehicle is any vehicle as defined in Section 3, paragraph (a) of Republic Act No. 4136, otherwise known as the ‘Land Transportation and Traffic Code’.

“(b) Passenger is any fare paying person being transported and conveyed in and by a motor vehicle for transportation of passengers for compensation, including persons expressly authorized by law or by the vehicle’s operator or his agents to ride without fare.

“© Third party is any person other than a passenger as defined in this section and shall also exclude a member of the household, or a member of the family within the second degree of consanguinity or affinity, of a motor vehicle owner or land transportation operator, as likewise defined herein, or his employee in respect of death, bodily injury, or damage to property arising out of and in the course of employment.

“(d) Owner or motor vehicle owner means the actual legal owner of a motor vehicle, in whose name such vehicle is duly registered with the Land Transportation Office;

“(e) Land transportation operator means the owner or owners of motor vehicles for transportation of passengers for compensation, including school buses.

“(f) Insurance policy or Policy refers to a contract of insurance against passenger and third-party liability for death or bodily injuries and damage to property arising from motor vehicle accidents.

“SEC. 387. It shall be unlawful for any land transportation operator or owner of a motor vehicle to operate the same in the public highways unless there is in force in relation thereto a policy of insurance or guaranty in cash or surety bond issued in accordance with the provisions of this chapter to indemnify the death, bodily injury, and/or damage to property of a third-party or passenger, as the case may be, arising from the use thereof.

“SEC. 388. The Commissioner shall furnish the Land Transportation Office with a list of insurance companies authorized to issue the policy of insurance or surety bond required by this chapter.

“SEC. 389. The Land Transportation Office shall not allow the registration or renewal of registration of any motor vehicle without first requiring from the land transportation operator or motor vehicle owner concerned the presentation and filing of a substantiating documentation in a form approved by the Commissioner evidencing that the policy of insurance or guaranty in cash or surety bond required by this chapter is in effect.

“SEC. 390. Every land transportation operator and every owner of a motor vehicle shall, before applying for the registration or renewal of registration of any motor vehicle, at his option, either secure an insurance policy or surety bond issued by any insurance company authorized by the Commissioner or make a cash deposit in such amount as herein required as limit of liability for purposes specified in Section 387.

“(a) In the case of a land transportation operator, the insurance guaranty in cash or surety bond shall cover liability for death or bodily injuries of third-parties and/or passengers arising out of the use of such vehicle in the amount not less than Twelve thousand pesos (P12,000.00) per passenger or third-party and an amount, for each of such categories, in any one accident of not less than that set forth in the following scale:

“(1) Motor vehicles with an authorized capacity of twenty-six (26) or more passengers: Fifty thousand pesos (P50,000.00);

“(2) Motor vehicles with an authorized capacity of from twelve (12) to twenty-five (25) passengers: Forty thousand pesos (P40,000.00);

“(3) Motor vehicles with an authorized capacity of from six (6) to eleven (11) passengers: Thirty thousand pesos (P30,000.00);

“(4) Motor vehicles with an authorized capacity of five (5) or less passengers: Five thousand pesos (P5,000.00) multiplied by the authorized capacity.

“Provided, however, That such cash deposit made to, or surety bond posted with, the Commissioner shall be resorted to by him in cases of accidents the indemnities for which to third-parties and/or passengers are not settled accordingly by the land transportation operator and, in that event, the said cash deposit shall be replenished or such surety bond shall be restored within sixty (60) days after impairment or expiry, as the case may be, by such land transportation operator, otherwise, he shall secure the insurance policy required by this chapter. The aforesaid cash deposit may be invested by the Commissioner in readily marketable government bonds, and/or securities.

“(b) In the case of an owner of a motor vehicle, the insurance or guaranty in cash or surety bond shall cover liability for death or injury to third-parties in an amount not less than that set forth in the following scale in any one accident:

“(1) Private Cars

“(i) Bantam: Twenty thousand pesos (P20,000.00);

“(ii) Light: Twenty thousand pesos (P20,000.00); and

“(iii) Heavy: Thirty thousand pesos (P30,000.00).

“(2) Other Private Vehicles

“(i) Tricycles, motorcycles and scooters: Twelve thousand pesos (P12,000.00);

“(ii) Vehicles with an unladen weight of 2,600 kilos or less: Twenty thousand pesos (P20,000.00);

“(iii) Vehicles with an unladen weight of between 2,601 kilos and 3,930 kilos: Thirty thousand pesos (P30,000.00); and

“(iv) Vehicles with an unladen weight over 3,930 kilos: Fifty thousand pesos (P50,000.00).

“The Commissioner may, if warranted, set forth schedule of indemnities for the payment of claims for death or bodily injuries with the coverages set forth herein.

“SEC. 391. Any claim for death or injury to any passenger or third-party pursuant to the provisions of this chapter shall be paid without the necessity of proving fault or negligence of any kind: Provided, That for purposes of this section:

“(a) The total indemnity in respect of any person shall not be less than Fifteen thousand pesos (P15,000.00);

“(b) The following proofs of loss, when submitted under oath, shall be sufficient evidence to substantiate the claim:

“(1) Police report of accident; and

“(2) Death certificate and evidence sufficient to establish the proper payee; or

“(3) Medical report and evidence of medical or hospital disbursement in respect of which refund is claimed;

“© Claim may be made against one motor vehicle only. In the case of an occupant of a vehicle, claim, shall lie against the insurer of the vehicle in which the occupant is riding, mounting or dismounting from. In any other case, claim shall lie against the insurer of the directly offending vehicle. In all cases, the right of the party paying the claim to recover against the owner of the vehicle responsible for the accident shall be maintained.

“SEC. 392. No land transportation operator or owner of motor vehicle shall be unreasonably denied the policy of insurance or surety bond required by this chapter by the insurance companies authorized to issue the same, otherwise, the Land Transportation Office shall require from said land transportation operator or owner of the vehicle, in lieu of a policy of insurance or surety bond, a certificate that a cash deposit has been made with the Commissioner in such amount required as limits of indemnity in Section 390 to answer for the passenger and/or third-party liability of such land transportation operator or owner of the vehicle.

“No insurance company may issue the policy of insurance or surety bond required under this chapter unless so authorized under existing laws.

“The authority to engage in the casualty and/or surety lines of business of an insurance company that refuses to issue or renew, without just cause, the insurance policy or surety bond therein required shall be withdrawn immediately.

“SEC. 393. No cancellation of the policy shall be valid unless written notice thereof is given to the land transportation operator or owner of the vehicle and to the Land Transportation Office at least fifteen (15) days prior to the intended effective date thereof. Upon receipt of such notice, the Land Transportation Office, unless it receives evidence of a new valid insurance or guaranty in cash or surety bond as prescribed in this chapter, or an endorsement of revival of the cancelled one, shall order the immediate confiscation of the plates of the motor vehicle covered by such cancelled policy. The same may be reissued only upon presentation of a new insurance policy or that a guaranty in cash or surety bond has been made or posted with the Commissioner and which meets the requirements of this chapter, or an endorsement or revival of the cancelled one.

“SEC. 394. If the cancellation of the policy or surety bond is contemplated by the land transportation operator or owner of the vehicle, he shall, before the policy or surety bond ceases to be effective, secure a similar policy of insurance or surety bond to replace the policy or surety bond to be cancelled or make a cash deposit in sufficient amount with the Commissioner, and without any gap, file the required documentation with the Land Transportation Office, and notify the insurance company concerned of the cancellation of its policy or surety bond.

“SEC. 395. In case of change of owner ship of a motor vehicle, or change of the engine of an insured vehicle, there shall be no need of issuing a new policy until the next date of registration or renewal of registration of such vehicle, and: Provided, That the insurance company shall agree to continue the policy, such change of ownership or such change of the engine shall be indicated in a corresponding endorsement by the insurance company concerned, and a signed duplicate of such endorsement shall, within a reasonable time, be filed with the Land Transportation Office.

“SEC. 396. In the settlement and payment of claims, the indemnity shall not be availed of by any accident victim or claimant as an instrument of enrichment by reason of an accident, but as an assistance or restitution insofar as can fairly be ascertained.

“SEC. 397. Any person having any claim upon the policy issued pursuant to this chapter shall, without any unnecessary delay, present to the insurance company concerned a written notice of claim setting forth the nature, extent and duration of the injuries sustained as certified by a duly licensed physician. Notice of claim must be filed within six (6) months from the date of accident, otherwise, the claim shall be deemed waived. Action or suit for recovery of damage due to loss or injury must be brought, in proper cases, with the Commissioner or the courts within one (1) year from denial of the claim, otherwise, the claimant’s right of action shall prescribe.

“SEC. 398. The insurance company concerned shall forthwith ascertain the truth and extent of the claim and make payment within five (5) working days after reaching an agreement. If no agreement is reached, the insurance company shall pay only the no-fault indemnity provided in Section 391 without prejudice to the claimant from pursuing his claim further, in which case, he shall not be required or compelled by the insurance company to execute any quit claim or document releasing it from liability under the policy of insurance or surety bond issued.

“In case of any dispute in the enforcement of the provisions of any policy issued pursuant to this chapter, the adjudication of such dispute shall be within the original and exclusive jurisdiction of the Commissioner, subject to the limitations provided in Section 439.

“SEC. 399. It shall be unlawful for a land transportation operator or owner of motor vehicle to require his or its drivers or other employees to contribute in the payment of premiums.

“SEC. 400. No government office or agency having the duty of implementing the provisions of this chapter nor any official or employee thereof shall act as agent in procuring the insurance policy or surety bond provided for herein. The commission of an agent procuring the said policy or bond shall in no case exceed ten percent (10%) of the amount of the premiums therefor.

“SEC. 401. Any land transportation operator or owner of motor vehicle or any other person violating any of the provisions of the preceding sections shall be punished by a fine of not less than Five hundred pesos (P500.00) and/or imprisonment for not more than six (6) months. The violation of Section 390 by a land transportation operator shall be a sufficient cause for the revocation of the certificate of public convenience issued by the Land Transportation Franchising and Regulatory Board covering the vehicle concerned.

“SEC. 402. Whenever any violation of the provisions of this chapter is committed by a corporation or association, or by a government office or entity, the executive officer or officers of said corporation, association or government office or entity who shall have knowingly permitted, or failed to prevent, said violation shall be held liable as principals.

“CHAPTER VII

“MUTUAL BENEFIT ASSOCIATIONS AND
TRUSTS FOR CHARITABLE USES

“TITLE l

“MUTUAL BENEFIT ASSOCIATIONS

“SEC. 403. Any society, association or corporation, without capital stock, formed or organized not for profit but mainly for the purpose of paying sick benefits to members, or of furnishing financial support to members while out of employment, or of paying to relatives of deceased members of fixed or any sum of money, irrespective of whether such aim or purpose is carried out by means of fixed dues or assessments collected regularly from the members, or of providing, by the issuance of certificates of insurance, payment of its members of accident or life insurance benefits out of such fixed and regular dues or assessments, but in no case shall include any society, association, or corporation with such mutual benefit features and which shall be carried out purely from voluntary contributions collected not regularly and/or no fixed amount from whomsoever may contribute, shall be known as a mutual benefit association within the intent of this Code.

“Any society, association, or corporation principally organized as a labor union shall be governed by the Labor Code notwithstanding any mutual benefit feature provisions in its charter as incident to its organization.

“In no case shall a mutual benefit association be organized and authorized to transact business as a charitable or benevolent organization, and whenever it has this feature as incident to its existence, the corresponding charter provision shall be revised to conform with the provision of this section. Mutual benefit association, already licensed to transact business as such on the date this Code becomes effective, having charitable or benevolent feature shall abandon such incidental purpose upon effectivity of this Code if they desire to continue operating as such mutual benefit associations.

“SEC. 404. A mutual benefit association, before it may transact as such, must first secure a license from the Commissioner. The application for such license shall be filed with the Commissioner together with certified true copies of the articles of incorporation or the constitution and bylaws of the association, and all amendments thereto, and such other documents or testimonies as the Commissioner may require.

“No license shall be granted to a mutual benefit association until the Commissioner shall have been satisfied by such examination as he may make and such evidence as he may require that the association is qualified under existing laws to operate and transact business as such. The Commissioner may refuse to issue a license to any mutual benefit association if, in his judgment, such refusal will best promote the interest of the members of such association and of the people of this country. Any license issued shall expire on the last day of December of the third year following its issuance and, upon proper application, may be renewed if the association is continuing to comply with existing laws, rules and regulations, orders, instructions, rulings and decisions of the Commissioner. Every association receiving any such license shall be subject to the supervision of the Commissioner: Provided, That no such license shall be granted to any such association if such association has no actuary.

“SEC. 405. No mutual benefit association shall be issued a license to operate as such unless it has constituted and established a Guaranty Fund by depositing with the Commissioner an initial minimum amount of Five million pesos (P5,000,000.00) in cash, or in government securities with a total value equal to such amount, to answer for any valid benefit claim of any of its members.

“All moneys received by the Commissioner for this purpose must be deposited by him in interest-bearing deposits with any bank or banks authorized to transact business in the Philippines for the account of the particular association constituting the Guaranty Fund.

“Any accrual to such fund, be it interest earned or dividend additions on moneys or securities so deposited, may, with the prior approval of the Commissioner, be withdrawn by the association if there is no pending benefit claim against it, including interest thereon or dividend additions thereto.

“The Commissioner, prior to or after licensing a mutual benefit association, may require such association to increase its Guaranty Fund from the initial minimum amount required to an amount equal to the capital investment required of an existing domestic insurance company under Section 209 of this Code.

“SEC. 406. Every mutual benefit association licensed to do business as such shall issue membership certificates to its members specifying the benefits to which such members are entitled.

“Such certificates, together with the articles of incorporation of the association or its constitution and bylaws, and all existing laws as may be pertinent shall constitute the agreement, as of the date of its issuance, between the association and the member. The membership certificate shall be in a form previously approved by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 407. A mutual benefit association may, by reinsurance agreement, cede in whole or in part any individual risk or risks under certificates of insurance issued by it, only to a life insurance company authorized to transact business or to a professional reinsurer authorized to accept life risks in the Philippines: Provided, That a copy of the draft of such reinsurance agreement shall be submitted to the Commissioner for his approval. The association may take credit for the reserves on such ceded risks to the extent reinsured.

“SEC. 408. The constitution or bylaws of a mutual benefit association must distinctly state the purpose for which dues and/or assessments are made and collected and the portion thereof which may be used for expenses.

“Death benefit and other relief funds shall be created and used exclusively for paying benefits due the members under their respective membership certificates. A general fund shall likewise be created and used for expenses of administration of the association.

“A mutual benefit association shall only maintain free and unassigned surplus of not more than twenty percent (20%) of its total liabilities as verified by the Commissioner. Any amount in excess shall be returned to the members by way of dividends, enhancing the equity value or providing benefits in kind and other relevant services. In addition, subject to the approval of the Commissioner, a mutual benefit association may allocate a portion for capacity building and research and development such as developing new products and services, upgrading and improving operating systems and equipment and continuing member education.

“SEC. 409. Every outstanding membership certificate must have an equity value equivalent to at least fifty percent (50%) of the total contributions collected thereon. The equity value only applies to basic life insurance product and excludes optional products.

“SEC. 410. Every mutual benefit association must accumulate and maintain, out of the periodic dues collected from its members, sufficient reserves for the payment of claims or obligations for which it shall hold funds in securities satisfactory to the Commissioner consisting of bonds of the Government of the Philippines, or any of its political subdivisions and instrumentalities, or in such other good securities as may be approved by the Commissioner.

“The reserve liability shall be established in accordance with actuarial procedures and shall be approved by the Commissioner.

“The articles of incorporation or the constitution and bylaws of a mutual benefit association must provide that if its reserve as to all or any class of certificates becomes impaired, its board of directors or trustees may require that there shall be paid by the members to the association the amount of the members’ equitable proportion of such deficiency as ascertained by said board and that if the payment be not made it shall stand as an indebtedness against the membership certificates of the defaulting members and draw interest not to exceed five percent (5%) per annum compounded annually.

“SEC. 411. A mutual benefit association may invest such portion of its funds as shall not be required to meet pending claims and other obligations in any of the classes of investments or types of securities in which life insurance companies doing business in the Philippines may invest.

“It may also grant loans to members on the security of a pledge or chattel mortgage of personal properties of the borrowers, or in the absence thereof, on the security of the membership certificate of the borrowing members, in which event such loan shall become a first lien on the proceeds thereof.

“SEC. 412. The Commissioner or any of his duly designated representatives, shall have the power of visitation, audit and examination into the affairs, financial condition, and methods of doing business of all mutual benefit associations, and he shall cause such examination to be made at least once every two (2) years or whenever it may be deemed proper and necessary. Free access to the books, records and documents of the association shall be accorded to the Commissioner, or to his representatives, in such manner that the Commissioner or his representatives may readily verify or determine the true affairs, financial condition, and method of doing business of such association. In the course of such examination, the Commissioner or his duly designated representatives shall have authority to administer oaths and take testimony or other evidence on any matter relating to the affairs of the association.

“All minutes of the proceedings of the board of directors or trustees of the association, and those of the regular or special meetings of the members, shall be taken, and a copy thereof, in English or in Pilipino, shall be submitted to the Commissioner’s representatives or examiners in the course of such examination.

“A copy of the findings of such examination, together with the recommendations of the Commissioner, shall be furnished the association for its information and compliance, and the same shall be taken up immediately in the meetings of the board of directors or trustees and of the members of the association.

“SEC. 413. Every mutual benefit association shall, annually on or before the thirtieth day of April of each year, render to the Commissioner an annual statement in such form and detail as may be prescribed by the Commissioner, signed and sworn to by the president, secretary, treasurer, and actuary of the association, showing the exact condition of its affairs on the preceding thirty-first day of December.

“SEC. 414. No money, aid or benefit to be paid, provided or tendered by any mutual benefit association, shall be liable to attachment, garnishment, or other process, or be seized, taken, appropriated, or applied by any legal or equitable process to pay any debt or liability of a member or beneficiary, or any other person who may have a right thereunder, either before or after payment.

“SEC. 415. Any member of a mutual benefit association shall have the right at all times to change the beneficiary or beneficiaries or add another beneficiary or other beneficiaries in accordance with the rules and regulations of the association unless he has expressly waived this right in the membership certificate. Every association may, under such rules as it may adopt, limit the scope of beneficiaries and provide that no beneficiary shall have or obtain any vested interest in the proceeds of any certificate until the certificate has become due and payable under the terms of the membership certificate.

“SEC. 416. Any chapter affiliate independently licensed as a mutual benefit association may consolidate or merge with any other similar chapter affiliate or with the mother association.

“SEC. 417. Any mutual benefit association may be converted into and licensed as a mutual life insurance company by complying with the requirements of the pertinent provisions of this Code and submitting the specific plan for such conversion to the Commissioner for his approval. Such plan, as approved, shall then be submitted to the members either in the regular meeting or in a special meeting called for the purpose for their adoption. The affirmative vote of at least two-thirds (2/3) of all the members shall be necessary in order to consider such plan as adopted.

“No such conversion shall take effect unless and until approved by the Commissioner.

“SEC. 418. No mutual benefit association shall be dissolved without first notifying the Commissioner and furnishing him with a certified copy of the resolution authorizing the dissolution, duly adopted by the affirmative vote of two-thirds (2/3) of the members at a meeting called for that purpose, the financial statements as of the date of the resolution, and such other papers or documents as may be required by the Commissioner.

“No dissolution shall proceed until and unless approved by the Commissioner and all proceedings in connection therewith shall be witnessed and attested by his duly designated representative.

“No mutual benefit association shall be officially declared as dissolved until after the Commissioner so certifies that all outstanding claims against the association have been duly settled and liquidated.

“SEC. 419. The Commissioner shall, after notice and hearing, have the power either to suspend or revoke the license issued to a mutual benefit association if he finds that the association has:

“(a) Failed to comply with any provision of this Code;

“(b) Failed to comply with any other law or regulation obligatory upon it;

“© Failed to comply with any order, ruling, instruction, requirement or recommendation of the Commissioner;

“(d) Exceeded its power to the prejudice of its members;

“(e) Conducted its business fraudulently or hazardously;

“(f) Rendered its affairs and condition to one of insolvency; or

“(g) Failed to carry out its aims and purposes for which it was organized due to any cause.

“After receipt of the order from the Commissioner suspending or revoking the license, the association must immediately exert efforts to remove such cause or causes which brought about the order and, upon proper showing, may apply with the Commissioner for the lifting of the order and restoration or revival of the license so revoked or suspended.

“SEC. 420. For failure to remove such cause or causes which brought about the suspension or revocation of the license of a mutual benefit association, the Commissioner shall apply under this Code for an order from the proper court to liquidate such association.

“The provisions of Titles 14 and 15, Chapter III, pertaining to the appointment of a conservator and proceedings upon insolvency of an insurance company shall, insofar as practicable, apply to mutual benefit associations.

“SEC. 421. To secure the enforcement of any provision under this title, the Commissioner may issue such rules, rulings, instructions, orders and circulars.

“SEC. 422. The violation of any provision of this title shall subject the person violating or the officer of the association responsible therefor to a fine of not less than Ten thousand pesos (P10,000.00), or imprisonment of not exceeding three (3) years, or both such fine and imprisonment, at the discretion of the court.

“SEC. 423. All provisions of this Code governing life insurance companies and such other provisions whenever practicable and necessary, shall be applicable to mutual benefit associations.

“TITLE 2

“TRUSTS FOR CHARITABLE USES

“SEC. 424. The term trust for charitable uses, within the intent of this Code, shall include, all the real or personal properties or funds, as well as those acquired with the fruits or income therefrom or in exchange or substitution thereof, given to or received by any person, corporation, association, foundation, or entity, except the National Government, its instrumentalities or political subdivisions, for charitable, benevolent, educational, pious, religious, or other uses for the benefit of the public at large or a particular portion thereof or for the benefit of an indefinite number of persons.

“SEC. 425. The term trustee shall include any individual, corporation, association, foundation, or entity, except the National Government, its instrumentalities or political subdivisions, in charge of, or acting for, or concerned with the administration of, the trust referred to in the section immediately preceding and with the proper application of trust property.

“SEC. 426. The term trust property shall include all real or personal properties or funds pertaining to the trust as well as those acquired with the fruits or income therefrom or in exchange or substitution thereof.

“SEC. 427. All trustees shall, before entering in the performance of the duties of their trust, obtain a certificate of registration from the Commissioner. The registration shall expire on December 31 of the third year following its issuance unless it is renewed.

“All provisions of this Code governing mutual benefit associations and such other provisions herein, whenever practicable and necessary, shall be applicable to trusts for charitable uses.

“SEC. 428. The treasurer of a charitable trust shall file a fidelity bond in the amount commensurate with the value of the trust property in his custody, as may be determined by the Commissioner.

“CHAPTER VIII

“TRUST BUSINESS IN GENERAL

“SEC. 429. An insurance company may engage in limited trust business, consisting of managing funds pertaining only to retirement and pre-need plans, provided it has secured a license to do so from the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas. This trust business shall be separate and distinct from the general business of the insurance company and shall be subject to rules and regulations as may be promulgated by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas in consultation with the Commissioner.

“CHAPTER IX

“REGISTRATION, RESPONSIBILITIES AND
OVERSIGHT OF SELF-REGULATORY
ORGANIZATIONS

“SEC 430. The Commissioner shall have the power to register as a self-regulatory organization, or otherwise grant licenses, and to regulate, supervise, examine, suspend or otherwise discontinue, as a condition for the operation of organizations whose operations are related to or connected with the insurance market such as, but not limited to, associations of insurance companies, whether life or non-life, reinsurers, actuaries, agents, brokers, dealers, mutual benefit associations, trusts, rating agencies, and other persons regulated by the Commissioner, which are engaged in the business regulated by this Code.

“The Commissioner may prescribe rules and regulations which are necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of investors to govern self-regulatory organizations and other organizations licensed or regulated pursuant to the authority granted hereunder including, but not limited to, the requirement of cooperation within and among all participants in the insurance market to ensure transparency and facilitate exchange of information.

“SEC. 431. An association cannot be registered as a self-regulatory organization unless the Commissioner determines that:

“(a) The association is so organized and has the capacity to be able to carry out the purposes of this Code and to comply with, and to enforce compliance by its members and persons associated with its members, with the provisions of this Code, the rules and regulations thereunder, and the rules of the association.

“(b) The rules of the association, notwithstanding anything in the Corporation Code to the contrary, provide the following:

“(1) Qualifications and the disqualifications on membership of the association;

“(2) A fair representation of its members to serve on the board of directors of the association and the administration of its affairs, and that any natural person associated with a juridical entity that is a member shall also be deemed to be a member for this purpose;

“(3) The president of the association and at least two (2) independent directors as members of the board of directors of the association;

“(4) Equitable allocation of reasonable dues, fees, and other charges among members and other persons using any facility or system which the association operates or controls;

“(5) The prevention of fraudulent and manipulative acts and practices to protect the insuring public and the promotion of just and equitable principles of business;

“(6) Members and persons associated with its members subject to discipline for violation of any provision of this Code, the rules or regulations thereunder, or the rules of the association;

“(7) Fair procedure for the disciplining of members and persons associated with members; and

“(8) The prohibition or limitation of access to services offered by the association or a member thereof.

“SEC. 432. A self-regulatory organization may examine and verify the qualifications of an applicant to become a member in accordance with procedures established by the rules of the association.

“A self-regulatory organization shall deny membership or condition the membership of an entity, if it does not meet the standards of financial responsibility, operational capability, training, experience, or competence that are prescribed by the rules of the association; or has engaged, and there is a reasonable likelihood it will again engage, in acts or practices inconsistent with just and equitable principles of fair trade.

“A self-regulatory organization may deny membership to an entity not engaged in a type of business in which the rules of the association require members to be engaged.

“SEC. 433. Upon the filing of an application for registration as a self-regulatory organization under this title, the Commissioner shall have ninety (90) days within which to either grant registration or institute a proceeding to determine whether registration should be denied. In the event proceedings are instituted, the Commissioner shall have two hundred seventy (270) days within which to conclude such proceedings at which time he shall, by order, grant or deny such registration.

“SEC. 434. Every self-regulatory organization shall comply with the provisions of this Code, the rules and regulations thereunder, and its own rules, and enforce compliance therewith by its members, persons associated with its members or its participants, notwithstanding any provision of the Corporation Code to the contrary.

“SEC. 435. Each self-regulatory organization shall submit to the Commissioner for prior approval any proposed rule or amendment thereto, together with a concise statement of the reason and effect of the proposed amendment.

“Within sixty (60) days after submission of a proposed amendment, the Commissioner shall, by order, approve the proposed amendment. Otherwise, the same may be made effective by the self-regulatory organization.

“In the event of an emergency requiring action for the protection of the insuring public, a self-regulatory organization may put a proposed amendment into effect summarily: Provided, however, That a copy of the same shall be immediately submitted to the Commissioner.

“The Commissioner is further authorized, if after making appropriate request in writing to a self-regulatory organization that such organization effect on its own behalf specified changes in its rules and practices and, after due notice and hearing, it determines that such changes have not been effected, and that such changes are necessary, by rule or regulation or by order, may alter, abrogate or supplement the rules of such self-regulatory organization insofar as necessary or appropriate to effect such changes in respect of such matters as:

“(a) Safeguards in respect of the financial responsibility of members and adequate provision against the evasion of financial responsibility through the use of corporate forms or special partnerships;

“(b) The supervision of market practices;

“© The manner, method and place of soliciting business;

“(d) The fixing of reasonable rates of fees, interest, listing and other charges, but not rates of commission; and self-regulatory organization; and

“(e) The supervision, auditing and disciplining of members.

“In addition to the general powers of the Commissioner over the entities under supervision, the Commissioner, after due notice and hearing, is authorized, in the public interest and to protect the insuring public:

“(1) To suspend for a period not exceeding twelve (12) months or to revoke the registration of a self-regulatory organization, or to censure or impose limitations on the activities, functions and operations of such self-regulatory organization, if the Commission finds that such a self-regulatory organization has willfully violated or is unable to comply with any provision of this Code or of the rules and regulations thereunder, or its own rules, or has failed to enforce compliance therewith by a member of, person associated with a member, or a participant in such self-regulatory organization;

“(2) To expel from a self-regulatory organization any member thereof or any participant therein who is found to have willfully violated any provision of this Code or suspend for a period not exceeding twelve (12) months for violation of any provision of this Code or any other law administered by the Commission, or the rules and regulations thereunder, or effected, directly or indirectly, any transaction for any person who, such member or participant had reason to believe, was violating in respect of such transaction any of such provisions; and

“(3) To remove from office or censure any officer or director of a self-regulatory organization if it finds that such officer or director has violated any provision of this Code, any other law administered by the Commissioner, the rules or regulations thereunder and the rules of such self-regulatory organization, or has abused his authority, or without reasonable justification or excuse has failed to enforce compliance with any of such provisions.

“SEC. 436. (a) A self-regulatory organization is authorized to discipline a member of or participant in such self-regulatory organization, or any person associated with a member, including suspending or expelling such member or participant, or suspending or barring such person from being associated with a member, if engaged in acts or practices inconsistent with just and equitable principles of fairness or in willful violation of any provision of this Code, any other law administered by the Commission, the rules or regulations thereunder, or the rules of the self-regulatory organization. In any disciplinary proceeding by a self-regulatory organization (other than a summary proceeding pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section) the self-regulatory organization shall bring specific charges, provide notice to the person charged, afford the person charged with an opportunity to defend against the charges, and keep a record of the proceedings. A determination to impose a disciplinary sanction shall be supported by a written statement of the offense, a summary of the evidence presented and a statement of the sanction imposed.

“(b) A self-regulatory organization may summarily:

“(1) Suspend a member, participant or person associated with a member who has been or is expelled or suspended from any other self-regulatory organization; or

“(2) Suspend a member who the self-regulatory organization finds to be in such financial or operating difficulty that the member or participant cannot be permitted to continue to do business as a member with safety to investors, creditors, other members, participants or the self-regulatory organization: Provided, That the self-regulatory organization immediately notifies the Commission of the action taken. Any person aggrieved by a summary action pursuant to this paragraph shall be promptly afforded an opportunity for a hearing by the association in accordance with the preceding paragraph. The Commissioner, by order, may stay a summary action on his own or upon application by any person aggrieved thereby, if the Commissioner determines summarily or after due notice and hearing (which hearing may consist solely of the submission of affidavits or presentation of oral arguments), that a stay is consistent with the public interest and the protection of the insuring public.

“© A self-regulatory organization shall promptly notify the Commission of any disciplinary sanction on any member thereof or participant therein, any denial of membership or participation in such organization, or the imposition of any disciplinary sanction on a person associated with a member or a bar of such person from becoming so associated. Within thirty (30) days after such notice, any aggrieved person may appeal to the Commissioner from, or the Commissioner on its own motion within such period, may institute review of, the decision of the self-regulatory organization, at the conclusion of which, after due notice and hearing (which may consist solely of review of the record before the self-regulatory organization), the Commissioner shall affirm, modify or set aside the sanction. In such proceeding, the Commissioner shall determine whether the aggrieved person has engaged or omitted to engage in the acts and practices as found by the self-regulatory organization, whether such acts and practices constitute willful violations of this Code, any other law administered by the Commission, the rules or regulations thereunder, or the rules of the self-regulatory organization as specified by such organization, whether such provisions were applied in a manner consistent with the purposes of this Code, and whether, with due regard for the public interest and the protection of investors, the sanction is excessive or oppressive.

“CHAPTER X

“THE INSURANCE COMMISSIONER

“TITLE l

“ADMINISTRATIVE AND ADJUDICATORY POWERS

“SEC. 437. The Insurance Commissioner shall be appointed by the President of the Republic of the Philippines for a term of six (6) years without reappointment and who shall serve as such until the successor shall have been appointed and qualified. If the Insurance Commissioner is removed before the expiration of his term of office, the reason for the removal must be published.

“The Insurance Commissioner shall have the duty to see that all laws relating to insurance, insurance companies and other insurance matters, mutual benefit associations, and trusts for charitable uses are faithfully executed and to perform the duties imposed upon him by this Code, and shall, notwithstanding any existing laws to the contrary, have sole and exclusive authority to regulate the issuance and sale of variable contracts as defined in Section 238 hereof and to provide for the licensing of persons selling such contracts, and to issue such reasonable rules and regulations governing the same.

“The Commissioner may issue such rulings, instructions, circulars, orders and decisions as may be deemed necessary to secure the enforcement of the provisions of this Code, to ensure the efficient regulation of the insurance industry in accordance with global best practices and to protect the insuring public. Except as otherwise specified, decisions made by the Commissioner shall be appealable to the Secretary of Finance.

“In addition to the foregoing, the Commissioner shall have the following powers and functions:

“(a) Formulate policies and recommendations on issues concerning the insurance industry, advise Congress and other government agencies on all aspects of the insurance industry and propose legislation and amendments thereto;

“(b) Approve, reject, suspend or revoke licenses or certificates of registration provided for by this Code;

“© Impose sanctions for the violation of laws and the rules, regulations and orders issued pursuant thereto;

“(d) Prepare, approve, amend or repeal rules, regulations and orders, and issue opinions and provide guidance on and supervise compliance with such rules, regulations and orders;

“(e) Enlist the aid and support of, and/or deputize any and all enforcement agencies of the government in the implementation of its powers and functions under this Code;

“(f) Issue cease and desist orders to prevent fraud or injury to the insuring public;

“(g) Punish for contempt of the Commissioner, both direct and indirect, in accordance with the pertinent provisions of and penalties prescribed by the Rules of Court;

“(h) Compel the officers of any registered insurance corporation or association to call meetings of stockholders or members thereof under its supervision;

“(i) Issue subpoena duces tecum and summon witnesses to appear in any proceeding of the Commission and, in appropriate cases, order the examination, search and seizure of all documents, papers, files and records, tax returns, and books of accounts of any entity or person under investigation as may be necessary for the proper disposition of the cases before it, subject to the provisions of existing laws;

“(j) Suspend or revoke, after proper notice and hearing, the license or certificate of authority of any entity or person under its regulation, upon any of the grounds provided by law;

“(k) Conduct an examination to determine compliance with laws and regulations if the circumstances so warrant as determined by appropriate rules and regulations;

“(l) Investigate not oftener than once a year from the last date of examination to determine whether an institution is conducting its business on a safe and sound basis: Provided, That, the deficiencies/irregularities found by or discovered by an audit shall be immediately addressed;

“(m) Inquire into the solvency and liquidity of the institutions under its supervision and enforce prompt corrective action;

“(n) To retain and utilize, in addition to its annual budget, all fees, charges and other income derived from the regulation of insurance companies and other supervised persons or entities;

“(o) To fix and assess fees, charges and penalties as the Commissioner may find reasonable in the exercise of regulation; and

“(p) Exercise such other powers as may be provided by law as well as those which may be implied from, or which are necessary or incidental to the express powers granted the Commission to achieve the objectives and purposes of this Code.

“The Commission shall indemnify the Commissioner, Deputy Commissioner, and other officials of the Commission, including personnel performing supervision and examination functions, for all costs and expenses reasonably incurred by such persons in connection with any civil or criminal actions, suits or proceedings to which they may be made a party to by the reason of the performance of their duties and functions, unless they are finally adjudged in such actions, suits or proceedings to be liable for negligence or misconduct.

“In the event of settlement or compromise, indemnification shall be provided only in connection with such matters covered by the settlement as to which the Commission is advised by external counsel that the persons to be indemnified did not commit any negligence or misconduct:

“The costs and expenses incurred in defending the aforementioned action, suit or proceeding may be paid by the Commission in advance of the final disposition of such action, suit or proceeding upon receipt of an undertaking by or on behalf of the Commissioner, Deputy Commissioner, officer or employee to repay the amount advanced should it ultimately be determined by the Commission that the person is not entitled to be indemnified.

“SEC. 438. In addition to the administrative sanctions provided elsewhere in this Code, the Insurance Commissioner is hereby authorized, at his discretion, to impose upon insurance companies, their directors and/or officers and/or agents, for any willful failure or refusal to comply with, or violation of any provision of this Code, or any order, instruction, regulation, or ruling of the Insurance Commissioner, or any commission or irregularities, and/or conducting business in an unsafe or unsound manner as may be determined by the Insurance Commissioner, the following:

“(a) Fines not less than Five thousand pesos (P5,000.00) and not more than Two hundred thousand pesos (P200,000.00); and

“(b) Suspension, or after due hearing, removal of directors and/or officers and/or agents.

“SEC. 439. The Commissioner shall have the power to adjudicate claims and complaints involving any loss, damage or liability for which an insurer may be answerable under any kind of policy or contract of insurance, or for which such insurer may be liable under a contract of suretyship, or for which a reinsurer may be sued under any contract of reinsurance it may have entered into; or for which a mutual benefit association may be held liable under the membership certificates it has issued to its members, where the amount of any such loss, damage or liability, excluding interest, cost and attorney’s fees, being claimed or sued upon any kind of insurance, bond, reinsurance contract, or membership certificate does not exceed in any single claim Five million pesos (P5,000,000.00).

“The power of the Commissioner does not cover the relationship between the insurance company and its agents/brokers but is limited to adjudicating claims and complaints filed by the insured against the insurance company.

“The Commissioner may authorize any officer or group of officers under him to conduct investigation, inquiry and/or hearing and decide claims and he may issue rules governing the conduct of adjudication and resolution of cases. The Rules of Court shall have suppletory application.

“The party filing an action pursuant to the provisions of this section thereby submits his person to the jurisdiction of the Commissioner. The Commissioner shall acquire jurisdiction over the person of the impleaded party or parties in accordance with and pursuant to the provisions of the Rules of Court.

“The authority to adjudicate granted to the Commissioner under this section shall be concurrent with that of the civil courts, but the filing of a complaint with the Commissioner shall preclude the civil courts from taking cognizance of a suit involving the same subject matter.

“Any decision, order or ruling rendered by the Commissioner after a hearing shall have the force and effect of a judgment. Any party may appeal from a final order, ruling or decision of the Commissioner by filing with the Commissioner within thirty (30) days from receipt of copy of such order, ruling or decision a notice of appeal to the Court of Appeals in the manner provided for in the Rules of Court for appeals from the Regional Trial Court to the Court of Appeals.

“For the purpose of any proceeding under this section, the Commissioner, or any officer thereof designated by him is empowered to administer oaths and affirmation, subpoena witnesses, compel their attendance, take evidence, and require the production of any books, papers, documents, or contracts or other records which are relevant or material to the inquiry.

“A full and complete record shall be kept of all proceedings had before the Commissioner, or the officers thereof designated by him, and all testimony shall be taken down and transcribed by a stenographer appointed by the Commissioner.

“In order to promote party autonomy in the resolution of cases, the Commissioner shall establish a system for resolving cases through the use of alternative dispute resolution.

“TITLE 2

“FEES AND OTHER SOURCES OF FUNDS

“SEC. 440. (a) For the issuance or renewal of certificates of authority, licenses and certificates of registration, pursuant to pertinent provisions of this Code, the Commissioner shall collect and receive fees which shall be not less than the following:

“For each certificate of authority issued to an insurance company doing business in the Philippines, Two hundred pesos (P200.00).

“For each special certificate of authority issued to a servicing insurance company, One hundred pesos (P100.00).

“For each license issued to a general agent of an insurance company, Fifty pesos (P50.00).

“For each license issued to an insurance agent, Twenty-five pesos (P25.00).

“For each license issued to an agent of variable contract policy, Twenty-five pesos (P25.00).

“For each license issued to an insurance broker, One hundred pesos (P100.00).

“For each license issued to a reinsurance broker, One hundred pesos (P100.00).

“For each license issued to an insurance adjuster, One hundred pesos (P100.00).

“For each certificate of registration issued to an actuary, Fifty pesos (P50.00).

“For each certificate of registration issued to a resident agent, Fifty pesos (P50.00).

“For each license issued to a rating organization, One hundred pesos (P100.00).

“For each certificate of registration issued to a non-life company underwriter, Fifty pesos (P50.00).

“For each license issued to a mutual benefit association, Ten pesos (P10.00).

“For each certificate of registration issued to a trust for charitable uses, Ten pesos (P10.00).

“All certificates of authority and all other licenses, as well as all certificates of registration, issued to any person, partnership, association or corporation under the pertinent provisions of this Code for which no expiration date has been prescribed, shall expire on the last day of December of the third year from its issuance and shall be renewed upon application therefor and payment of the corresponding fee, if the licensee or holder of such license or certificate is continuing to comply with all the applicable provisions of existing laws, and of rules, instructions, orders and decisions of the Commissioner.

“(b) For the filing of the annual statement referred to in Section 229, the Commissioner shall collect and receive from the insurance company so filing a fee of not less than Five hundred pesos (P500.00): Provided, That a fine of not less than One hundred pesos (P100.00) shall be imposed and collected by the Commissioner for each week of delay, or any fraction thereof, in the filing of the annual statement.

“For the filing of annual statement referred to in Section 413, the Commissioner shall collect and receive from the mutual benefit association so filing a fee of not less than Ten pesos (P10.00): Provided, That a fine of not less than Ten pesos (P10.00) shall be imposed and collected by the Commissioner for each week of delay, or any fraction thereof, in the filing of the annual statement.

“© For the examination prescribed in Section 253, the Commissioner shall collect and receive fees according to the amount of its total assets, in the case of a domestic company, or of its assets in the Philippines, in the case of a foreign company, not less than the amount as follows:

“(1) Two million pesos or more but less than Four million pesos, Four hundred pesos (P400.00);

“(2) Four million pesos or more but less than Six million pesos, Eight hundred pesos (P800.00);

“(3) Six million pesos or more but less than Eight million pesos, One thousand two hundred pesos (P1,200.00);

“(4) Eight million pesos or more but less than Ten million pesos, One thousand six hundred pesos (P1,600.00);

“(5) Ten million pesos or more, Two thousand pesos (P2,000.00);

“Provided, That if the said examination is made in places outside the Metropolitan Manila area, besides these fees, the Commissioner shall require of the company examined the payment of the actual and necessary travelling and subsistence expenses of the examiner or examiners concerned.

“For the examination prescribed in Section 412, the Commissioner shall collect and receive a minimum fee of not less than One hundred pesos (P100.00) from the mutual benefit association examined: Provided, That if such association has total assets of more than One hundred thousand pesos (P100,000.00), an additional fee of not less than Ten pesos (P10.00) for every Fifty thousand pesos (P50,000.00) in excess thereof shall be imposed:

“(d) For the filing of an application to withdraw from the Philippines under Title 18, the Commissioner shall collect and receive from the foreign company so withdrawing a fee of not less than One thousand pesos (P1,000.00).

“(e) The Commissioner may fix and collect fees or charges for documents, transcripts, or other materials which may be furnished by him not in excess of reasonable cost.

“SEC. 441. The Commissioner, in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Department of Budget and Management and other relevant regulatory agencies, shall source the salary, allowances and other expenses from the retained amount of the fees, charges, penalties and other income from the regulation of insurance companies and other covered persons and entities, and from the Insurance Fund, which is created out of the proceeds of taxes on insurance premiums mentioned in Section 255 of the National Internal Revenue Code, as amended.

“MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

“SEC. 442. Any person, company or corporation subject to the supervision and control of the Commissioner who violates any provision of this Code, for which no penalty is provided, shall be deemed guilty of a penal offense, and upon conviction be punished by a fine not exceeding Two hundred thousand pesos (P200,000.00) or imprisonment of six (6) months, or both, at the discretion of the court.

“If the offense is committed by a company or corporation, the officers, directors, or other persons responsible for its operation, management, or administration, unless it can be proved that they have taken no part in the commission of the offense, shall likewise be guilty of a penal offense, and upon conviction be punished by a fine not exceeding Two hundred thousand pesos (P200,000.00) or imprisonment of six (6) months, or both, at the discretion of the court.

“SEC. 443. All criminal actions for the violation of any of the provisions of this Code shall prescribe after three (3) years from the discovery of such violation: Provided, That such actions shall in any event prescribe after ten (10) years from the commission of such violation.

“SEC. 444. Any person, partnership, association or corporation heretofore authorized, licensed or registered by the Commissioner shall be deemed to have been authorized, licensed or registered under the provisions of this Code and shall be governed by the provisions thereof: Provided, however, That where any such person, partnership, association or corporation is affected by the new requirements of this Code, said person, partnership, association or corporation shall, unless otherwise herein provided, be given a period of one (1) year from the effectivity of this Code within which to comply with the same.

“SEC. 445. Transitory Provision. – Renewal of existing licenses, certificates of authority or accreditation which will expire on June 30, 2013 shall be valid until December 31, 2015. Thereafter, renewal shall be filed on the last day of December every third year following the date of expiry of the license, certificate of authority or accreditation.

“SEC. 446. Repealing Clause. – Except as expressly provided by this Code, all laws, decrees, orders, rules and regulations or parts thereof, inconsistent with any provision of this Code shall be deemed repealed, amended or modified accordingly.

“SEC. 447. Separability Clause. – If any provision of this Code or any part hereof be declared invalid or unconstitutional, the remainder of the law or other provisions not otherwise affected shall remain valid and subsisting.

“SEC. 448. This Code shall take effect fifteen (15) days following its publication in a newspaper of general circuation.”

[[MORE]]

TITLE V
PRESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1
General Provisions

Article 1106. By prescription, one acquires ownership and other real rights through the lapse of time in the manner and under the conditions laid down by law.

In the same way, rights and conditions are lost by prescription. (1930a)

Article 1107. Persons who are capable of acquiring property or rights by the other legal modes may acquire the same by means of prescription.

Minors and other incapacitated persons may acquire property or rights by prescription, either personally or through their parents, guardians or legal representatives. (1931a)

Article 1108. Prescription, both acquisitive and extinctive, runs against:

Persons who are disqualified from administering their property have a right to claim damages from their legal representatives whose negligence has been the cause of prescription. (1932a)

Article 1109. Prescription does not run between husband and wife, even though there be a separation of property agreed upon in the marriage settlements or by judicial decree.

Neither does prescription run between parents and children, during the minority or insanity of the latter, and between guardian and ward during the continuance of the guardianship. (n)

Article 1110. Prescription, acquisitive and extinctive, runs in favor of, or against a married woman. (n)

Article 1111. Prescription obtained by a co-proprietor or a co-owner shall benefit the others. (1933)

Article 1112. Persons with capacity to alienate property may renounce prescription already obtained, but not the right to prescribe in the future.

Prescription is deemed to have been tacitly renounced when the renunciation results from acts which imply the abandonment of the right acquired. (1935)

Article 1113. All things which are within the commerce of men are susceptible of prescription, unless otherwise provided. Property of the State or any of its subdivisions not patrimonial in character shall not be the object of prescription. (1936a)

Article 1114. Creditors and all other persons interested in making the prescription effective may avail themselves thereof notwithstanding the express or tacit renunciation by the debtor or proprietor. (1937)

Article 1115. The provisions of the present Title are understood to be without prejudice to what in this Code or in special laws is established with respect to specific cases of prescription. (1938)

Article 1116. Prescription already running before the effectivity of this Code shall be governed by laws previously in force; but if since the time this Code took effect the entire period herein required for prescription should elapse, the present Code shall be applicable, even though by the former laws a longer period might be required. (1939)

CHAPTER 2
Prescription of Ownership and Other Real Rights

Article 1117. Acquisitive prescription of dominion and other real rights may be ordinary or extraordinary.

Ordinary acquisitive prescription requires possession of things in good faith and with just title for the time fixed by law. (1940a)

Article 1118. Possession has to be in the concept of an owner, public, peaceful and uninterrupted. (1941)

Article 1119. Acts of possessory character executed in virtue of license or by mere tolerance of the owner shall not be available for the purposes of possession. (1942)

Article 1120. Possession is interrupted for the purposes of prescription, naturally or civilly. (1943)

Article 1121. Possession is naturally interrupted when through any cause it should cease for more than one year.

The old possession is not revived if a new possession should be exercised by the same adverse claimant. (1944a)

Article 1122. If the natural interruption is for only one year or less, the time elapsed shall be counted in favor of the prescription. (n)

Article 1123. Civil interruption is produced by judicial summons to the possessor. (1945a)

Article 1124. Judicial summons shall be deemed not to have been issued and shall not give rise to interruption:

In all these cases, the period of the interruption shall be counted for the prescription. (1946a)

Article 1125. Any express or tacit recognition which the possessor may make of the owner’s right also interrupts possession. (1948)

Article 1126. Against a title recorded in the Registry of Property, ordinary prescription of ownership or real rights shall not take place to the prejudice of a third person, except in virtue of another title also recorded; and the time shall begin to run from the recording of the latter.

As to lands registered under the Land Registration Act, the provisions of that special law shall govern. (1949a)

Article 1127. The good faith of the possessor consists in the reasonable belief that the person from whom he received the thing was the owner thereof, and could transmit his ownership. (1950a)

Article 1128. The conditions of good faith required for possession in articles 526, 527, 528, and 529 of this Code are likewise necessary for the determination of good faith in the prescription of ownership and other real rights. (1951)

Article 1129. For the purposes of prescription, there is just title when the adverse claimant came into possession of the property through one of the modes recognized by law for the acquisition of ownership or other real rights, but the grantor was not the owner or could not transmit any right. (n)

Article 1130. The title for prescription must be true and valid. (1953)

Article 1131. For the purposes of prescription, just title must be proved; it is never presumed. (1954a)

Article 1132. The ownership of movables prescribes through uninterrupted possession for four years in good faith.

The ownership of personal property also prescribes through uninterrupted possession for eight years, without need of any other condition.

With regard to the right of the owner to recover personal property lost or of which he has been illegally deprived, as well as with respect to movables acquired in a public sale, fair, or market, or from a merchant’s store the provisions of articles 559 and 1505 of this Code shall be observed. (1955a)

Article 1133. Movables possessed through a crime can never be acquired through prescription by the offender. (1956a)

Article 1134. Ownership and other real rights over immovable property are acquired by ordinary prescription through possession of ten years. (1957a)

Article 1135. In case the adverse claimant possesses by mistake an area greater, or less than that expressed in his title, prescription shall be based on the possession. (n)

Article 1136. Possession in wartime, when the civil courts are not open, shall not be counted in favor of the adverse claimant. (n)

Article 1137. Ownership and other real rights over immovables also prescribe through uninterrupted adverse possession thereof for thirty years, without need of title or of good faith. (1959a)

Article 1138. In the computation of time necessary for prescription the following rules shall be observed:

CHAPTER 3
Prescription of Actions

Article 1139. Actions prescribe by the mere lapse of time fixed by law. (1961)

Article 1140. Actions to recover movables shall prescribe eight years from the time the possession thereof is lost, unless the possessor has acquired the ownership by prescription for a less period, according to articles 1132, and without prejudice to the provisions of articles 559, 1505, and 1133. (1962a)

Article 1141. Real actions over immovables prescribe after thirty years.

This provision is without prejudice to what is established for the acquisition of ownership and other real rights by prescription. (1963)

Article 1142. A mortgage action prescribes after ten years. (1964a)

Article 1143. The following rights, among others specified elsewhere in this Code, are not extinguished by prescription:

Article 1144. The following actions must be brought within ten years from the time the right of action accrues:

Article 1145. The following actions must be commenced within six years:

Article 1146. The following actions must be instituted within four years:

However, when the action arises from or out of any act, activity, or conduct of any public officer involving the exercise of powers or authority arising from Martial Law including the arrest, detention and/or trial of the plaintiff, the same must be brought within one (1) year. (As amended by PD No. 1755, Dec. 24, 1980.)

Article 1147. The following actions must be filed within one year:

Article 1148. The limitations of action mentioned in articles 1140 to 1142, and 1144 to 1147 are without prejudice to those specified in other parts of this Code, in the Code of Commerce, and in special laws. (n)

Article 1149. All other actions whose periods are not fixed in this Code or in other laws must be brought within five years from the time the right of action accrues. (n)

Article 1150. The time for prescription for all kinds of actions, when there is no special provision which ordains otherwise, shall be counted from the day they may be brought. (1969)

Article 1151. The time for the prescription of actions which have for their object the enforcement of obligations to pay principal with interest or annuity runs from the last payment of the annuity or of the interest. (1970a)

Article 1152. The period for prescription of actions to demand the fulfillment of obligation declared by a judgment commences from the time the judgment became final. (1971)

Article 1153. The period for prescription of actions to demand accounting runs from the day the persons who should render the same cease in their functions.

The period for the action arising from the result of the accounting runs from the date when said result was recognized by agreement of the interested parties. (1972)

Article 1154. The period during which the obligee was prevented by a fortuitous event from enforcing his right is not reckoned against him. (n)

Article 1155. The prescription of actions is interrupted when they are filed before the court, when there is a written extrajudicial demand by the creditors, and when there is any written acknowledgment of the debt by the debtor. (1973a)

My life is very colorful in law school - literally and figuratively □□□

[[MORE]]

[[MORE]]

THE REVISED RULES OF CRIMINAL PROCEDURE

(As amended, December 1, 2000)

RULE 110

Prosecution of Offenses

Section 1. Institution of criminal actions. — Criminal actions shall be instituted as follows:

(a) For offenses where a preliminary investigation is required pursuant to section 1 of Rule 112, by filing the complaint with the proper officer for the purpose of conducting the requisite preliminary investigation.

(b) For all other offenses, by filing the complaint or information directly with the Municipal Trial Courts and Municipal Circuit Trial Courts, or the complaint with the office of the prosecutor. In Manila and other chartered cities, the complaint shall be filed with the office of the prosecutor unless otherwise provided in their charters.

The institution of the criminal action shall interrupt the running period of prescription of the offense charged unless otherwise provided in special laws. (1a)

Section 2. The Complaint or information. — The complaint or information shall be in writing, in the name of the People of the Philippines and against all persons who appear to be responsible for the offense involved. (2a)

Section 3. Complaint defined. — A complaint is a sworn written statement charging a person with an offense, subscribed by the offended party, any peace officer, or other public officer charged with the enforcement of the law violated. (3)

Section 4. Information defined. — An information is an accusation in writing charging a person with an offense, subscribed by the prosecutor and filed with the court. (4a)

Section 5. Who must prosecute criminal actions. — All criminal actions commenced by a complaint or information shall be prosecuted under the direction and control of the prosecutor. However, in Municipal Trial Courts or Municipal Circuit Trial Courts when the prosecutor assigned thereto or to the case is not available, the offended party, any peace officer, or public officer charged with the enforcement of the law violated may prosecute the case. This authority cease upon actual intervention of the prosecutor or upon elevation of the case to the Regional Trial Court.       ^{(This Section was repealed by A.M. No. 02-2-07-SC effective May 1, 2002)}

The crimes of adultery and concubinage shall not be prosecuted except upon a complaint filed by the offended spouse. The offended party cannot institute criminal prosecution without including the guilty parties, if both alive, nor, in any case, if the offended party has consented to the offense or pardoned the offenders.

The offenses of seduction, abduction and acts of lasciviousness shall not be prosecuted except upon a complaint filed by the offended party or her parents, grandparents or guardian, nor, in any case, if the offender has been expressly pardoned by any of them. If the offended party dies or becomes incapacitated before she can file the complaint, and she has no known parents, grandparents or guardian, the State shall initiate the criminal action in her behalf.

The offended party, even if a minor, has the right to initiate the prosecution of the offenses of seduction, abduction and acts of lasciviousness independently of her parents, grandparents, or guardian, unless she is incompetent or incapable of doing so. Where the offended party, who is a minor, fails to file the complaint, her parents, grandparents, or guardian may file the same. The right to file the action granted to parents, grandparents or guardian shall be exclusive of all other persons and shall be exercised successively in the order herein provided, except as stated in the preceding paragraph.

No criminal action for defamation which consists in the imputation of the offenses mentioned above shall be brought except at the instance of and upon complaint filed by the offended party. (5a)

The prosecution for violation of special laws shall be governed by the provisions thereof. (n)

Section 6. Sufficiency of complaint or information. — A complaint or information is sufficient if it states the name of the accused; the designation of the offense given by the statute; the acts or omissions complained of as constituting the offense; the name of the offended party; the approximate date of the commission of the offense; and the place where the offense was committed.

When an offense is committed by more than one person, all of them shall be included in the complaint or information. (6a)

Section 7. Name of the accused. — The complaint or information must state the name and surname of the accused or any appellation or nickname by which he has been or is known. If his name cannot be ascertained, he must be described under a fictitious name with a statement that his true name is unknown.

If the true name of the accused is thereafter disclosed by him or appears in some other manner to the court, such true name shall be inserted in the complaint or information and record. (7a)

Section 8. Designation of the offense. — The complaint or information shall state the designation of the offense given by the statute, aver the acts or omissions constituting the offense, and specify its qualifying and aggravating circumstances. If there is no designation of the offense, reference shall be made to the section or subsection of the statute punishing it. (8a)

Section 9. Cause of the accusation. — The acts or omissions complained of as constituting the offense and the qualifying and aggravating circumstances must be stated in ordinary and concise language and not necessarily in the language used in the statute but in terms sufficient to enable a person of common understanding to know what offense is being charged as well as its qualifying and aggravating circumstances and for the court to pronounce judgment. (9a)

Section 10. Place of commission of the offense. — The complaint or information is sufficient if it can be understood from its allegations that the offense was committed or some of the essential ingredients occurred at some place within the jurisdiction of the court, unless the particular place where it was committed constitutes an essential element of the offense or is necessary for its identification. (10a)

Section 11. Date of commission of the offense. — It is not necessary to state in the complaint or information the precise date the offense was committed except when it is a material ingredient of the offense. The offense may be alleged to have been committed on a date as near as possible to the actual date of its commission. (11a)

Section 12. Name of the offended party. — The complaint or information must state the name and surname of the person against whom or against whose property the offense was committed, or any appellation or nickname by which such person has been or is known. If there is no better way of identifying him, he must be described under a fictitious name.

(a) In offenses against property, if the name of the offended party is unknown, the property must be described with such particularity as to properly identify the offense charged.

(b) If the true name of the of the person against whom or against whose properly the offense was committed is thereafter disclosed or ascertained, the court must cause the true name to be inserted in the complaint or information and the record.

© If the offended party is a juridical person, it is sufficient to state its name, or any name or designation by which it is known or by which it may be identified, without need of averring that it is a juridical person or that it is organized in accordance with law. (12a)

Section 13. Duplicity of the offense. — A complaint or information must charge but one offense, except when the law prescribes a single punishment for various offenses. (13a)

Section 14. Amendment or substitution. — A complaint or information may be amended, in form or in substance, without leave of court, at any time before the accused enters his plea. After the plea and during the trial, a formal amendment may only be made with leave of court and when it can be done without causing prejudice to the rights of the accused.

However, any amendment before plea, which downgrades the nature of the offense charged in or excludes any accused from the complaint or information, can be made only upon motion by the prosecutor, with notice to the offended party and with leave of court. The court shall state its reasons in resolving the motion and copies of its order shall be furnished all parties, especially the offended party. (n)

If it appears at any time before judgment that a mistake has been made in charging the proper offense, the court shall dismiss the original complaint or information upon the filing of a new one charging the proper offense in accordance with section 19, Rule 119, provided the accused shall not be placed in double jeopardy. The court may require the witnesses to give bail for their appearance at the trial. (14a)

Section 15. Place where action is to be instituted. —

(a) Subject to existing laws, the criminal action shall be instituted and tried in the court of the municipality or territory where the offense was committed or where any of its essential ingredients occurred.

(b) Where an offense is committed in a train, aircraft, or other public or private vehicle while in the course of its trip, the criminal action shall be instituted and tried in the court of any municipality or territory where such train, aircraft or other vehicle passed during such its trip, including the place of its departure and arrival.

© Where an offense is committed on board a vessel in the course of its voyage, the criminal action shall be instituted and tried in the court of the first port of entry or of any municipality or territory where the vessel passed during such voyage, subject to the generally accepted principles of international law.

(d) Crimes committed outside the Philippines but punishable under Article 2 of the Revised Penal Code shall be cognizable by the court where the criminal action is first filed. (15a)

Section 16. Intervention of the offended party in criminal action. — Where the civil action for recovery of civil liability is instituted in the criminal action pursuant to Rule 111, the offended party may intervene by counsel in the prosecution of the offense. (16a)

RULE 111

Prosecution of Civil Action

Section 1. Institution of criminal and civil actions. — (a) When a criminal action is instituted, the civil action for the recovery of civil liability arising from the offense charged shall be deemed instituted with the criminal action unless the offended party waives the civil action, reserves the right to institute it separately or institutes the civil action prior to the criminal action.

The reservation of the right to institute separately the civil action shall be made before the prosecution starts presenting its evidence and under circumstances affording the offended party a reasonable opportunity to make such reservation.

When the offended party seeks to enforce civil liability against the accused by way of moral, nominal, temperate, or exemplary damages without specifying the amount thereof in the complaint or information, the filing fees thereof shall constitute a first lien on the judgment awarding such damages.

Where the amount of damages, other than actual, is specified in the complaint or information, the corresponding filing fees shall be paid by the offended party upon the filing thereof in court.

Except as otherwise provided in these Rules, no filing fees shall be required for actual damages.

No counterclaim, cross-claim or third-party complaint may be filed by the accused in the criminal case, but any cause of action which could have been the subject thereof may be litigated in a separate civil action. (1a)

(b) The criminal action for violation of Batas Pambansa Blg. 22 shall be deemed to include the corresponding civil action. No reservation to file such civil action separately shall be allowed.

Upon filing of the aforesaid joint criminal and civil actions, the offended party shall pay in full the filing fees based on the amount of the check involved, which shall be considered as the actual damages claimed. Where the complaint or information also seeks to recover liquidated, moral, nominal, temperate or exemplary damages, the offended party shall pay additional filing fees based on the amounts alleged therein. If the amounts are not so alleged but any of these damages are subsequently awarded by the court, the filing fees based on the amount awarded shall constitute a first lien on the judgment.

Where the civil action has been filed separately and trial thereof has not yet commenced, it may be consolidated with the criminal action upon application with the court trying the latter case. If the application is granted, the trial of both actions shall proceed in accordance with section 2 of this Rule governing consolidation of the civil and criminal actions. (cir. 57-97)

Section 2. When separate civil action is suspended. — After the criminal action has been commenced, the separate civil action arising therefrom cannot be instituted until final judgment has been entered in the criminal action.

If the criminal action is filed after the said civil action has already been instituted, the latter shall be suspended in whatever stage it may be found before judgment on the merits. The suspension shall last until final judgment is rendered in the criminal action. Nevertheless, before judgment on the merits is rendered in the civil action, the same may, upon motion of the offended party, be consolidated with the criminal action in the court trying the criminal action. In case of consolidation, the evidence already adduced in the civil action shall be deemed automatically reproduced in the criminal action without prejudice to the right of the prosecution to cross-examine the witnesses presented by the offended party in the criminal case and of the parties to present additional evidence. The consolidated criminal and civil actions shall be tried and decided jointly.

During the pendency of the criminal action, the running of the period of prescription of the civil action which cannot be instituted separately or whose proceeding has been suspended shall be tolled. (n)

The extinction of the penal action does not carry with it extinction of the civil action. However, the civil action based on delict shall be deemed extinguished if there is a finding in a final judgment in the criminal action that the act or omission from which the civil liability may arise did not exist. (2a)

Section 3. When civil action may proceeded independently. — In the cases provided for in Articles 32, 33, 34 and 2176 of the Civil Code of the Philippines, the independent civil action may be brought by the offended party. It shall proceed independently of the criminal action and shall require only a preponderance of evidence. In no case, however, may the offended party recover damages twice for the same act or omission charged in the criminal action. (3a)

Section 4. Effect of death on civil actions. — The death of the accused after arraignment and during the pendency of the criminal action shall extinguish the civil liability arising from the delict. However, the independent civil action instituted under section 3 of this Rule or which thereafter is instituted to enforce liability arising from other sources of obligation may be continued against the estate or legal representative of the accused after proper substitution or against said estate, as the case may be. The heirs of the accused may be substituted for the deceased without requiring the appointment of an executor or administrator and the court may appoint a guardian ad litem for the minor heirs.

The court shall forthwith order said legal representative or representatives to appear and be substituted within a period of thirty (30) days from notice.

A final judgment entered in favor of the offended party shall be enforced in the manner especially provided in these rules for prosecuting claims against the estate of the deceased.

If the accused dies before arraignment, the case shall be dismissed without prejudice to any civil action the offended party may file against the estate of the deceased. (n)

Section 5. Judgment in civil action not a bar. — A final judgment rendered in a civil action absolving the defendant from civil liability is not a bar to a criminal action against the defendant for the same act or omission subject of the civil action. (4a)

Section 6. Suspension by reason of prejudicial question. — A petition for suspension of the criminal action based upon the pendency of a prejudicial question in a civil action may be filed in the office of the prosecutor or the court conducting the preliminary investigation. When the criminal action has been filed in court for trial, the petition to suspend shall be filed in the same criminal action at any time before the prosecution rests. (6a)

Section 7. Elements of prejudicial question. — The elements of a prejudicial question are: (a) the previously instituted civil action involves an issue similar or intimately related to the issue raised in the subsequent criminal action, and (b) the resolution of such issue determines whether or not the criminal action may proceed. (5a)

RULE 112

Preliminary Investigation

Section 1. Preliminary investigation defined; when required. — Preliminary investigation is an inquiry or proceeding to determine whether there is sufficient ground to engender a well-founded belief that a crime has been committed and the respondent is probably guilty thereof, and should be held for trial.

Except as provided in section 7 of this Rule, a preliminary investigation is required to be conducted before the filing of a complaint or information for an offense where the penalty prescribed by law is at least four (4) years, two (2) months and one (1) day without regard to the fine. (1a)

Section 2. Officers authorized to conduct preliminary investigations. —

The following may conduct preliminary investigations:

(a) Provincial or City Prosecutors and their assistants;

(b) Judges of the Municipal Trial Courts and Municipal Circuit Trial Courts;

© National and Regional State Prosecutors; and

(d) Other officers as may be authorized by law.

Their authority to conduct preliminary investigations shall include all crimes cognizable by the proper court in their respective territorial jurisdictions. (2a)

Section 3. Procedure. — The preliminary investigation shall be conducted in the following manner:

(a) The complaint shall state the address of the respondent and shall be accompanied by the affidavits of the complainant and his witnesses, as well as other supporting documents to establish probable cause. They shall be in such number of copies as there are respondents, plus two (2) copies for the official file. The affidavits shall be subscribed and sworn to before any prosecutor or government official authorized to administer oath, or, in their absence or unavailability, before a notary public, each of who must certify that he personally examined the affiants and that he is satisfied that they voluntarily executed and understood their affidavits.

(b) Within ten (10) days after the filing of the complaint, the investigating officer shall either dismiss it if he finds no ground to continue with the investigation, or issue a subpoena to the respondent attaching to it a copy of the complaint and its supporting affidavits and documents.

The respondent shall have the right to examine the evidence submitted by the complainant which he may not have been furnished and to copy them at his expense. If the evidence is voluminous, the complainant may be required to specify those which he intends to present against the respondent, and these shall be made available for examination or copying by the respondent at his expense.

Objects as evidence need not be furnished a party but shall be made available for examination, copying, or photographing at the expense of the requesting party.

© Within ten (10) days from receipt of the subpoena with the complaint and supporting affidavits and documents, the respondent shall submit his counter-affidavit and that of his witnesses and other supporting documents relied upon for his defense. The counter-affidavits shall be subscribed and sworn to and certified as provided in paragraph (a) of this section, with copies thereof furnished by him to the complainant. The respondent shall not be allowed to file a motion to dismiss in lieu of a counter-affidavit.

(d) If the respondent cannot be subpoenaed, or if subpoenaed, does not submit counter-affidavits within the ten (10) day period, the investigating officer shall resolve the complaint based on the evidence presented by the complainant.

(e) The investigating officer may set a hearing if there are facts and issues to be clarified from a party or a witness. The parties can be present at the hearing but without the right to examine or cross-examine. They may, however, submit to the investigating officer questions which may be asked to the party or witness concerned.

The hearing shall be held within ten (10) days from submission of the counter-affidavits and other documents or from the expiration of the period for their submission. It shall be terminated within five (5) days.

(f) Within ten (10) days after the investigation, the investigating officer shall determine whether or not there is sufficient ground to hold the respondent for trial. (3a)

Section 4. Resolution of investigating prosecutor and its review. — If the investigating prosecutor finds cause to hold the respondent for trial, he shall prepare the resolution and information. He shall certify under oath in the information that he, or as shown by the record, an authorized officer, has personally examined the complainant and his witnesses; that there is reasonable ground to believe that a crime has been committed and that the accused is probably guilty thereof; that the accused was informed of the complaint and of the evidence submitted against him; and that he was given an opportunity to submit controverting evidence. Otherwise, he shall recommend the dismissal of the complaint.

Within five (5) days from his resolution, he shall forward the record of the case to the provincial or city prosecutor or chief state prosecutor, or to the Ombudsman or his deputy in cases of offenses cognizable by the Sandiganbayan in the exercise of its original jurisdiction. They shall act on the resolution within ten (10) days from their receipt thereof and shall immediately inform the parties of such action.

No complaint or information may be filed or dismissed by an investigating prosecutor without the prior written authority or approval of the provincial or city prosecutor or chief state prosecutor or the Ombudsman or his deputy.

Where the investigating prosecutor recommends the dismissal of the complaint but his recommendation is disapproved by the provincial or city prosecutor or chief state prosecutor or the Ombudsman or his deputy on the ground that a probable cause exists, the latter may, by himself, file the information against the respondent, or direct any other assistant prosecutor or state prosecutor to do so without conducting another preliminary investigation.

If upon petition by a proper party under such rules as the Department of Justice may prescribe or motu proprio, the Secretary of Justice reverses or modifies the resolution of the provincial or city prosecutor or chief state prosecutor, he shall direct the prosecutor concerned either to file the corresponding information without conducting another preliminary investigation, or to dismiss or move for dismissal of the complaint or information with notice to the parties. The same rule shall apply in preliminary investigations conducted by the officers of the Office of the Ombudsman. (4a)

Section 5. Resolution of investigating judge and its review. — Within ten (10) days after the preliminary investigation, the investigating judge shall transmit the resolution of the case to the provincial or city prosecutor, or to the Ombudsman or his deputy in cases of offenses cognizable by the Sandiganbayan in the exercise of its original jurisdiction, for appropriate action. The resolution shall state the findings of facts and the law supporting his action, together with the record of the case which shall include: (a) the warrant, if the arrest is by virtue of a warrant; (b) the affidavits, counter-affidavits and other supporting evidence of the parties; © the undertaking or bail of the accused and the order for his release; (d) the transcripts of the proceedings during the preliminary investigation; and (e) the order of cancellation of his bail bond, if the resolution is for the dismissal of the complaint.

Within thirty (30) days from receipt of the records, the provincial or city prosecutor, or the Ombudsman or his deputy, as the case may be, shall review the resolution of the investigating judge on the existence of probable cause. Their ruling shall expressly and clearly state the facts and the law on which it is based and the parties shall be furnished with copies thereof. They shall order the release of an accused who is detained if no probable cause is found against him. (5a)

Section 6. When warrant of arrest may issue. — (a) By the Regional Trial Court. — Within ten (10) days from the filing of the complaint or information, the judge shall personally evaluate the resolution of the prosecutor and its supporting evidence. He may immediately dismiss the case if the evidence on record clearly fails to establish probable cause. If he finds probable cause, he shall issue a warrant of arrest, or a commitment order if the accused has already been arrested pursuant to a warrant issued by the judge who conducted the preliminary investigation or when the complaint or information was filed pursuant to section 7 of this Rule. In case of doubt on the existence of probable cause, the judge may order the prosecutor to present additional evidence within five (5) days from notice and the issue must be resolved by the court within thirty (30) days from the filing of the complaint of information.

(b) By the Municipal Trial Court. — When required pursuant to the second paragraph of section 1 of this Rule, the preliminary investigation of cases falling under the original jurisdiction of the Metropolitan Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court in Cities, Municipal Trial Court, or Municipal Circuit Trial Court may be conducted by either the judge or the prosecutor. When conducted by the prosecutor, the procedure for the issuance of a warrant or arrest by the judge shall be governed by paragraph (a) of this section. When the investigation is conducted by the judge himself, he shall follow the procedure provided in section 3 of this Rule. If the findings and recommendations are affirmed by the provincial or city prosecutor, or by the Ombudsman or his deputy, and the corresponding information is filed, he shall issue a warrant of arrest. However, without waiting for the conclusion of the investigation, the judge may issue a warrant of arrest if he finds after an examination in writing and under oath of the complainant and his witnesses in the form of searching question and answers, that a probable cause exists and that there is a necessity of placing the respondent under immediate custody in order not to frustrate the ends of justice.

© When warrant of arrest not necessary. — A warrant of arrest shall not issue if the accused is already under detention pursuant to a warrant issued by the municipal trial court in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, or if the complaint or information was filed pursuant to section 7 of this Rule or is for an offense penalized by fine only. The court shall then proceed in the exercise of its original jurisdiction. (6a)

Section 7. When accused lawfully arrested without warrant. — When a person is lawfully arrested without a warrant involving an offense which requires a preliminary investigation, the complaint or information may be filed by a prosecutor without need of such investigation provided an inquest has been conducted in accordance with existing rules. In the absence or unavailability of an inquest prosecutor, the complaint may be filed by the offended party or a peace office directly with the proper court on the basis of the affidavit of the offended party or arresting officer or person.

Before the complaint or information is filed, the person arrested may ask for a preliminary investigation in accordance with this Rule, but he must sign a waiver of the provisions of Article 125 of the Revised Penal Code, as amended, in the presence of his counsel. Notwithstanding the waiver, he may apply for bail and the investigation must be terminated within fifteen (15) days from its inception.

After the filing of the complaint or information in court without a preliminary investigation, the accused may, within five (5) days from the time he learns of its filing, ask for a preliminary investigation with the same right to adduce evidence in his defense as provided in this Rule. (7a; sec. 2, R.A. No. 7438)

Section 8. Records. — (a) Records supporting the information or complaint. — An information or complaint filed in court shall be supported by the affidavits and counter-affidavits of the parties and their witnesses, together with the other supporting evidence and the resolution on the case.

(b) Record of preliminary investigation. — The record of the preliminary investigation, whether conducted by a judge or a fiscal, shall not form part of the record of the case. However, the court, on its own initiative or on motion of any party, may order the production of the record or any its part when necessary in the resolution of the case or any incident therein, or when it is to be introduced as an evidence in the case by the requesting party. (8a)

Section 9. Cases not requiring a preliminary investigation nor covered by the Rule on Summary Procedure. —

(a) If filed with the prosecutor. — If the complaint is filed directly with the prosecutor involving an offense punishable by imprisonment of less four (4) years, two (2) months and one (1) day, the procedure outlined in section 3(a) of this Rule shall be observed. The prosecutor shall act on the complaint based on the affidavits and other supporting documents submitted by the complainant within ten (10) days from its filing.

(b) If filed with the Municipal Trial Court. — If the complaint or information is filed directly with the Municipal Trial Court or Municipal Circuit Trial Court for an offense covered by this section, the procedure in section 3(a) of this Rule shall be observed. If within ten (10) days after the filing of the complaint or information, the judge finds no probable cause after personally evaluating the evidence, or after personally examining in writing and under oath the complainant and his witnesses in the form of searching question and answers, he shall dismiss the same. He may, however, require the submission of additional evidence, within ten (10) days from notice, to determine further the existence of probable cause. If the judge still finds no probable cause despite the additional evidence, he shall, within ten (10) days from its submission or expiration of said period, dismiss the case. When he finds probable cause, he shall issue a warrant of arrest, or a commitment order if the accused had already been arrested, and hold him for trial. However, if the judge is satisfied that there is no necessity for placing the accused under custody, he may issue summons instead of a warrant of arrest. (9a)

RULE 113

Arrest

Section 1. Definition of arrest. — Arrest is the taking of a person into custody in order that he may be bound to answer for the commission of an offense. (1)

Section 2. Arrest; how made. — An arrest is made by an actual restraint of a person to be arrested, or by his submission to the custody of the person making the arrest.

No violence or unnecessary force shall be used in making an arrest. The person arrested shall not be subject to a greater restraint than is necessary for his detention. (2a)

Section 3. Duty of arresting officer. — It shall be the duty of the officer executing the warrant to arrest the accused and to deliver him to the nearest police station or jail without unnecessary delay. (3a)

Section 4. Execution of warrant. — The head of the office to whom the warrant of arrest was delivered for execution shall cause the warrant to be executed within ten (10) days from its receipt. Within ten (10) days after the expiration of the period, the officer to whom it was assigned for execution shall make a report to the judge who issued the warrant. In case of his failure to execute the warrant, he shall state the reasons therefor. (4a)

Section 5. Arrest without warrant; when lawful. — A peace officer or a private person may, without a warrant, arrest a person:

(a) When, in his presence, the person to be arrested has committed, is actually committing, or is attempting to commit an offense;

(b) When an offense has just been committed, and he has probable cause to believe based on personal knowledge of facts or circumstances that the person to be arrested has committed it; and

© When the person to be arrested is a prisoner who has escaped from a penal establishment or place where he is serving final judgment or is temporarily confined while his case is pending, or has escaped while being transferred from one confinement to another.

In cases falling under paragraph (a) and (b) above, the person arrested without a warrant shall be forthwith delivered to the nearest police station or jail and shall be proceeded against in accordance with section 7 of Rule 112. (5a)

Section 6. Time of making arrest. — An arrest may be made on any day and at any time of the day or night. (6)

Section 7. Method of arrest by officer by virtue of warrant. — When making an arrest by virtue of a warrant, the officer shall inform the person to be arrested of the cause of the arrest and of the fact that a warrant has been issued for his arrest, except when he flees or forcibly resists before the officer has opportunity to so inform him, or when the giving of such information will imperil the arrest. The officer need not have the warrant in his possession at the time of the arrest but after the arrest, if the person arrested so requires, the warrant shall be shown to him as soon as practicable. (7a)

Section 8. Method of arrest by officer without warrant. — When making an arrest without a warrant, the officer shall inform the person to be arrested of his authority and the cause of the arrest, unless the latter is either engaged in the commission of an offense, is pursued immediately after its commission, has escaped, flees or forcibly resists before the officer has opportunity so to inform him, or when the giving of such information will imperil the arrest. (8a)

Section 9. Method of arrest by private person. — When making an arrest, a private person shall inform the person to be arrested of the intention to arrest him and cause of the arrest, unless the latter is either engaged in the commission of an offense, is pursued immediately after its commission, or has escaped, flees, or forcibly resists before the person making the arrest has opportunity to so inform him, or when the giving of such information will imperil the arrest. (9a)

Section 10. Officer may summon assistance. — An officer making a lawful arrest may orally summon as many persons as he deems necessary to assist him in effecting the arrest. Every person so summoned by an officer shall assist him in effecting the arrest when he can render such assistance without detriment to himself. (10a)

Section 11. Right of officer to break into building or enclosure. — An officer, in order to make an arrest either by virtue of a warrant, or without a warrant as provided in section 5, may break into any building or enclosure where the person to be arrested is or is reasonably believed to be, if he is refused admittance thereto, after announcing his authority and purpose. (11a)

Section 12. Right to break out from building or enclosure. — Whenever an officer has entered the building or enclosure in accordance with the preceding section, he may break out therefrom when necessary to liberate himself. (12a)

Section 13. Arrest after escape or rescue. — If a person lawfully arrested escapes or is rescued, any person may immediately pursue or retake him without a warrant at any time and in any place within the Philippines. (13)

Section 14. Right of attorney or relative to visit person arrested. — Any member of the Philippine Bar shall, at the request of the person arrested or of another acting in his behalf, have the right to visit and confer privately with such person in the jail or any other place of custody at any hour of the day or night. Subject to reasonable regulations, a relative of the person arrested can also exercise the same right. (14a)

RULE 114

Bail

Section 1. Bail defined. — Bail is the security given for the release of a person in custody of the law, furnished by him or a bondsman, to guarantee his appearance before any court as required under the conditions hereinafter specified. Bail may be given in the form of corporate surety, property bond, cash deposit, or recognizance. (1a)

Section 2. Conditions of the bail; requirements. — All kinds of bail are subject to the following conditions:

(a) The undertaking shall be effective upon approval, and unless cancelled, shall remain in force at all stages of the case until promulgation of the judgment of the Regional Trial Court, irrespective of whether the case was originally filed in or appealed to it;

(b) The accused shall appear before the proper court whenever required by the court of these Rules;

© The failure of the accused to appear at the trial without justification and despite due notice shall be deemed a waiver of his right to be present thereat. In such case, the trial may proceed in absentia; and

(d) The bondsman shall surrender the accused to the court for execution of the final judgment.

The original papers shall state the full name and address of the accused, the amount of the undertaking and the conditions herein required. Photographs (passport size) taken within the last six (6) months showing the face, left and right profiles of the accused must be attached to the bail. (2a)

Section 3. No release or transfer except on court order or bail. — No person under detention by legal process shall be released or transferred except upon order of the court or when he is admitted to bail. (3a)

Section 4. Bail, a matter of right; exception. — All persons in custody shall be admitted to bail as a matter of right, with sufficient sureties, or released on recognize as prescribed by law or this Rule (a) before or after conviction by the Metropolitan Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court in Cities, or Municipal Circuit Trial Court, and (b) before conviction by the Regional Trial Court of an offense not punishable by death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment. (4a)

Section 5. Bail, when discretionary. — Upon conviction by the Regional Trial Court of an offense not punishable by death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment, admission to bail is discretionary. The application for bail may be filed and acted upon by the trial court despite the filing of a notice of appeal, provided it has not transmitted the original record to the appellate court. However, if the decision of the trial court convicting the accused changed the nature of the offense from non-bailable to bailable, the application for bail can only be filed with and resolved by the appellate court.

Should the court grant the application, the accused may be allowed to continue on provisional liberty during the pendency of the appeal under the same bail subject to the consent of the bondsman.

If the penalty imposed by the trial court is imprisonment exceeding six (6) years, the accused shall be denied bail, or his bail shall be cancelled upon a showing by the prosecution, with notice to the accused, of the following or other similar circumstances:

(a) That he is a recidivist, quasi-recidivist, or habitual delinquent, or has committed the crime aggravated by the circumstance of reiteration;

(b) That he has previously escaped from legal confinement, evaded sentence, or violated the conditions of his bail without valid justification;

© That he committed the offense while under probation, parole, or conditional pardon;

(d) That the circumstances of his case indicate the probability of flight if released on bail; or

(e) That there is undue risk that he may commit another crime during the pendency of the appeal.

The appellate court may, motu proprio or on motion of any party, review the resolution of the Regional Trial Court after notice to the adverse party in either case. (5a)

Section 6. Capital offense defined. — A capital offense is an offense which, under the law existing at the time of its commission and of the application for admission to bail, may be punished with death. (6a)

Section 7. Capital offense of an offense punishable by reclusion perpetua or life imprisonment, not bailable. — No person charged with a capital offense, or an offense punishable by reclusion perpetua or life imprisonment, shall be admitted to bail when evidence of guilt is strong, regardless of the stage of the criminal prosecution. (7a)

Section 8. Burden of proof in bail application. — At the hearing of an application for bail filed by a person who is in custody for the commission of an offense punishable by death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment, the prosecution has the burden of showing that evidence of guilt is strong. The evidence presented during the bail hearing shall be considered automatically reproduced at the trial, but upon motion of either party, the court may recall any witness for additional examination unless the latter is dead, outside the Philippines, or otherwise unable to testify. (8a)

Section 9. Amount of bail; guidelines. — The judge who issued the warrant or granted the application shall fix a reasonable amount of bail considering primarily, but not limited to, the following factors:

(a) Financial ability of the accused to give bail;

(b) Nature and circumstances of the offense;

© Penalty for the offense charged;

(d) Character and reputation of the accused;

(e) Age and health of the accused;

(f) Weight of the evidence against the accused;

(g) Probability of the accused appearing at the trial;

(h) Forfeiture of other bail;

(i) The fact that accused was a fugitive from justice when arrested; and

(j) Pendency of other cases where the accused is on bail.

Excessive bail shall not be required. (9a)

Section 10. Corporate surety. — Any domestic or foreign corporation, licensed as a surety in accordance with law and currently authorized to act as such, may provide bail by a bond subscribed jointly by the accused and an officer of the corporation duly authorized by its board of directors. (10a)

Section 11. Property bond, how posted. — A property bond is an undertaking constituted as lien on the real property given as security for the amount of the bail. Within ten (10) days after the approval of the bond, the accused shall cause the annotation of the lien on the certificate of title on file with the Register of Deeds if the land is registered, or if unregistered, in the Registration Book on the space provided therefor, in the Registry of Deeds for the province or city where the land lies, and on the corresponding tax declaration in the office of the provincial, city and municipal assessor concerned.

Within the same period, the accused shall submit to the court his compliance and his failure to do so shall be sufficient cause for the cancellation of the property bond and his re-arrest and detention. (11a)

Section 12. Qualifications of sureties in property bond. — The qualification of sureties in a property bond shall be as follows:

(a) Each must be a resident owner of real estate within the Philippines;

(b) Where there is only one surety, his real estate must be worth at least the amount of the undertaking;

© If there are two or more sureties, each may justify in an amount less than that expressed in the undertaking but the aggregate of the justified sums must be equivalent to the whole amount of bail demanded.

In all cases, every surety must be worth the amount specified in his own undertaking over and above all just debts, obligations and properties exempt from execution. (12a)

Section 13. Justification of sureties. — Every surety shall justify by affidavit taken before the judge that he possesses the qualifications prescribed in the preceding section. He shall describe the property given as security, stating the nature of his title, its encumbrances, the number and amount of other bails entered into by him and still undischarged, and his other liabilities. The court may examine the sureties upon oath concerning their sufficiency in such manner as it may deem proper. No bail shall be approved unless the surety is qualified. (13a)

Section 14. Deposit of cash as bail. — The accused or any person acting in his behalf may deposit in cash with the nearest collector or internal revenue or provincial, city, or municipal treasurer the amount of bail fixed by the court, or recommended by the prosecutor who investigated or filed the case. Upon submission of a proper certificate of deposit and a written undertaking showing compliance with the requirements of section 2 of this Rule, the accused shall be discharged from custody. The money deposited shall be considered as bail and applied to the payment of fine and costs while the excess, if any, shall be returned to the accused or to whoever made the deposit. (14a)

Section 15. Recognizance. — Whenever allowed by law or these Rules, the court may release a person in custody to his own recognizance or that of a responsible person. (15a)

Section 16. Bail, when not required; reduced bail or recognizance. — No bail shall be required when the law or these Rules so provide.

When a person has been in custody for a period equal to or more than the possible maximum imprisonment prescribe for the offense charged, he shall be released immediately, without prejudice to the continuation of the trial or the proceedings on appeal. If the maximum penalty to which the accused may be sentenced is destierro, he shall be released after thirty (30) days of preventive imprisonment.

A person in custody for a period equal to or more than the minimum of the principal penalty prescribed for the offense charged, without application of the Indeterminate Sentence Law or any modifying circumstance, shall be released on a reduced bail or on his own recognizance, at the discretion of the court. (16a)

Section 17. Bail, where filed. — (a) Bail in the amount fixed may be filed with the court where the case is pending, or in the absence or unavailability of the judge thereof, with any regional trial judge, metropolitan trial judge, municipal trial judge, or municipal circuit trial judge in the province, city, or municipality. If the accused is arrested in a province, city, or municipality other than where the case is pending, bail may also be filed with any regional trial court of said place, or if no judge thereof is available, with any metropolitan trial judge, municipal trial judge, or municipal circuit trial judge therein.

(b) Where the grant of bail is a matter of discretion, or the accused seeks to be released on recognizance, the application may only be filed in the court where the case is pending, whether on preliminary investigation, trial, or on appeal.

© Any person in custody who is not yet charged in court may apply for bail with any court in the province, city, or municipality where he is held. (17a)

Section 18. Notice of application to prosecutor. — In the application for bail under section 8 of this Rule, the court must give reasonable notice of the hearing to the prosecutor or require him to submit his recommendation. (18a)

Section 19. Release on bail. — The accused must be discharged upon approval of the bail by the judge with whom it was filed in accordance with section 17 of this Rule.

Whenever bail is filed with a court other than where the case is pending, the judge who accepted the bail shall forward it, together with the order of release and other supporting papers, to the court where the case is pending, which may, for good reason, require a different one to be filed. (19a)

Section 20. Increase or reduction of bail. — After the accused is admitted to bail, the court may, upon good cause, either increase or reduce its amount. When increased, the accused may be committed to custody if he does not give bail in the increased amount within a reasonable period. An accused held to answer a criminal charge, who is released without bail upon filing of the complaint or information, may, at any subsequent stage of the proceedings and whenever a strong showing of guilt appears to the court, be required to give bail in the amount fixed, or in lieu thereof, committed to custody. (20a)

Section 21. Forfeiture of bond. — When the presence of the accused is required by the court or these Rules, his bondsmen shall be notified to produce him before the court on a given date and time. If the accused fails to appear in person as required, his bail shall be declared forfeited and the bondsmen given thirty (30) days within which to produce their principal and to show cause why no judgment should be rendered against them for the amount of their bail. Within the said period, the bondsmen must:

(a) produce the body of their principal or give the reason for his non-production; and

(b) explain why the accused did not appear before the court when first required to do so.

Failing in these two requisites, a judgment shall be rendered against the bondsmen, jointly and severally, for the amount of the bail. The court shall not reduce or otherwise mitigate the liability of the bondsmen, unless the accused has been surrendered or is acquitted. (21a)

Section 22. Cancellation of bail. — Upon application of the bondsmen, with due notice to the prosecutor, the bail may be cancelled upon surrender of the accused or proof of his death.

The bail shall be deemed automatically cancelled upon acquittal of the accused, dismissal of the case, or execution of the judgment of conviction.

In all instances, the cancellation shall be without prejudice to any liability on the bond. (22a)

Section 23. Arrest of accused out on bail. — For the purpose of surrendering the accused, the bondsmen may arrest him or, upon written authority endorsed on a certified copy of the undertaking, cause him to be arrested by a police officer or any other person of suitable age and discretion.

An accused released on bail may be re-arrested without the necessity of a warrant if he attempts to depart from the Philippines without permission of the court where the case is pending. (23a)

Section 24. No bail after final judgment; exception. — No bail shall be allowed after the judgment of conviction has become final. If before such finality, the accused has applies for probation, he may be allowed temporary liberty under his bail. When no bail was filed or the accused is incapable of filing one, the court may allow his release on recognizance to the custody of a responsible member of the community. In no case shall bail be allowed after the accused has commenced to serve sentence. (24a)

Section 25. Court supervision of detainees. — The court shall exercise supervision over all persons in custody for the purpose of eliminating unnecessary detention. The executive judges of the Regional Trial Courts shall conduct monthly personal inspections of provincial, city, and municipal jails and their prisoners within their respective jurisdictions. They shall ascertain the number of detainees, inquire on their proper accommodation and health and examine the condition of the jail facilities. They shall order the segregation of sexes and of minors from adults, ensure the observance of the right of detainees to confer privately with counsel, and strive to eliminate conditions inimical to the detainees.

In cities and municipalities to be specified by the Supreme Court, the municipal trial judges or municipal circuit trial judges shall conduct monthly personal inspections of the municipal jails in their respective municipalities and submit a report to the executive judge of the Regional Trial Court having jurisdiction therein.

A monthly report of such visitation shall be submitted by the executive judges to the Court Administrator which shall state the total number of detainees, the names of those held for more than thirty (30) days, the duration of detention, the crime charged, the status of the case, the cause for detention, and other pertinent information. (25a)

Section 26. Bail not a bar to objections on illegal arrest, lack of or irregular preliminary investigation. — An application for or admission to bail shall not bar the accused from challenging the validity of his arrest or the legality of the warrant issued therefor, or from assailing the regularity or questioning the absence of a preliminary investigation of the charge against him, provided that he raises them before entering his plea. The court shall resolve the matter as early as practicable but not later than the start of the trial of the case. (n)

RULE 115

Rights of Accused

Section 1. Rights of accused at the trial. — In all criminal prosecutions, the accused shall be entitled to the following rights:

(a) To be presumed innocent until the contrary is proved beyond reasonable doubt.

(b) To be informed of the nature and cause of the accusation against him.

© To be present and defend in person and by counsel at every stage of the proceedings, from arraignment to promulgation of the judgment. The accused may, however, waive his presence at the trial pursuant to the stipulations set forth in his bail, unless his presence is specifically ordered by the court for purposes of identification. The absence of the accused without justifiable cause at the trial of which he had notice shall be considered a waiver of his right to be present thereat. When an accused under custody escapes, he shall be deemed to have waived his right to be present on all subsequent trial dates until custody over him is regained. Upon motion, the accused may be allowed to defend himself in person when it sufficiently appears to the court that he can properly protect his right without the assistance of counsel.

(d) To testify as a witness in his own behalf but subject to cross-examination on matters covered by direct examination. His silence shall not in any manner prejudice him.

(e) To be exempt from being compelled to be a witness against himself.

(f) To confront and cross-examine the witnesses against him at the trial. Either party may utilize as part of its evidence the testimony of a witness who is deceased, out of or can not with due diligence be found in the Philippines, unavailable or otherwise unable to testify, given in another case or proceeding, judicial or administrative, involving the same parties and subject matter, the adverse party having the opportunity to cross-examine him.

(g) To have compulsory process issued to secure the attendance of witnesses and production of other evidence in his behalf.

(h) To have speedy, impartial and public trial.

(i) To appeal in all cases allowed and in the manner prescribed by law. (1a)

RULE 116

Arraignment and Plea

Section 1. Arraignment and plea; how made. —

(a) The accused must be arraigned before the court where the complaint or information was filed or assigned for trial. The arraignment shall be made in open court by the judge or clerk by furnishing the accused with a copy of the complaint or information, reading the same in the language or dialect known to him, and asking him whether he pleads guilty or not guilty. The prosecution may call at the trial witnesses other than those named in the complaint or information.

(b) The accused must be present at the arraignment and must personally enter his plea. Both arraignment and plea shall be made of record, but failure to do so shall not affect the validity of the proceedings.

© When the accused refuses to plead or makes a conditional plea, a plea of not guilty shall be entered for him. (1a)

(d) When the accused pleads guilty but presents exculpatory evidence, his plea shall be deemed withdrawn and a plea of not guilty shall be entered for him. (n)

(e) When the accused is under preventive detention, his case shall be raffled and its records transmitted to the judge to whom the case was raffled within three (3) days from the filing of the information or complaint. The accused shall be arraigned within ten (10) days from the date of the raffle. The pre-trial conference of his case shall be held within ten (10) days after arraignment. (n)

(f) The private offended party shall be required to appear at the arraignment for purposes of plea bargaining, determination of civil liability, and other matters requiring his presence. In case of failure of the offended party to appear despite due notice, the court may allow the accused to enter a plea of guilty to a lesser offense which is necessarily included in the offense charged with the conformity of the trial prosecutor alone. (cir. 1-89)

(g) Unless a shorter period is provided by special law or Supreme Court circular, the arraignment shall be held within thirty (30) days from the date the court acquires jurisdiction over the person of the accused. The time of the pendency of a motion to quash or for a bill of particulars or other causes justifying suspension of the arraignment shall be excluded in computing the period. (sec. 2, cir. 38-98)

Section 2. Plea of guilty to a lesser offense. — At arraignment, the accused, with the consent of the offended party and the prosecutor, may be allowed by the trial court to plead guilty to a lesser offense which is necessarily included in the offense charged. After arraignment but before trial, the accused may still be allowed to plead guilty to said lesser offense after withdrawing his plea of not guilty. No amendment of the complaint or information is necessary. (sec. 4, circ. 38-98)

Section 3. Plea of guilty to capital offense; reception of evidence. — When the accused pleads guilty to a capital offense, the court shall conduct a searching inquiry into the voluntariness and full comprehension of the consequences of his plea and require the prosecution to prove his guilt and the precise degree of culpability. The accused may present evidence in his behalf. (3a)

Section 4. Plea of guilty to non-capital offense; reception of evidence, discretionary. — When the accused pleads guilty to a non-capital offense, the court may receive evidence from the parties to determine the penalty to be imposed. (4)

Section 5. Withdrawal of improvident plea of guilty. — At any time before the judgment of conviction becomes final, the court may permit an improvident plea of guilty to be withdrawn and be substituted by a plea of not guilty. (5)

Section 6. Duty of court to inform accused of his right to counsel. — Before arraignment, the court shall inform the accused of his right to counsel and ask him if he desires to have one. Unless the accused is allowed to defend himself in person or has employed a counsel of his choice, the court must assign a counsel de oficio to defend him. (6a)

Section 7. Appointment of counsel de oficio. — The court, considering the gravity of the offense and the difficulty of the questions that may arise, shall appoint as counsel de oficio only such members of the bar in good standing who, by reason of their experience and ability, can competently defend the accused. But in localities where such members of the bar are not available, the court may appoint any person, resident of the province and of good repute for probity and ability, to defend the accused. (7a)

Section 8. Time for counsel de oficio to prepare for arraignment. — Whenever a counsel de oficio is appointed by the court to defend the accused at the arraignment, he shall be given a reasonable time to consult with the accused as to his plea before proceeding with the arraignment. (8)

Section 9. Bill of particulars. — The accused may, before arraignment, move for a bill of particulars to enable him properly to plead and to prepare for trial. The motion shall specify the alleged defects of the complaint or information and the details desired. (10a)

Section 10. Production or inspection of material evidence in possession of prosecution. — Upon motion of the accused showing good cause and with notice to the parties, the court, in order to prevent surprise, suppression, or alteration, may order the prosecution to produce and permit the inspection and copying or photographing of any written statement given by the complainant and other witnesses in any investigation of the offense conducted by the prosecution or other investigating officers, as well as any designated documents, papers, books, accounts, letters, photographs, objects or tangible things not otherwise privileged, which constitute or contain evidence material to any matter involved in the case and which are in the possession or under the control of the prosecution, police, or other law investigating agencies. (11a)

Section 11. Suspension of arraignment. — Upon motion by the proper party, the arraignment shall be suspended in the following cases:

(a) The accused appears to be suffering from an unsound mental condition which effective renders him unable to fully understand the charge against him and to plead intelligently thereto. In such case, the court shall order his mental examination and, if necessary, his confinement for such purpose;

(b) There exists a prejudicial question; and

© A petition for review of the resolution of the prosecutor is pending at either the Department of Justice, or the Office of the President; provided, that the period of suspension shall not exceed sixty (60) days counted from the filing of the petition with the reviewing office. (12a)

RULE 117

Motion to Quash

Section 1. Time to move to quash. — At any time before entering his plea, the accused may move to quash the complaint or information. (1)

Section 2. Form and contents. — The motion to quash shall be in writing, signed by the accused or his counsel and shall distinctly specify its factual and legal grounds. The court shall consider no ground other than those stated in the motion, except lack of jurisdiction over the offense charged. (2a)

Section 3. Grounds. — The accused may move to quash the complaint or information on any of the following grounds:

(a) That the facts charged do not constitute an offense;

(b) That the court trying the case has no jurisdiction over the offense charged;

© That the court trying the case has no jurisdiction over the person of the accused;

(d) That the officer who filed the information had no authority to do so;

(e) That it does not conform substantially to the prescribed form;

(f) That more than one offense is charged except when a single punishment for various offenses is prescribed by law;

(g) That the criminal action or liability has been extinguished;

(h) That it contains averments which, if true, would constitute a legal excuse or justification; and

(i) That the accused has been previously convicted or acquitted of the offense charged, or the case against him was dismissed or otherwise terminated without his express consent. (3a)

Section 4. Amendment of the complaint or information. — If the motion to quash is based on an alleged defect of the complaint or information which can be cured by amendment, the court shall order that an amendment be made. (4a)

If it is based on the ground that the facts charged do not constitute an offense, the prosecution shall be given by the court an opportunity to correct the defect by amendment. The motion shall be granted if the prosecution fails to make the amendment, or the complaint or information still suffers from the same defect despite the amendment. (n)

Section 5. Effect of sustaining the motion to quash. — If the motion to quash is sustained, the court may order that another complaint or information be filed except as provided in section 6 of this rule. If the order is made, the accused, if in custody, shall not be discharged unless admitted to bail. If no order is made or if having been made, no new information is filed within the time specified in the order or within such further time as the court may allow for good cause, the accused, if in custody, shall be discharged unless he is also in custody for another charge. (5a)

Section 6. Order sustaining the motion to quash not a bar to another prosecution; exception. — An order sustaining the motion to quash is not a bar to another prosecution for the same offense unless the motion was based on the grounds specified in section 3 (g) and (i) of this Rule. (6a)

Section 7. Former conviction or acquittal; double jeopardy. — When an accused has been convicted or acquitted, or the case against him dismissed or otherwise terminated without his express consent by a court of competent jurisdiction, upon a valid complaint or information or other formal charge sufficient in form and substance to sustain a conviction and after the accused had pleaded to the charge, the conviction or acquittal of the accused or the dismissal of the case shall be a bar to another prosecution for the offense charged, or for any attempt to commit the same or frustration thereof, or for any offense which necessarily includes or is necessarily included in the offense charged in the former complaint or information.

However, the conviction of the accused shall not be a bar to another prosecution for an offense which necessarily includes the offense charged in the former complaint or information under any of the following instances:

(a) the graver offense developed due to supervening facts arising from the same act or omission constituting the former charge;

(b) the facts constituting the graver charge became known or were discovered only after a plea was entered in the former complaint or information; or

© the plea of guilty to the lesser offense was made without the consent of the prosecutor and of the offended party except as provided in section 1 (f) of Rule 116.

In any of the foregoing cases, where the accused satisfies or serves in whole or in part the judgment, he shall be credited with the same in the event of conviction for the graver offense. (7a)

Section 8. Provisional dismissal. — A case shall not be provisionally dismissed except with the express consent of the accused and with notice to the offended party.

The provisional dismissal of offenses punishable by imprisonment not exceeding six (6) years or a fine of any amount, or both, shall become permanent one (1) year after issuance of the order without the case having been revived. With respect to offenses punishable by imprisonment of more than six (6) years, their provisional dismissal shall become permanent two (2) years after issuance of the order without the case having been revived. (n)

Section 9. Failure to move to quash or to allege any ground therefor. — The failure of the accused to assert any ground of a motion to quash before he pleads to the complaint or information, either because he did not file a motion to quash or failed to allege the same in said motion, shall be deemed a waiver of any objections based on the grounds provided for in paragraphs (a), (b), (g), and (i) of section 3 of this Rule. (8)

RULE 118

Pre-Trial

Section 1. Pre-trial; mandatory in criminal cases. — In all criminal cases cognizable by the Sandiganbayan, Regional Trial Court, Metropolitan Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court in Cities, Municipal Trial Court and Municipal Circuit Trial Court, the court shall after arraignment and within thirty (30) days from the date the court acquires jurisdiction over the person of the accused, unless a shorter period is provided for in special laws or circulars of the Supreme Court, order a pre-trial conference to consider the following:

(a) plea bargaining;

(b) stipulation of facts;

© marking for identification of evidence of the parties;

(d) waiver of objections to admissibility of evidence;

(e) modification of the order of trial if the accused admits the charge but interposes a lawful defense; and

(f) such other matters as will promote a fair and expeditious trial of the criminal and civil aspects of the case. (secs. 2 and 3, cir. 38-98)

Section 2. Pre-trial agreement. — All agreements or admissions made or entered during the pre-trial conference shall be reduced in writing and signed by the accused and counsel, otherwise, they cannot be used against the accused. The agreements covering the matters referred to in section 1 of this Rule shall be approved by the court. (sec. 4, cir. 38-98)

Section 3. Non-appearance at pre-trial conference. — If the counsel for the accused or the prosecutor does not appear at the pre-trial conference and does not offer an acceptable excuse for his lack of cooperation, the court may impose proper sanctions or penalties. (se. 5, cir. 38-98)

Section 4. Pre-trial order. — After the pre-trial conference, the court shall issue an order reciting the actions taken, the facts stipulated, and evidence marked. Such order shall bind the parties, limit the trial to matters not disposed of, and control the course of the action during the trial, unless modified by the court to prevent manifest injustice. (3)

RULE 119

Trial

Section 1. Time to prepare for trial. — After a plea of not guilty is entered, the accused shall have at least fifteen (15) days to prepare for trial. The trial shall commence within thirty (30) days from receipt of the pre-trial order. (sec. 6, cir. 38-98)

Section 2. Continuous trial until terminated; postponements. — Trial once commenced shall continue from day to day as far as practicable until terminated. It may be postponed for a reasonable period of time for good cause. (2a)

The court shall, after consultation with the prosecutor and defense counsel, set the case for continuous trial on a weekly or other short-term trial calendar at the earliest possible time so as to ensure speedy trial. In no case shall the entire trial period exceed one hundred eighty (180) days from the first day of trial, except as otherwise authorized by the Supreme Court. (sec. 8, cir. 38-98).

The time limitations provided under this section and the preceding section shall not apply where special laws or circulars of the Supreme Court provide for a shorter period of trial. (n)

Section 3. Exclusions. — The following periods of delay shall be excluded in computing the time within which trial must commence:

(a) Any period of delay resulting from other proceedings concerning the accused, including but not limited to the following:

(1) Delay resulting from an examination of the physical and mental condition of the accused;

(2) Delay resulting from proceedings with respect to other criminal charges against the accused;

(3) Delay resulting from extraordinary remedies against interlocutory orders;

(4) Delay resulting from pre-trial proceedings; provided, that the delay does not exceed thirty (30) days;

(5) Delay resulting from orders of inhibition, or proceedings relating to change of venue of cases or transfer from other courts;

(6) Delay resulting from a finding of the existence of a prejudicial question; and

(7) Delay reasonably attributable to any period, not exceed thirty (30) days, during which any proceeding which any proceeding concerning the accused is actually under advisement.

(b) Any period of delay resulting from the absence or unavailability of an essential witness.

For purposes of this subparagraph, an essential witness shall be considered absent when his whereabouts are unknown or his whereabouts cannot be determined by due diligence. He shall be considered unavailable whenever his whereabouts are known but his presence for trial cannot be obtained by due diligence.

© Any period of delay resulting from the mental incompetence or physical inability of the accused to stand trial.

(d) If the information is dismissed upon motion of the prosecution and thereafter a charge is filed against the accused for the same offense, any period of delay from the date the charge was dismissed to the date the time limitation would commence to run as to the subsequent charge had there been no previous charge.

(e) A reasonable period of delay when the accused is joined for trial with a co-accused over whom the court has not acquired jurisdiction, or, as to whom the time for trial has not run and no motion for separate trial has been granted.

(f) Any period of delay resulting from a continuance granted by any court motu proprio, or on motion of either the accused or his counsel, or the prosecution, if the court granted the continuance on the basis of its findings set forth in the order that the ends of justice served by taking such action outweigh the best interest of the public and the accused in a speedy trial. (sec. 9, cir. 38-98)

Section 4. Factors for granting continuance. — The following factors, among others, shall be considered by a court in determining whether to grant a continuance under section 3(f) of this Rule.

(a) Whether or not the failure to grant a continuance in the proceeding would likely make a continuation of such proceeding impossible or result in a miscarriage of justice; and

(b) Whether or not the case taken as a whole is so novel, unusual and complex, due to the number of accused or the nature of the prosecution, or that it is unreasonable to expect adequate preparation within the periods of time established therein.

In addition, no continuance under section 3(f) of this Rule shall be granted because of congestion of the court’s calendar or lack of diligent preparation or failure to obtain available witnesses on the part of the prosecutor. (sec. 10, cir. 38-98)

Section 5. Time limit following an order for new trial. — If the accused is to be tried again pursuant to an order for a new trial, the trial shall commence within thirty (30) days from notice of the order, provided that if the period becomes impractical due to unavailability of witnesses and other factors, the court may extend it but not to exceed one hundred eighty (180) days from notice of said order for a new trial. (sec. 11, cir. 38-98)

Section 6. Extended time limit. — Notwithstanding the provisions of section 1(g), Rule 116 and the preceding section 1, for the first twelve-calendar-month period following its effectivity on September 15, 1998, the time limit with respect to the period from arraignment to trial imposed by said provision shall be one hundred eighty (180) days. For the second twelve-month period, the limit shall be one hundred twenty (120) days, and for the third twelve-month period, the time limit shall be eighty (80) days. (sec. 7, cir. 38-98)

Section 7. Public attorney’s duties where accused is imprisoned. — If the public attorney assigned to defend a person charged with a crime knows that the latter is preventively detained, either because he is charged with a bailable crime but has no means to post bail, or, is charged with a non-bailable crime, or, is serving a term of imprisonment in any penal institution, it shall be his duty to do the following:

(a) Shall promptly undertake to obtain the presence of the prisoner for trial or cause a notice to be served on the person having custody of the prisoner requiring such person to so advise the prisoner of his right to demand trial.

(b) Upon receipt of that notice, the custodian of the prisoner shall promptly advise the prisoner of the charge and of his right to demand trial. If at anytime thereafter the prisoner informs his custodian that he demands such trial, the latter shall cause notice to that effect to sent promptly to the public attorney.

© Upon receipt of such notice, the public attorney shall promptly seek to obtain the presence of the prisoner for trial.

(d) When the custodian of the prisoner receives from the public attorney a properly supported request for the availability of the prisoner for purposes of trial, the prisoner shall be made available accordingly. (sec. 12, cir. 38-98)

Section 8. Sanctions. — In any case in which private counsel for the accused, the public attorney, or the prosecutor.

(a) Knowingly allows the case to be set for trial without disclosing that a necessary witness would be unavailable for trial;

(b) Files a motion solely for delay which he knows is totally frivolous and without merit;

© Makes a statement for the purpose of obtaining continuance which he knows to be false and which is material to the granting of a continuance; or

(d) Willfully fails to proceed to trial without justification consistent with the provisions hereof, the court may punish such counsel, attorney, or prosecution, as follows:

(1) By imposing on a counsel privately retained in connection with the defense of an accused, a fine not exceeding twenty thousand pesos (P20,000.00);

(2) By imposing on any appointed counsel de oficio, public attorney, or prosecutor a fine not exceeding five thousand pesos (P5,000.00); and

(3) By denying any defense counsel or prosecutor the right to practice before the court trying the case for a period not exceeding thirty (30) days. The punishment provided for by this section shall be without prejudice to any appropriate criminal action or other sanction authorized under these rules. (sec. 13, cir. 38-98)

Section 9. Remedy where accused is not brought to trial within the time limit. — If the accused is not brought to trial within the time limit required by Section 1(g), Rule 116 and Section 1, as extended by Section 6 of this rule, the information may be dismissed on motion of the accused on the ground of denial of his right of speedy trial. The accused shall have the burden of proving the motion but the prosecution shall have the burden of going forward with the evidence to establish the exclusion of time under section 3 of this rule. The dismissal shall be subject to the rules on double jeopardy.

Failure of the accused to move for dismissal prior to trial shall constitute a waiver of the right to dismiss under this section. (sec. 14, cir. 38-98)

Section 10. Law on speedy trial not a bar to provision on speedy trial in the Constitution. — No provision of law on speedy trial and no rule implementing the same shall be interpreted as a bar to any charge of denial of the right to speedy trial guaranteed by section 14(2), article III, of the 1987 Constitution. (sec. 15, cir. 38-98)

Section 11. Order of trial. — The trial shall proceed in the following order:

(a) The prosecution shall present evidence to prove the charge and, in the proper case, the civil liability.

(b) The accused may present evidence to prove his defense, and damages, if any, arising from the issuance of a provisional remedy in the case.

© The prosecution and the defense may, in that order, present rebuttal and sur-rebuttal evidence unless the court, in furtherance of justice, permits them to present additional evidence bearing upon the main issue.

(d) Upon admission of the evidence of the parties, the case shall be deemed submitted for decision unless the court directs them to argue orally or to submit written memoranda.

(e) When the accused admits the act or omission charged in the complaint or information but interposes a lawful defense, the order of trial may be modified. (3a)

Section 12. Application for examination of witness for accused before trial. —When the accused has been held to answer for an offense, he may, upon motion with notice to the other parties, have witnesses conditionally examined in his behalf. The motion shall state: (a) the name and residence of the witness; (b) the substance of his testimony; and © that the witness is sick or infirm as to afford reasonable ground for believing that he will not be able to attend the trial, or resides more than one hundred (100) kilometers from the place of trial and has no means to attend the same, or that other similar circumstances exist that would make him unavailable or prevent him from attending the trial. The motion shall be supported by an affidavit of the accused and such other evidence as the court may require. (4a)

Section 13. Examination of defense witness; how made. — If the court is satisfied that the examination of a witness for the accused is necessary, an order will be made directing that the witness be examined at a specified date, time and place and that a copy of the order be served on the prosecutor at least three (3) days before the scheduled examination. The examination shall be taken before a judge, or, if not practicable, a member of the Bar in good standing so designated by the judge in the order, or if the order be made by a court of superior jurisdiction, before an inferior court to be designated therein. The examination shall proceed notwithstanding the absence of the prosecutor provided he was duly notified of the hearing. A written record of the testimony shall be taken. (5a)

Section 14. Bail to secure appearance of material witness. — When the court is satisfied, upon proof or oath, that a material witness will not testify when required, it may, upon motion of either party, order the witness to post bail in such sum as may be deemed proper. Upon refusal to post bail, the court shall commit him to prison until he complies or is legally discharged after his testimony has been taken. (6a)

Section 15. Examination of witness for the prosecution. — When it satisfactorily appears that a witness for the prosecution is too sick or infirm to appear at the trial as directed by the order of the court, or has to leave the Philippines with no definite date of returning, he may forthwith be conditionally examined before the court where the case is pending. Such examination, in the presence of the accused, or in his absence after reasonable notice to attend the examination has been served on him, shall be conducted in the same manner as an examination at the trial. Failure or refusal of the accused to attend the examination after notice shall be considered a waiver. The statement taken may be admitted in behalf of or against the accused. (7a)

Section 16. Trial of several accused. — When two or more accused are jointly charged with any offense, they shall be tried jointly unless the court, in its discretion and upon motion of the prosecutor or any accused, orders separate trial for one or more accused. (8a)

Section 17. Discharge of accused to be state witness. — When two or more persons are jointly charged with the commission of any offense, upon motion of the prosecution before resting its case, the court may direct one or more of the accused to be discharged with their consent so that they may be witnesses for the state when, after requiring the prosecution to present evidence and the sworn statement of each proposed state witness at a hearing in support of the discharge, the court is satisfied that:

(a) There is absolute necessity for the testimony of the accused whose discharge is requested;

(b) The is no other direct evidence available for the proper prosecution of the offense committed, except the testimony of said accused;

© The testimony of said accused can be substantially corroborated in its material points;

(d) Said accused does not appear to be the most guilty; and

(e) Said accused has not at any time been convicted of any offense involving moral turpitude.

Evidence adduced in support of the discharge shall automatically form part of the trial. If the court denies the motion for discharge of the accused as state witness, his sworn statement shall be inadmissible in evidence. (9a)

Section 18. Discharge of accused operates as acquittal. — The order indicated in the preceding section shall amount to an acquittal of the discharged accused and shall be a bar to future prosecution for the same offense, unless the accused fails or refuses to testify against his co-accused in accordance with his sworn statement constituting the basis for the discharge. (10a)

Section 19. When mistake has been made in charging the proper offense. — When it becomes manifest at any time before judgment that a mistake has been made in charging the proper offense and the accused cannot be convicted of the offense charged or any other offense necessarily included therein, the accused shall not be discharged if there appears good cause to detain him. In such case, the court shall commit the accused to answer for the proper offense and dismiss the original case upon the filing of the proper information. (11a)

Section 20. Appointment of acting prosecutor. — When a prosecutor, his assistant or deputy is disqualified to act due to any of the grounds stated in section 1 of Rule 137 or for any other reasons, the judge or the prosecutor shall communicate with the Secretary of Justice in order that the latter may appoint an acting prosecutor. (12a)

Section 21. Exclusion of the public. — The judge may, motu proprio, exclude the public from the courtroom if the evidence to be produced during the trial is offensive to decency or public morals. He may also, on motion of the accused, exclude the public from the trial, except court personnel and the counsel of the parties. (13a)

Section 22. Consolidation of trials of related offenses. — Charges for offenses founded on the same facts or forming part of a series of offenses of similar character may be tried jointly at the discretion of the court. (14a)

Section 23. Demurrer to evidence. — After the prosecution rests its case, the court may dismiss the action on the ground of insufficiency of evidence (1) on its own initiative after giving the prosecution the opportunity to be heard or (2) upon demurrer to evidence filed by the accused with or without leave of court.

If the court denies the demurrer to evidence filed with leave of court, the accused may adduce evidence in his defense. When the demurrer to evidence is filed without leave of court, the accused waives the right to present evidence and submits the case for judgment on the basis of the evidence for the prosecution. (15a)

The motion for leave of court to file demurrer to evidence shall specifically state its grounds and shall be filed within a non-extendible period of five (5) days after the prosecution rests its case. The prosecution may oppose the motion within a non-extendible period of five (5) days from its receipt.

If leave of court is granted, the accused shall file the demurrer to evidence within a non-extendible period of ten (10) days from notice. The prosecution may oppose the demurrer to evidence within a similar period from its receipt.

The order denying the motion for leave of court to file demurrer to evidence or the demurrer itself shall not be reviewable by appeal or by certiorari before judgment. (n)

Section 24. Reopening. — At any time before finality of the judgment of conviction, the judge may, motu proprio or upon motion, with hearing in either case, reopen the proceedings to avoid a miscarrage of justice. The proceedings shall be terminated within thirty (30) days from the order grating it. (n)

RULE 120

Judgment

Section 1. Judgment definition and form. — Judgment is the adjudication by the court that the accused is guilty or not guilty of the offense charged and the imposition on him of the proper penalty and civil liability, if any. It must be written in the official language, personally and directly prepared by the judge and signed by him and shall contain clearly and distinctly a statement of the facts and the law upon which it is based. (1a)

Section 2. Contents of the judgment. — If the judgment is of conviction, it shall state (1) the legal qualification of the offense constituted by the acts committed by the accused and the aggravating or mitigating circumstances which attended its commission; (2) the participation of the accused in the offense, whether as principal, accomplice, or accessory after the fact; (3) the penalty imposed upon the accused; and (4) the civil liability or damages caused by his wrongful act or omission to be recovered from the accused by the offended party, if there is any, unless the enforcement of the civil liability by a separate civil action has been reserved or waived.

In case the judgment is of acquittal, it shall state whether the evidence of the prosecution absolutely failed to prove the guilt of the accused or merely failed to prove his guilt beyond reasonable doubt. In either case, the judgment shall determine if the act or omission from which the civil liability might arise did not exist. (2a)

Section 3. Judgment for two or more offenses. — When two or more offenses are charged in a single complaint or information but the accused fails to object to it before trial, the court may convict him of as many offenses as are charged and proved, and impose on him the penalty for each offense, setting out separately the findings of fact and law in each offense. (3a)

Section 4. Judgment in case of variance between allegation and proof. — When there is variance between the offense charged in the complaint or information and that proved, and the offense as charged is included in or necessarily includes the offense proved, the accused shall be convicted of the offense proved which is included in the offense charged, or of the offense charged which is included in the offense proved. (4a)

Section 5. When an offense includes or is included in another. — An offense charged necessarily includes the offense proved when some of the essential elements or ingredients of the former, as alleged in the complaint or information, constitute the latter. And an offense charged is necessarily included in the offense proved, when the essential ingredients of the former constitute or form a part of those constituting the latter. (5a)

Section 6. Promulgation of judgment. — The judgment is promulgated by reading it in the presence of the accused and any judge of the court in which it was rendered. However, if the conviction is for a light offense, the judgment may be pronounced in the presence of his counsel or representative. When the judge is absent or outside of the province or city, the judgment may be promulgated by the clerk of court.

If the accused is confined or detained in another province or city, the judgment may be promulgated by the executive judge of the Regional Trial Court having jurisdiction over the place of confinement or detention upon request of the court which rendered the judgment. The court promulgating the judgment shall have authority to accept the notice of appeal and to approve the bail bond pending appeal; provided, that if the decision of the trial court convicting the accused changed the nature of the offense from non-bailable to bailable, the application for bail can only be filed and resolved by the appellate court.

The proper clerk of court shall give notice to the accused personally or through his bondsman or warden and counsel, requiring him to be present at the promulgation of the decision. If the accused tried in absentia because he jumped bail or escaped from prison, the notice to him shall be served at his last known address.

In case the accused fails to appear at the scheduled date of promulgation of judgment despite notice, the promulgation shall be made by recording the judgment in the criminal docket and serving him a copy thereof at his last known address or thru his counsel.

If the judgment is for conviction and the failure of the accused to appear was without justifiable cause, he shall lose the remedies available in these rules against the judgment and the court shall order his arrest. Within fifteen (15) days from promulgation of judgment, however, the accused may surrender and file a motion for leave of court to avail of these remedies. He shall state the reasons for his absence at the scheduled promulgation and if he proves that his absence was for a justifiable cause, he shall be allowed to avail of said remedies within fifteen (15) days from notice. (6a)

Section 7. Modification of judgment. — A judgment of conviction may, upon motion of the accused, be modified or set aside before it becomes final or before appeal is perfected. Except where the death penalty is imposed, a judgment becomes final after the lapse of the period for perfecting an appeal, or when the sentence has been partially or totally satisfied or served, or when the accused has waived in writing his right to appeal, or has applied for probation. (7a)

Section 8. Entry of judgment. — After a judgment has become final, it shall be entered in accordance with Rule 36. (8)

Section 9. Existing provisions governing suspension of sentence, probation and parole not affected by this Rule. — Nothing in this Rule shall affect any existing provisions in the laws governing suspension of sentence, probation or parole. (9a)

RULE 121

New Trial or Reconsideration

Section 1. New trial or reconsideration. — At any time before a judgment of conviction becomes final, the court may, on motion of the accused or at its own instance but with the consent of the accused, grant a new trial or reconsideration. (1a)

Section 2. Grounds for a new trial. — The court shall grant a new trial on any of the following grounds:

(a) The errors of law or irregularities prejudicial to the substantial rights of the accused have been committed during the trial;

(b) The new and material evidence has been discovered which the accused could not with reasonable diligence have discovered and produced at the trial and which if introduced and admitted would probably change the judgment. (2a)

Section 3. Ground for reconsideration. — The court shall grant reconsideration on the ground of errors of law or fact in the judgment, which requires no further proceedings. (3a)

Section 4. Form of motion and notice to the prosecutor. — The motion for a new trial or reconsideration shall be in writing and shall state the grounds on which it is based. If based on a newly-discovered evidence, the motion must be supported by affidavits of witnesses by whom such evidence is expected to be given or by duly authenticated copies of documents which are proposed to be introduced in evidence. Notice of the motion for new trial or reconsideration shall be given to the prosecutor. (4a)

Section 5. Hearing on motion. — Where a motion for a new trial calls for resolution of any question of fact, the court may hear evidence thereon by affidavits or otherwise. (5a)

Section 6. Effects of granting a new trial or reconsideration. — The effects of granting a new trial or reconsideration are the following:

(a) When a new trial is granted on the ground of errors of law or irregularities committed during the trial, all proceedings and evidence affected thereby shall be set aside and taken anew. The court may, in the interest of justice, allow the introduction of additional evidence.

(b) When a new trial is granted on the ground of newly-discovered evidence, the evidence already adduced shall stand and the newly-discovered and such other evidence as the court may, in the interest of justice, allow to be introduced shall be taken and considered together with the evidence already in the record.

© In all cases, when the court grants new trial or reconsideration, the original judgment shall be set aside or vacated and a new judgment rendered accordingly. (6a)

RULE 122

Appeal

Section 1. Who may appeal. — Any party may appeal from a judgment or final order, unless the accused will be placed in double jeopardy. (2a)

Section 2. Where to appeal. — The appeal may be taken as follows:

(a) To the Regional Trial Court, in cases decided by the Metropolitan Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court in Cities, Municipal Trial Court, or Municipal Circuit Trial Court;

(b) To the Court of Appeals or to the Supreme Court in the proper cases provided by law, in cases decided by the Regional Trial Court; and

© To the Supreme Court, in cases decided by the Court of Appeals. (1a)

Section 3. How appeal taken. —

(a) The appeal to the Regional Trial Court, or to the Court of Appeals in cases decided by the Regional Trial Court in the exercise of its original jurisdiction, shall be taken by filing a notice of appeal with the court which rendered the judgment or final order appealed from and by serving a copy thereof upon the adverse party.

(b) The appeal to the Court of Appeals in cases decided by the Regional Trial Court in the exercise of its appellate jurisdiction shall be by petition for review under Rule 42.

© The appeal to the Supreme Court in cases where the penalty imposed by the Regional Trial Court is death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment, or where a lesser penalty is imposed but for offenses committed on the same occasion or which arose out of the same occurrence that gave rise to the more serious offense for which the penalty of death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment is imposed, shall be by filing a notice of appeal in accordance with paragraph (a) of this section.

(d) No notice of appeal is necessary in cases where the death penalty is imposed by the Regional Trial Court. The same shall be automatically reviewed by the Supreme Court as provided in section 10 of this Rule.

(e) Except as provided in the last paragraph of section 13, Rule 124, all other appeals to the Supreme Court shall be by petition for review on certiorari under Rules 45. (3a)

Section 4. Publication of notice of appeal. — If personal service of the copy of the notice of appeal can not be made upon the adverse party or his counsel, service may be done by registered mail or by substituted service pursuant to sections 7 and 8 of Rule 13. (4a)

Section 5. Waiver of notice. — The appellee may waive his right to a notice that an appeal has been taken. The appellate court may, in its discretion, entertain an appeal notwithstanding failure to give such notice if the interests of justice so require. (5a)

Section 6. When appeal to be taken. — An appeal must be taken within fifteen (15) days from promulgation of the judgment or from notice of the final order appealed from. This period for perfecting an appeal shall be suspended from the time a motion for new trial or reconsideration is filed until notice of the order overruling the motion shall have been served upon the accused or his counsel at which time the balance of the period begins to run. (6a)

Section 7.Transcribing and filing notes of stenographic reporter upon appeal. — When notice of appeal is filed by the accused, the trial court shall direct the stenographic reporter to transcribe his notes of the proceedings. When filed by the People of the Philippines, the trial court shall direct the stenographic reporter to transcribe such portion of his notes of the proceedings as the court, upon motion, shall specify in writing. The stenographic reporter shall certify to the correctness of the notes and the transcript thereof, which shall consist of the original and four copies, and shall file the original and four copies with the clerk without unnecessary delay.

If death penalty is imposed, the stenographic reporter shall, within thirty (30) days from promulgation of the sentence, file with the clerk original and four copies of the duly certified transcript of his notes of the proceedings. No extension of time for filing of said transcript of stenographic notes shall be granted except by the Supreme Court and only upon justifiable grounds. (7a)

Section 8. Transmission of papers to appellate court upon appeal. — Within five (5) days from the filing of the notice of appeal, the clerk of the court with whom the notice of appeal was filed must transmit to the clerk of court of the appellate court the complete record of the case, together with said notice. The original and three copies of the transcript of stenographic notes, together with the records, shall also be transmitted to the clerk of the appellate court without undue delay. The other copy of the transcript shall remain in the lower court. (8a)

Section 9. Appeal to the Regional Trial Courts. —

(a) Within five (5) days from perfection of the appeal, the clerk of court shall transmit the original record to the appropriate Regional Trial Court.

(b) Upon receipt of the complete record of the case, transcripts and exhibits, the clerk of court of the Regional Trial Court shall notify the parties of such fact.

© Within fifteen (15) days from receipt of the said notice, the parties may submit memoranda or briefs, or may be required by the Regional Trial Court to do so. After the submission of such memoranda or briefs, or upon the expiration of the period to file the same, the Regional Trial Court shall decide the case on the basis of the entire record of the case and of such memoranda or briefs as may have been filed. (9a)

Section 10. Transmission of records in case of death penalty. — In all cases where the death penalty is imposed by the trial court, the records shall be forwarded to the Supreme Court for automatic review and judgment within five (5) days after the fifteenth (15) day following the promulgation of the judgment or notice of denial of a motion for new trial or reconsideration. The transcript shall also be forwarded within ten (10) days after the filing thereof by the stenographic reporter. (10a)

Section 11. Effect of appeal by any of several accused. —

(a) An appeal taken by one or more of several accused shall not affect those who did not appeal, except insofar as the judgment of the appellate court is favorable and applicable to the latter;

(b) The appeal of the offended party from the civil aspect shall not affect the criminal aspect of the judgment or order appealed from.

© Upon perfection of the appeal, the execution of the judgment or final order appealed from shall be stayed as to the appealing party. (11a)

Section 12. Withdrawal of appeal. — Notwithstanding the perfection of the appeal, the Regional Trial Court, Metropolitan Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court in Cities, Municipal Trial Court, or Municipal Circuit Trial Court, as the case may be, may allow the appellant to withdraw his appeal before the record has been forwarded by the clerk of court to the proper appellate court as provided in section 8, in which case the judgment shall become final. The Regional Trial Court may also, in its discretion, allow the appellant from the judgment of a Metropolitan Trial Court, Municipal Trial Court in Cities, Municipal Trial Court, or Municipal Circuit Trial Court to withdraw his appeal, provided a motion to that effect is filed before rendition of the judgment in the case on appeal, in which case the judgment of the court of origin shall become final and the case shall be remanded to the latter court for execution of the judgment. (12a)

Section 13. Appointment of counsel de oficio for accused on appeal. — It shall be the duty of the clerk of the trial court, upon filing of a notice of appeal, to ascertain from the appellant, if confined in prison, whether he desires the Regional Trial Court, Court of Appeals or the Supreme Court to appoint a counsel de oficio to defend him and to transmit with the record on a form to be prepared by the clerk of court of the appellate court, a certificate of compliance with this duty and of the response of the appellant to his inquiry. (13a)

RULE 123

Procedure in the Municipal Trial Courts

Section 1. Uniform Procedure. — The procedure to be observed in the Metropolitan Trial Courts, Municipal Trial Courts and Municipal Circuit Trial Courts shall be the same as in the Regional Trial Courts, except where a particular provision applies only to either of said courts and in criminal cases governed by the Revised Rule on Summary Procedure. (1a)

RULE 124

Procedure in the Court of Appeals

Section 1. Title of the case. — In all criminal cases appealed to the Court of Appeals, the party appealing the case shall be called the “appellant” and the adverse party the “appellee,” but the title of the case shall remain as it was in the court of origin. (1a)

Section 2. Appointment of counsel de oficio for the accused. — If it appears from the record of the case as transmitted that (a) the accused is confined in prison, (b) is without counsel de parte on appeal, or © has signed the notice of appeal himself, the clerk of court of the Court of Appeals shall designate a counsel de oficio.

An appellant who is not confined in prison may, upon request, be assigned a counsel de oficio within ten (10) days from receipt of the notice to file brief and he establishes his right thereto. (2a)

Section 3. When brief for appellant to be filed. — Within thirty (30) days from receipt by the appellant or his counsel of the notice from the clerk of court of the Court of Appeals that the evidence, oral and documentary, is already attached to the record, the appellant shall file seven (7) copies of his brief with the clerk of court which shall be accompanied by proof of service of two (2) copies thereof upon the appellee. (3a)

Section 4. When brief for appellee to be filed; reply brief of the appellant. — Within thirty (30) days from the receipt of the brief of the appellant, the appellee shall file seven (7) copies of the brief of the appellee with the clerk of court which shall be accompanied by proof of service of two (2) copies thereof upon the appellant.

Within twenty (20) days from receipt of the brief of the appellee, the appellant may file a reply brief traversing matters raised in the former but not covered in the brief of the appellant. (4a)

Section 5. Extension of time for filing briefs. — Extension of time for the filing of briefs will not be allowed except for good and sufficient cause and only if the motion for extension is filed before the expiration of the time sought to be extended. (5a)

Section 6. Form of briefs. — Briefs shall either be printed, encoded or typewritten in double space on the legal size good quality unglazed paper, 330 mm. in length by 216 mm. in width. (6a)

Section 7. Contents of brief. —The briefs in criminal cases shall have the same contents as provided in sections 13 and 14 of Rule 44. A certified true copy of the decision or final order appealed from shall be appended to the brief of appellant. (7a)

Section 8. Dismissal of appeal for abandonment or failure to prosecute. — The Court of Appeals may, upon motion of the appellee or motu proprio and with notice to the appellant in either case, dismiss the appeal if the appellant fails to file his brief within the time prescribed by this Rule, except where the appellant is represented by a counsel de oficio.

The Court of Appeals may also, upon motion of the appellee or motu proprio, dismiss the appeal if the appellant escapes from prison or confinement, jumps bail or flees to a foreign country during the pendency of the appeal. (8a)

Section 9. Prompt disposition of appeals. — Appeals of accused who are under detention shall be given precedence in their disposition over other appeals. The Court of Appeals shall hear and decide the appeal at the earliest practicable time with due regard to the rights of the parties. The accused need not be present in court during the hearing of the appeal. (9a)

Section 10. Judgment not to be reversed or modified except for substantial error. — No judgment shall be reversed or modified unless the Court of Appeals, after an examination of the record and of the evidence adduced by the parties, is of the opinion that error was committed which injuriously affected the substantial rights of the appellant. (10a)

Section 11. Scope of judgment. — The Court of Appeals may reverse, affirm, or modify the judgment and increase or reduce the penalty imposed by the trial court, remand the case to the Regional Trial Court for new trial or retrial, or dismiss the case. (11a)

Section 12. Power to receive evidence — The Court of Appeals shall have the power to try cases and conduct hearings, receive evidence and perform any and all acts necessary to resolve factual issues raised in cases (a) falling within its original jurisdiction, (b) involving claims for damages arising from provisional remedies, or © where the court grants a new trial based only on the ground of newly-discovered evidence. (12a)

Section 13. Quorum of the court; certification or appeal of cases to Supreme Court. — Three (3) Justices of the Court of Appeals shall constitute a quorum for the sessions of a division. The unanimous vote of the three (3) Justices of a division shall be necessary for the pronouncement of a judgment or final resolution, which shall be reached in consultation before the writing of the opinion by a member of the division. In the event that the three (3) Justices can not reach a unanimous vote, the Presiding Justice shall direct the raffle committee of the Court to designate two (2) additional Justices to sit temporarily with them, forming a special division of five (5) members and the concurrence of a majority of such division shall be necessary for the pronouncement of a judgment or final resolution. The designation of such additional Justices shall be made strictly by raffle and rotation among all other Justices of the Court of Appeals.

Whenever the Court of Appeals finds that the penalty of death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment should be imposed in a case, the court, after discussion of the evidence and the law involved, shall render judgment imposing the penalty of death, reclusion perpetua, or life imprisonment as the circumstances warrant. However, it shall refrain from entering the judgment and forthwith certify the case and elevate the entire record thereof to the Supreme Court for review. (13a)

Section 14. Motion for new trial. — At any time after the appeal from the lower court has been perfected and before the judgment of the Court of Appeals convicting the appellant becomes final, the latter may move for a new trial on the ground of newly-discovered evidence material to his defense. The motion shall conform with the provisions of section 4, Rule 121. (14a)

Section 15. Where new trial conducted. — When a new trial is granted, the Court of Appeals may conduct the hearing and receive evidence as provided in section 12 of this Rule or refer the trial to the court of origin. (15a)

Section 16. Reconsideration. — A motion for reconsideration shall be filed within fifteen (15) days after from notice of the decision or final order of the Court of Appeals, with copies served upon the adverse party, setting forth the grounds in support thereof. The mittimus shall be stayed during the pendency of the motion for reconsideration. No party shall be allowed a second motion for reconsideration of a judgment or final order. (16a)

Section 17. Judgment transmitted and filed in trial court. — When the entry of judgment of the Court of Appeals is issued, a certified true copy of the judgment shall be attached to the original record which shall be remanded to the clerk of the court from which the appeal was taken. (17a)

Section 18. Application of certain rules in civil to criminal cases. — The provisions of Rules 42, 44 to 46 and 48 to 56 relating to procedure in the Court of Appeals and in the Supreme Court in original and appealed civil cases shall be applied to criminal cases insofar as they are applicable and not inconsistent with the provisions of this Rule. (18a)

RULE 125

Procedure in the Supreme Court

Section 1. Uniform procedure. — Unless otherwise provided by the Constitution or by law, the procedure in the Supreme Court in original and in appealed cases shall be the same as in the Court of Appeals. (1a)

Section 2. Review of decisions of the Court of Appeals. — The procedure for the review by the Supreme Court of decisions in criminal cases rendered by the Court of Appeals shall be the same as in civil cases. (2a)

Section 3. Decision if opinion is equally divided. — When the Supreme Court en banc is equally divided in opinion or the necessary majority cannot be had on whether to acquit the appellant, the case shall again be deliberated upon and if no decision is reached after re-deliberation, the judgment of conviction of the lower court shall be reversed and the accused acquitted. (3a)

RULE 126

Search and Seizure

Section 1. Search warrant defined. — A search warrant is an order in writing issued in the name of the People of the Philippines, signed by a judge and directed to a peace officer, commanding him to search for personal property described therein and bring it before the court. (1)

Section 2. Court where application for search warrant shall be filed. — An application for search warrant shall be filed with the following:

a) Any court within whose territorial jurisdiction a crime was committed.

b) For compelling reasons stated in the application, any court within the judicial region where the crime was committed if the place of the commission of the crime is known, or any court within the judicial region where the warrant shall be enforced.

However, if the criminal action has already been filed, the application shall only be made in the court where the criminal action is pending. (n)

Section 3. Personal property to be seized. — A search warrant may be issued for the search and seizure of personal property:

(a) Subject of the offense;

(b) Stolen or embezzled and other proceeds, or fruits of the offense; or

© Used or intended to be used as the means of committing an offense. (2a)

Section 4. Requisites for issuing search warrant. — A search warrant shall not issue except upon probable cause in connection with one specific offense to be determined personally by the judge after examination under oath or affirmation of the complainant and the witnesses he may produce, and particularly describing the place to be searched and the things to be seized which may be anywhere in the Philippines. (3a)

Section 5. Examination of complainant; record. — The judge must, before issuing the warrant, personally examine in the form of searching questions and answers, in writing and under oath, the complainant and the witnesses he may produce on facts personally known to them and attach to the record their sworn statements, together with the affidavits submitted. (4a)

Section 6. Issuance and form of search warrant. — If the judge is satisfied of the existence of facts upon which the application is based or that there is probable cause to believe that they exist, he shall issue the warrant, which must be substantially in the form prescribed by these Rules. (5a)

Section 7. Right to break door or window to effect search. — The officer, if refused admittance to the place of directed search after giving notice of his purpose and authority, may break open any outer or inner door or window of a house or any part of a house or anything therein to execute the warrant or liberate himself or any person lawfully aiding him when unlawfully detained therein. (6)

Section 8. Search of house, room, or premise to be made in presence of two witnesses. — No search of a house, room, or any other premise shall be made except in the presence of the lawful occupant thereof or any member of his family or in the absence of the latter, two witnesses of sufficient age and discretion residing in the same locality. (7a)

Section 9. Time of making search. — The warrant must direct that it be served in the day time, unless the affidavit asserts that the property is on the person or in the place ordered to be searched, in which case a direction may be inserted that it be served at any time of the day or night. (8)

Section 10. Validity of search warrant. — A search warrant shall be valid for ten (10) days from its date. Thereafter it shall be void. (9a)

Section 11. Receipt for the property seized. — The officer seizing property under the warrant must give a detailed receipt for the same to the lawful occupant of the premises in whose presence the search and seizure were made, or in the absence of such occupant, must, in the presence of at least two witnesses of sufficient age and discretion residing in the same locality, leave a receipt in the place in which he found the seized property. (10a)

Section 12. Delivery of property and inventory thereof to court; return and proceedings thereon. — (a) The officer must forthwith deliver the property seized to the judge who issued the warrant, together with a true inventory thereof duly verified under oath.

(b) Ten (10) days after issuance of the search warrant, the issuing judge shall ascertain if the return has been made, and if none, shall summon the person to whom the warrant was issued and require him to explain why no return was made. If the return has been made, the judge shall ascertain whether section 11 of this Rule has been complained with and shall require that the property seized be delivered to him. The judge shall see to it that subsection (a) hereof has been complied with.

© The return on the search warrant shall be filed and kept by the custodian of the log book on search warrants who shall enter therein the date of the return, the result, and other actions of the judge.

A violation of this section shall constitute contempt of court.(11a)

Section 13. Search incident to lawful arrest. — A person lawfully arrested may be searched for dangerous weapons or anything which may have been used or constitute proof in the commission of an offense without a search warrant. (12a)

Section 14. Motion to quash a search warrant or to suppress evidence; where to file. — A motion to quash a search warrant and/or to suppress evidence obtained thereby may be filed in and acted upon only by the court where the action has been instituted. If no criminal action has been instituted, the motion may be filed in and resolved by the court that issued the search warrant. However, if such court failed to resolve the motion and a criminal case is subsequent filed in another court, the motion shall be resolved by the latter court. (n)

RULE 127

Provisional Remedies in Criminal Cases

Section 1. Availability of provisional remedies. — The provisional remedies in civil actions, insofar as they are applicable, may be availed of in connection with the civil action deemed instituted with the criminal action. (1a)

Section 2. Attachment. — When the civil action is properly instituted in the criminal action as provided in Rule 111, the offended party may have the property of the accused attached as security for the satisfaction of any judgment that may be recovered from the accused in the following cases:

(a) When the accused is about to abscond from the Philippines;

(b) When the criminal action is based on a claim for money or property embezzled or fraudulently misapplied or converted to the use of the accused who is a public officer, officer of a corporation, attorney, factor, broker, agent, or clerk, in the course of his employment as such, or by any other person in a fiduciary capacity, or for a willful violation of duty;

© When the accused has concealed, removed, or disposed of his property, or is about to do so; and

(d) When the accused resides outside the Philippines. (2a)